Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Yosemite National Park is a breathtaking wonderland nestled in California’s Sierra Nevada mountains, known worldwide for its dramatic granite cliffs, cascading waterfalls, and ancient, towering sequoias. From the moment you enter Yosemite Valley, you’re greeted by a majestic, almost surreal panorama: the sheer face of El Capitan rising nearly 3,000 feet above the valley floor, Half Dome’s iconic silhouette etched against the sky, and the enchanting mist of Bridalveil Fall tumbling down rocky slopes. Don’t let the prospect of adventuring by yourself deter you from seeing these staggering feats of nature. 48 hours in Yosemite is the perfect amount of time to see the most unforgettable sights, go on a few awe-inspiring hikes, and watch a breathtaking sunset or two.
These landscapes are more than scenic—they are a rare, living testament to the power of glaciers, volcanic activity, and tectonic forces that shaped the land over millions of years. Each vista in Yosemite offers a new sense of wonder and awe, combining rugged, untouched beauty with a peaceful serenity that draws millions of visitors each year. It’s no wonder Yosemite is consistently one of the most-visited parks parks in the National Park System!
Fast Facts About Yosemite National Park
Size: 747,956 acres
Visitors: 3,897,070 visitors annually (data from 2023)
Highest elevation: 13,114 feet at Mount Lyell
Closest Airports: Fresno-Yosemite (FAT) and Mammoth Yosemite (MMH) airports are both ~2.5 hour drive to Yosemite Valley; Sacramento Airport (SMF) is ~3.5 hour drive to Yosemite Valley
National Park Initiation: October 1st, 1890 by an Act of Congress (3rd national park in the USA)
Fun Fact: Yosemite is home to three groves of sequoias, and the oldest one— Grizzly Giant— is estimated to be about 3,000 years old
Yosemite’s place in history as one of the first protected landscapes in the world adds to its legacy. In 1864, during the heart of the Civil War, President Abraham Lincoln signed the Yosemite Grant. This made Yosemite Valley and Mariposa Grove the first public land ever set aside by the U.S. government for preservation and public use. This landmark decision was the foundation of the National Park system (NPS).
While Yellowstone is heralded as the first national park, much of the nomenclature used to protect Yellowstone land was modeled after the Yosemite Grant. The big difference? Yosemite is housed entirely in California, whereas Yellowstone occupies regions of Wyoming, Idaho, and Montana. Due to its multi-state occupancy Yellowstone became the first park protected nationally. Yosemite was not long after! In 1890, Yosemite was officially designated as a national park, making it the third in the NPS. Today, it stands not only as a paradise for outdoor enthusiasts and nature lovers but as a symbol of America’s commitment to preserving its most extraordinary natural treasures for future generations.
The Most Wonderful Time of the Year
The most popular time of year to visit is summer into early fall, with the highest visitation in July and August. This time of year, you can expect temperatures to get up into the 80s and 90s, but it will cool off into the 50s in the evening.
Having just visited mid-October, I am a staunch supporter of the slightly-off-season visit! With highs in the 70s, it was perfect for hiking… but not too cold to camp through the evening! No real chance of snow and likelihood of rain is still pretty minimal. The only downside is that the park has dried out some. Mirror Lake becomes more of an enchanting puddle and the Mist Trail is much less likely to soak you, compared to early summer. None of this takes a way from the beauty of the park— just a slightly different experience. Worth it, in my opinion, to deal with almost HALF as many fellow visitors!!
Thou Shall Not Pass
Due to issues with congestion and traffic in the park, a timed reservation system has been implemented at Yosemite. This only is in place during the busy season! In 2024, this was as follows:
4/13 – 6/30
Reservations only required for weekends and holidays from 5 am to 4 pm
7/1 – 8/16
Reservations required daily from 5 am to 4 pm
8/17 – 10/ 13
Reservations only required for weekends and holidays from 5 am to 3 pm
This differs from the $35/vehicle entrance fee everyone pays for admission into the park. The entry fee is enforced year-round as it’s important for preserving and maintaining the park. The timed entry reservation system is completely different! Its sole purpose being to control the influx of people into the park. This is an online reservation system, so there is a $2 fee. You can make your ticketed entry reservations here.
If you have camping or lodging reservations in the park or are on a park-authorized commercial tour, you do not need to worry about securing a timed entry reservation.
Accommodation Station
Yosemite National Park offers a diverse range of lodging options. If you’re looking to stay in the park and enjoy a bit more comfort and style, there’s a few different historic lodge and hotel options. For outdoorsmen (and women) more keen to be surrounded by nature’s simplicity, you actually have two different kinds of options here. There are 13 campgrounds in the park for a “typical” tent-camping experience. There’s also a handful of hybrid camping options including some permanent canvas tents and structures in the backcountry. Regardless of where you’re resting your head, each option brings a unique way to experience Yosemite. There really is a perfect retreat for every kind of adventurer.
As noted above, a nice perk of staying in the park is this precludes you from needing a timed entry pass, if you happen to be visiting during the high season months. Two birds with one stone!
Yosemite will sometimes close down an area for a season to do maintenance. All Lodge and Modified Camping availability is visible using the links below or at travelyosemite.com. Similarly, campground closures and anticipated re-openings can be found at recreation.gov.
* Campsites go like HOTCAKES!!! Campgrounds will be fully booked up weeks in advance, but there’s hope for last minute campers. I snagged 3 nights in the park with less than a week’s notice using Campflare. It’s an app that will let you know when a campsite in a given campground becomes available. Be prepared to act fast though because things do not stay vacant long!
** It’s worth noting, Camp 4 is an awesome campground, but it has a bit more of a hostel feel than other spots in the park, as it’s a shared site campground. Also, you do have to walk your tent and camp items a short distance. Overall it’s a bit less individual or private than other campgrounds in the park, but some people really dig that vibe. All in all, it’s a cheaper campground/campsite (for a solo traveler) at only $10/person/night.
Yosemite Valley Shuttle
Yosemite Valley is a popular area of the park, so to facilitate traffic and parking concerns, there are two shuttle systems within the valley. They both run from 7am to 10pm, hitting the key points of interest, as noted below. Since the East Valley shuttle runs a smaller loop, buses tend to arrive a little more frequently. Even at that, the longest wait time is estimated to be about 22 minutes.
Two Day Itinerary
While I am no stranger to a fun solo adventure, anything more than two or three days starts to feel like a lot of time by my lonesome. That’s just me though! I felt that about 48 hours in Yosemite was the perfect amount of time to experience the park’s highlights without feeling rushed. There’s ample time to explore iconic spots like Yosemite Valley, Glacier Point, and Mariposa Grove— taking in scenic views via a couple moderate-length hikes, a relaxing bike ride, and breathtaking drives.
It’s worth noting, everyone has different comfort levels, but ~8 miles is the most I like to hike by myself. If you are visiting Yosemite with friends or if you feel comfortable going on long hikes solo, Half Dome is one of the most renowned hikes in the park. The ~16 mile trek was a bit much for me to tackle alone, but it is an option! Especially if you’re open to staying a third day!
DAY 1
To make the most of a full day, it does help to arrive in Yosemite the night before. That way, when you wake up, you’re ready to hit the ground running. I stayed at Camp 4, which was very centrally located, but there’s certainly other lodge and campground options in the valley to choose from.
Vernal & Nevada Falls via the Mist Trail
The Vernal and Nevada Falls via the Mist Trail is an awesome hike because it combines breathtaking waterfalls, diverse terrain, and unforgettable views into one memorable hike. This trail takes you up close to the powerful cascades of Vernal Fall and Nevada Fall. A rather immersive experience, the waterfall mist cools off hikers as they ascend, hence the trail’s name. Climbing the granite stair-master-come-to-life alongside Vernal Fall is rather unforgettable, but so worth it as you’re rewarded with sweeping views of Yosemite Valley and the Merced River atop Nevada Falls.
The hike is around 6.5 miles from the trailhead. A heads up/FYI, I ended up parking in Curry Village, which made it more of an 8ish mile hike– just so you’re mentally prepared. It’s certainly not an impossible endeavor, but the 2,208 ft of elevation is definitely not easy peasy.
Yosemite Valley Loop Trail Bike Ride
After a rewarding hike it’s nice to just relax for a minute. While I loaded up the cooler and brought a bunch of food with me, it was super comforting to know Yosemite has loads of food options. It’s so peaceful to just snag a spot to rest for a bit and enjoy lunch with an awesome view.
Up next? A bike ride! The Yosemite Valley Loop is about 20 miles total, but even just doing part of it is a worthwhile adventure. The path weaves past Mirror Lake, El Capitan, the Meadow, Bridalveil Falls, and Yosemite Falls. It’s a bit of a choose your own adventure. Even better? There’s a free bike share program in Yosemite that allows use of bikes for 2 hours at a time. That was about all the physical activity I was keen on, after the morning hike, but The Yosemite Valley Lodge has bikes for rent as well if you’re looking to cruise around a bit longer ($30 Half Day/$40 Full Day).
photo via yosemite.org
Set Up Camp
If you’re down to camp, Upper Pines, Lower Pines, North Pines, and Camp 4 are all located in Yosemite Valley. For anyone planning a last minute trip in Yosemite’s busy summer season, Camp 4 might be your best chance at snagging a campsite as these are released one week out. The other three campgrounds open up campsite reservations 5 months in advance. North Pines is actually so sought after, there’s a lottery system in place as part of the booking process there! A friend recommended Camp 4 to me, and I loved it! It’s set up a bit different than typical national park campsites, but it lends itself to a fun, community environment.
Tunnel View
Finish the day out by taking in the sunset at Tunnel View. It’s hard not to feel like a photographer, with the sun painting El Capitan and Half Dome with rays of golden light. This spot is easily accessible, making it a popular choice for capturing postcard-worthy photos. Even if you don’t take a single picture, simply soaking in the magic of Yosemite’s dramatic landscapes is an unbeatable way to round out the day. The sweeping views from Tunnel View at sunset encapsulate both the grandeur and tranquility of Yosemite in an unforgettable scene.
DAY 2
Yosemite Valley Visitor Center
This is the largest visitor center in the park and the main hub for park information. It’s a must-stop for any park-goers looking to secure their park stamp! It also offers a buffet of resources like maps, exhibits, and interactive displays that cover the park’s history, geology, and wildlife.
I sometimes like to snag a couple postcards at the park visitor center to send to my sisters, and there’s a very conveniently located post office right around the corner. In general, there’s a lot in the area by the visitor center, so go to the bathroom, grab a snack, and get ready to go, because day two takes us out and away from the valley.
Glacier Point
Home to one of the most spectacular, panoramic views in the park, Glacier Point features sweeping vistas of Yosemite Valley, Half Dome, Yosemite Falls, and the High Sierra peaks. Sitting at over 7,200 feet, this viewpoint provides a breathtaking perspective of the valley and its renown, granite landmarks.
Depending on how much time you have or perhaps how your legs are feeling, you have two options for taking in the view. You can either take a short walk to a viewpoint or hike the Sentinel Dome and Taft Point Trail. The latter is about 5 miles round trip and a little over 1,000 feet of elevation. It makes for a nice, brisk start to the day. This is what I opted for (and loved it), but either way you’re going to have a beautiful morning.
Glacier Point is accessible by car for approximately late May through October or November, depending on conditions.
Mariposa Grove
Mariposa Grove is home to over 500 giant sequoias. These are one of the largest and oldest trees on Earth, with some towering over 200 feet tall and living for more than 2,000 years. These ancient giants, like the iconic Grizzly Giant, offer visitors a rare glimpse into the ancient natural world, making a walk through the grove a powerful, humbling experience. There’s a tranquility to the forest that is simply different from other regions of the park.
Getting to Mariposa Grove is a bit of an adventure. After arriving at the Mariposa Grove Welcome Plaza, everyone must take a shuttle to the grove. Once you arrive at the grove, there’s a few different hiking options, but we recommend the 2 mile Grizzly Giant Loop Trail. How many times in life do you have the opportunity to see a 3,000 year old tree??
photo via nps.gov
Mariposa Grove Shuttle Hours
6/25 – 9/2
8 am to 7 pm (last bus leaves Mariposa Grove at 8 pm). Buses pick up every 10 to 15 minutes
9/3 – 11/2
8 am to 5:30 pm (last bus leaves Mariposa Grove at 6:30 pm). Buses pick up about every 15 minutes
11/3 – 11/30
Weather permitting, 8 am to 3:30 pm (last bus leaves Mariposa Grove at 5:00 pm). Buses pick up about every 15 minutes
12/1 – 4/15 (at least)
No shuttle service available
When the shuttle service is not running, the only way to reach Mariposa Grove is via a 2 mile walk (each way) along the Washburn Trail or the Mariposa Grove Road.
Bunking Down
Where you choose to spend the night is rather dependent on where you are headed the next morning. I live in southern California so the Wawona campground was perfectly situated. That being said, if you are headed north, you might want to consider another campground or sleeping accommodation. If you decide to stay at the Wawona Campground, the Wawona Meadow is an awesome spot to stargaze!
photo via nps.gov
As a solo traveler, I felt 48 hours in Yosemite was the perfect amount to sample the park and experience the sights for myself. Exploring by myself, I’m always happy to have just gone out there and adventured, instead of always waiting to go with someone else. That being said, I’m already excited to head back in the future— hopefully to hike half dome with some friends! Life is a balance— happy travels!
A literal life saving queen, Kayla Grace is an Army nurse in southern California. She can be found patching patients up in the emergency department but is equally likely to be spotted out hiking or backpacking. She is also quite the coffee connoisseur, and she will go out of her way to find a local coffee shop when she visits somewhere new!
Badlands National Park in South Dakota is a unique and rugged landscape, known for its dramatic rock formations, deep canyons, and expansive prairies. The park is home to some of the most striking geological features in North America, with colorful layers of sedimentary rock that tell the story of millions of years of natural history. It’s also a haven for wildlife, including bison, bighorn sheep, and prairie dogs. Badlands is characterized by its otherworldly beauty and the sense of solitude that it offers. An adventurous half day in the Badlands is the pit-stop you can’t afford to miss!
If you’re driving through South Dakota, a half day in the Badlands National Park is ideal for experiencing the key highlights. The scenic Badlands Loop Road offers stunning viewpoints, allowing you to capture the essence of the park’s striking landscapes without feeling rushed. A few short hikes let you explore the rock formations up close. In just a few hours, you can see the park’s iconic formations, spot wildlife, and enjoy breathtaking views, making a half day the perfect introduction to the Badlands.
Fast Facts About Badlands National Park
Size: 244,000 acres
Visitors: 1,046,400 visitors annually (data from 2023)
Highest elevation: 3,340 feet at Red Shirt Table
Closest Airports: the Rapid City Regional Airport (RAP) is 70 miles away (~1.5 hour drive) or the Sioux Falls Regional Airport (FSD) is 240 miles (~4 hour drive)
National Park Initiation: November 10th, 1978 (established on the same day as Theodore Roosevelt, making them the 38th and 39th national parks)
Fun Fact: there are many native tribes associated with the park, but the Oglala Sioux Tribe’s Pine Ridge Indian Reservation is actually part of the southern region of the park
We recently moved from Wisconsin to Oregon. Instead of driving straight through, we decided to make a road trip out of it! We stopped at Custer State Park, Yellowstone, and the Tetons, but the views of South Dakota were the most unexpectedly breathtaking! Xavier kept us humble by staying incredibly stoic, despite all the excitement.
A Good Night’s Rest
Perhaps the most important part of maximizing your time on a busy day? Getting a good night’s sleep! There are certainly accommodations nearby when you are visiting Badlands, but what’s more convenient than staying in the park?? In-park accommodations tend to either be very economical (camping) or a little on the spendy side (lodge living). Either way you have great options to choose from. It’s worth noting, both camping and the lodge will fill up quickly. If you know this is where you want to stay, book sooner rather than later!
Cedar Pass RV and Campground
The Cedar Pass RV and Campground is located near the Ben Reifel Visitor Center. It has restroom and shower facilities as well as pretty easy access to all amenities of Cedar Pass Lodge. There’s 96 camp sites, and practically all of them have scenic views of the badlands formations.
Sage Creek Campground
The Sage Creek Campground is a bit more of a backcountry experience. This campground is located on Sage Creek Rim Road, with 22 sites. It’s free and first-come first-serve; however, it’s only accessible via an unpaved road that may temporarily close after winter storms and spring rains.
As an FYI, motor homes, pull behind trailers, and other recreational vehicles >18 ft are prohibited. Pit toilets and covered picnic tables are available, but not water. Potable water is available at the Ben Reifel Visitor Center.Generators are not permitted here.
Cedar Pass Lodge
The Cedar Pass Lodge is open for visitors to stay from April 19th– October 20th. You can bunk down in one-of-a-kind cabins with custom-made, regionally handcrafted lodgepole pine furniture. If you’re open to tasting the lodge’s take on native cuisine, the Cedar Pass Restaurant makes fresh fry bread daily for their Sioux Indian Tacos. Worth trying!!
It’s worth noting, if you happen to visit outside these months, you might want to pack some snacks (or lunch) for yourself as it’s a bit of a drive to get to the nearest grocery store or restaurant. The last thing anyone needs is to find themselves hungry and far away from food!
photo via www.cedarpasslodge.com
◁ An Action Packed Half Day ▷
Get ready for a little bit over everything in the Badlands! While the weather can get quite warm in the summer months, even in August, it can still feel cool in the mornings. It’s worth it to get up early to ensure you’re not hiking in the heat of the day. With its location not too far off the interstate, a half day is the perfect amount of time to see a vibrant sunrise, a couple adventurous hikes, a handful of memorable overlooks… and hopefully a bison spotting or two.
There are three entrances into the park. The Pinnacles and Northeast entrances are relatively easy to access off of I-90. If you find yourself making a cross-country road trip, like we did, this stop might not be much of a detour!
Big Badlands Overlook
The Big Badlands Overlook is right inside the Northeast entrance of the park. This makes it a perfect first place to pull over and pop out! Even if it wasn’t conveniently located, it would still be a must-see spot in Badlands National Park because it offers sweeping, panoramic views of the park’s dramatic landscape. From this vantage point, you can take in the colorful layers of eroded rock formations, deep canyons, and rugged cliffs that truly define the Badlands. The overlook provides an excellent introduction to the park’s unique geology and is especially stunning at sunrise, with the soft morning light enhancing the vibrant colors of the terrain. It’s a very accessible viewpoint— perfect for capturing the park’s vast beauty.
The Door Trail
The Door Trail is a unique hike. It starts along a boardwalk and becomes a bit more of a choose-your-own-adventure. Hikers can explore the natural terrain for a more immersive adventure, following numbered signs that lead to the end-of-trail viewpoint. This hiking experience offers visitors an up-close experience of the rugged landscape, while not being too overwhelming as the trail is only 1 mile round trip. Its mix of ease and rewarding views makes it a great option for visitors of all ages and abilities.
The Notch Trail
If you only do one hike in the Badlands, it should be The Notch Trail! Even though it’s only 1.5 miles in total, it features a unique blend of experiences: a steep wooden ladder climb, narrow pathways, and dramatic views of the surrounding Badlands formations. The trail leads you through canyons and cliffs, culminating in a spectacular overlook of the White River Valley. The Notch Trail’s obstacles and breathtaking views make it a bit more adventurous than you might initially presume, for those seeking a bit of thrill in a relatively short distance.
Don’t be fooled, by the ladder— it’s a much steeper climb than it appears to be!
White River Valley Overlook
The White River Valley Overlook stands out from other viewpoints because it offers expansive views of the park’s eroded cliffs and spires with the vast White River Valley stretching out in the distance. Unlike some other overlooks that focus on the more compact rock formations, this viewpoint gives visitors a true sense of the Badlands’ wide-open spaces and the interplay between the rugged badlands terrain and the surrounding grasslands. The contrast between the jagged formations and the rolling valley below makes it a particularly unique and serene spot.
We especially loved it because there’s a worn path that ventures out into the ridge spires. As always, proceed with caution, but it’s fun to have a bit more immersive feel!
Panorama Point
Panorama Point is special because it offers visitors a sweeping, 360-degree view of the park’s vast, layered landscape. It lives up to its panoramic name by providing a comprehensive view of the surrounding badlands, prairie, and distant horizons. This makes it an ideal spot to fully appreciate the park’s impressive terrain.
Pinnacles Overlook
Pinnacles Overlook offers one of the most expansive views in the park. From a towering vantage point, the rugged cliffs, eroded spires, and deep canyons Badlands are known for are showcased. Pinnacles Overlook is also a prime spot for wildlife sightings, including bison, bighorn sheep, and prairie dogs. This makes it a must-see stop for nature lovers and photographers alike!
A half day in the Badlands National Park was an unexpected delight as we made our way across the country. The technicolor spires and canyons really are something to behold! If you are looking for the closest neighboring national park, you don’t have to look very far. Wind Cave National Park is only 2 hours away… as is Custer State Park! We hope you have a lovely adventure— happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Grand Teton National Park, located in Wyoming, is a breathtaking destination known for its towering peaks, pristine alpine lakes, and abundant wildlife. Dominated by the jagged Teton Range, the park offers visitors a stunning mix of rugged mountain landscapes, lush forests, and serene valleys. Outdoor enthusiasts can enjoy endless activities, from hiking and boating to wildlife spotting and photography, with the iconic Jackson Hole valley as a backdrop. Whether you’re seeking adventure or simply want to soak in the park’s natural beauty, the Tetons and all the top highlights are a must-visit for anyone exploring the American West.
The staggering Teton peaks are nothing short of awe-inspiring, and a full day in Grand Teton National Park provides the perfect amount of time to experience its most iconic highlights. If you really enjoy hiking, you could easily spend a few days here; however, a single day affords you the time to capture the essence of the Tetons without feeling rushed.
Fast Facts About GrAND TETON National Park
Size: 310,000 acres
Visitors: 3,417,106 visitors (data from 2023)
Closest Airport: Jackson Hole Airport — this is the only commercial airport located entirely within a National Park (in the US)
Became a National Park: in 1929 by an Act of Congress
Highest point: 13,770 feet at the peak of Grand Teton mountain
Fun Fact: the coldest temperature recorded in the park was a whopping -63°F! Brrrrrr!
We recently moved from Wisconsin to Oregon, and instead of driving straight through, we decided to make a road trip out of it! We stopped at the Badlands, Custer State Park, and Yellowstone, but the views of the Tetons might have just been the most astounding. Xavier kept us humble by sleeping through all of the breathtaking views.
‘Twas the Night Before
There are loads of accommodation options when you’re visiting the Tetons because Jackson is close enough that it makes for a convenient base camp. The only thing more convenient? Staying in the park! In-park accommodations tend to either be very economical (camping) or a little on the spendy side (lodge living). Either way you have lots of options to choose from— you can explore them all below. It’s worth noting, both camping and the lodges will fill up quickly. If you know this is where you want to stay, book sooner rather than later!
Get ready for an action packed day! The below order of stops is loosely organized around starting your day in Jackson; however, the stops can be re-organized however it makes sense for your diving plan! Get ready for a couple of gorgeous hikes, a handful of postcard-worthy viewpoints, and a dreamy relaxation spot to end the day!
Driving the loop as detailed below takes right around two hours total. This really flies by when you’re popping out for different stops along the way! You can see the stops from a bird’s eye view below.
Mormon Row
Mormon Row is a fantastic sunrise spot due to its iconic views of the Teton Range, with the historic barns of Mormon Row in the foreground. As the sun rises, it bathes the mountains in soft, golden light, creating a breathtaking contrast between the rugged peaks and the pastoral setting. The weathered barns are remnants of early Mormon settlers, and they add a unique and photogenic element to the scene. The calm morning air, wildlife activity, and serene atmosphere make sunrise at Mormon Row a magical experience. Just be aware, this is by no means an “underrated” sunrise spot…. you will be one of many photographers, so if you’re committed to the shot, you’ll want to arrive early!
Jenny Lake
Nestled at the base of the Teton Range, the crystal-clear waters of Jenny Lake reflect the towering peaks, creating picture-perfect views. This is arguably the most popular spot in the park, so even if you aren’t up to catch the sunrise, you should plan to head here first! The lake itself is serene and beautiful, but it also serves as a gateway to some of the park’s most-hiked trails: Hidden Falls and Inspiration Point. Its accessibility and breathtaking surroundings make it a must-visit spot in the Tetons.
Spending a full day in the Tetons means you have time for a couple hikes. While you can hike around Jenny Lake to get to the Inspiration Point and Hidden Falls trailhead, the boat ride there is rather scenic. It’s also helpful for the economy of time on an action-packed day. Clocking in around 2 miles, this is a perfect way to start the day, without feeling too overwhelming. Hidden Falls is certainly worth stopping at, but the views from Inspiration Point are the crown jewel of this boating and hiking extravaganza.
view of Jenny Lake at Inspiration Point
Hidden Falls
Boats depart every 10-15 minutes, running continuously throughout the day. They don’t take reservations, you simply pay upon arrival and hop on the boat. Pricing can be found here.
baby’s first boat ride!
Be Bear Aware: If you already own bear spray don’t forget to pack it, and if you don’t own some, STRONGLY consider either renting or purchasing some. Bear sightings are not uncommon in Grand Teton National Park— especially when out hiking. The hikes included in this itinerary are well trafficked enough by other people, but it’s always better to be safe than sorry!
bear spray at the ready, even at Inspiration Point!
Taggart Lake
Now, the Inspiration Point trail is a really beautiful and amazing experience, but you end up with an awesome view of the lake… you don’t really have a view of the Tetons. For that reason, we feel you need to do at least one other hike to fully take in the Tetons.
We LOVED the Taggart Lake hike! Since we’d already trekked a bit at Jenny Lake, the sub-500 feet of elevation and just-over-3.5 mile length was welcome. Plus the views of the lake were absolutely gorgeous— pictures don’t quite do it justice. This is the kind of spot where you wouldn’t be sad to pack a snack and a sparkling water, and just hang out for a bit, taking it in before you head back! We felt this was a perfect compliment to the Inspiration Point hike– different enough that you get two unique hiking experiences in the park.
To save a little time/distance, you could treat this trail as an out and back instead of a loop… it might shave off half a mile or so. If you have a bit extra time, you can keep stepping to Bradley Lake and hit both! As an alternate option, the trailhead for Delta Lake isn’t far; however, this trail, while beautiful, might be a bit much (~8 miles + >2,ooo ft elevation) for a one-day itinerary.
beautiful teton views on the trail to Taggart Lake
Schwabacher Landing
Schwabacher Landing provides the most picturesque views of the Teton Range, reflected in the calm waters of the Snake River. This requires a short walk from the parking lot, making it fun to stop at different points along the path, to find your perfect shot.
Snake River Overlook
This overlook provides panoramic views of the Snake River winding through the valley with the Teton Range as a majestic backdrop, perfect for scenic photos and iconic landscapes. The juxtaposition of the river against the mountains makes this a must-stop!
Colter Bay Lakeshore
Located along Jackson Lake, Colter Bay offers serene views of the Tetons. There’s no bad viewpoints in the Tetons, but I think this one just might be the best. There’s also recreational opportunities like boating and kayaking, and easy access to nature trails, making it as picturesque as it is family friendly.
While the fun activities might not make the agenda with only one day in the park, it’s worth grabbing a beer at Leek’s Marina & Pizzeria. While the views here are truly incredible, the pizza….. was not. Perhaps we came on an off day, but alas, can’t say we recommend the pizza– the beer was good though!
A bit farther south, the Trapper Grill sits on Lake Jackson. We didn’t stop here, but the menu seems solid, and the views look sublime! Even if you don’t grab lunch or dinner at the Trapper Grill, the Signal Mountain Lodge General Store is right next door, which makes for a convenient spot to grab some lakeshore relaxation snacks.
String Lake & Leigh Lake
To round out the loop around the park, head back down to String Lake and Leigh Lake. This area is a bit of an underrated gem, and it’s the perfect place to wind down. This is by no means a secret spot, but we were so enchanted with how cozy this area was. There are loads of little alcove ‘nooks’ along the lake, with a bench and small sandy beach area. There’s also a scenic walking path between String Lake and Leigh Lake if you are looking for one final stroll to end the day.
taking a little dip— beware the water is COLD!
scenic path/trail between String Lank and Leigh Lake
Grand Teton National Park is amazing because you can appreciate the staggering beauty of the park by just driving through it. The more you have time to explore the more immersive the experience becomes, but you truly can spend a full day in the park and leave feeling satisfied with the sights, sounds, and experiences. This is a park we are already excited to come back to!
While we just have the one little peanut, our friends over at Plan More Adventures tackled a Yellowstone and Tetons trip with three kiddos. You can check it out here. We hope you have a lovely adventure— happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Yellowstone National Park is a cornucopia of sights and experiences. It was the first national park– not just in the United States but in the world! From the eternally iconic Old Faithful Geyser to the dozens of dazzling hot springs in the park to the breathtaking Grand Canyon of Yellowstone and all the little wonders in between, Yellowstone is memorable! One day certainly goes fast, but we can help you maximize your time!
In a park of this magnitude, you could easily spend a week hiking and leisurely exploring the park. However, if you’re planning a multi-park road trip or perhaps trekking across the country, sometimes there’s only time for the essentials. If you’re hoping to hit the highlights, we have a jam-packed one day itinerary for the adventurer looking to do the most. For anyone looking to spend two days in the park, we have a bit more in depth itinerary here.
Fast Facts About Yellowstone National Park
Size: 2,221,766 acres
Visitors: 4,501,382 visitors (data from 2023)
Closest Airport: the Jackson Hole airport (JAC) is ~50 miles from the south entrance of the park and the Bozeman airport (BZN) is ~90 miles from the north entrance
Became a National Park: March 1st, 1872 when President Ulysses S. Grant signed the Yellowstone National Park Protection Act (first national park in the United States AND in the world)
Highest point: 11,358 feet at Eagle Peak
Fun Fact: Yellowstone is larger than Rhode Island and Delaware combined! Even more fun— more than half the world’s geysers exist in Yellowstone.
road trippin’
We recently spent a few days in Yellowstone as part of a cross country road trip, and we found Yellowstone to be unique for a few different reasons. It truly is a diverse park. Yellowstone has hot springs, geysers, mountains, an incredible canyon, waterfalls, and amazing opportunities for wildlife encounters. The breadth of experiences here is special!
Yellowstone is also one of the most tourist-friendly national parks we’ve been to. What do we mean by that? There’s good to excellent accessibility at most of the viewpoints, lots of bathrooms, lodge accommodations, campgrounds, restaurants, gas stations throughout the park etc. It feels like a park that’s equipped for large volumes of visitors, without going toooo far to feel like a theme park-esque experience.
making an entrance
There are five entrances into Yellowstone: East, Northeast, North, West, and South. Realistically, the entrance you plan to arrive through will dictate the order that you hit everything. As such, we’ve detailed the top must-do spots and included a map of where exactly everything is, to help you see the day from a bird’s eye view.
Grand Loop Road effectively makes a circle through the park, so this road serves as the backbone of our highlight reel. It also simplifies navigation in the park. Service in the park tends to be pretty poor, so the straightforward driving route and copious signage helps ensure everyone gets where they intend to.
Rest Up
How to make the most of a full day? Get a good night’s sleep! And when you only have one day in Yellowstone, it’s important to make the most of your time! If you are able to arrive in the park the night before, it can help with the flow of your day. There are accommodations near the various entrances to the park, but most entrances to the park (i.e. all but the north entrance) are still about an hour away from the big sights.
If you want to stay in the park, there are two general options: camping or lodge life. The park lodges are unique to each region of the park they’re in, which gives each place historic character. You can check out all nine options here. The lodge and cabin stays in the park tend to run a little on the expensive side, but park of what you’re paying for is the location of being steps away from something amazing!!
It’s a little strange but four of the campground’s sites are available through recreation.gov (linked here). The other five are booked through the lodge reservation webpage (linked here). The booking itself is relatively straightforward— just a little peculiar to have it split up!
photo taken by our friend Zachary Splinter (IG: master_splint3r)
THE KEY STOPS:
Between the multiple entrances to the park and the many welcome stations at each entrance, the arrival process into the park is as streamlined as it gets; however, it’s always a good idea to get into the park sooner rather than later (or just stay in the park overnight :)). Things start to get more crowded around 10am, so an earlier start helps ensure you can enjoy a bit more nature to yourself.
Grand Canyon of Yellowstone
The Grand Canyon of Yellowstone stretches for about 24 miles, and this amazing feature is worth taking in from a few different vantage points. There’s a bunch of awesome viewpoints to take in the canyon from different vantage points. We found Yellowstone to be a more accessible park, so even if you can’t or don’t want to hike, you can still take in the awesome vistas, just steps from your car.
Artist Point
If you’re in the park early, this is a nice overlook to wander over to. You are able to see both the canyon as well as the waterfall from afar– it’s a nice spot to catch the sunrise! With this as your first stop, it’s an amazing way to start the day.
view of Yellowstone canyon at Artist Point
view of the falls at Artist Point
North Rim Hike… or Drive.
The North Rim Overlooks are connected by road as well as hiking trail, making them relatively easy to access to a variety of adventurers. While there are overlooks up by the parking lot, some of the cooler views are accompanied by a bit of sweat equity. For example, the Brink of Lower Falls trail drops 600 feet over a short 0.4-mile stretch of switchbacks to the Lower Falls viewpoint. This was probably our favorite spot along the North Rim but they are all worth hitting!
view of Yellowstone Canyon from Lower Falls (falls directly to the right)
Lookout Point, Grand View, and Inspiration Point all afford slightly different vantage points. Similar to Lower Falls, Lookout Point (view pictured below) also has a combination of stairs and graded descent that are worth the huffin’ and puffin’. Whether you’re driving or hiking, you won’t regret going to at each stop!
view of the falls from Lookout Point
If you look closely or zoom in on the above picture, just to the right of the falls, you will see a viewing platform with a handful of people standing on. This is the Lower Falls viewpoint!
steps down to lower viewpoint at Lookout Point
The Yellowstone River and Canyon are truly breathtaking and it’s so grounding to take in the technicolor wonder. What makes this canyon even more interesting is its constant evolution. If you look out across the canyon walls, you’ll notice some steamy, active hydrothermal features. The Grand Canyon of Yellowstone was our favorite area of the park!
view from Inspiration Point
Hayden Valley
Driving south from the Grand Canyon of Yellowstone, along Grand Loop Road, will take you through Hayden Valley. This approximately 7 mile stretch of landscape is gorgeous to drive through. Keep your eyes peeled for wildlife because this area is one of the best spots in the park to spot some of the large mammals the park is home to. The grizzly and black bears are spotted more frequently in the spring and early summer days. They tend to be found at higher elevations as the summer goes on, but you never know where you might see one. Bison are more likely to be seen at any time throughout the summer, with coyotes commonly spotted as well!
There’s so many different areas to pull out if you *think* you might see something off in the distance…. or if you want to simply stare at the bison grazing nearby. There’s no singular recommended destination or overlook in Hayden Valley. It’s simply a beautiful drive with a high probability of animal sightings. This is first on the list because early risers may be even more likely to spot animals if you’re driving through at dawn (or dusk).
If you see a bunch of cars pulled over, there’s a good chance someone has spotted something exciting! If you see a cluster of cars, it doesn’t hurt to pull over as well! You never know what you might see!
photo via nps.gov
Old Faithful
Timing up your Old Faithful experience takes a bit of planning. This iconic geyser erupts every 94 or 68 minutes… plus or minus ten minutes. So while the eruptions are routine, they’re just far apart enough that you might find yourself waiting a while if you arrive right after the previous eruption. The Old Faithful Visitor Center has a sign out that estimates when to expect Old Faithful’s next performance. This is helpful but having something online is just a bit more useful as you try and time up your morning.
The Old Faithful area of the park will get busy… there’s no getting around that, but if you get to the park relatively early, you do have time to do the Grand Prismatic Overlook hike first. We recommend this because the ambient temperature earlier in the day is still rather chilly– even in the summer months. Why is this relevant? Well, Old Faithful is erupting hot hot hot water, so if it’s cold outside, the water plume becomes pretty shrouded in steam. Still neat to see but perhaps not the expected view.
Upper Geyser Basin hike
The Upper Geyser Basin hike begins just steps away from Old Faithful and showcases dozens of hot springs and geysers (AllTrails link here). This boardwalk trail stretches about 3.5 miles total. While it’s totally possible to just walk part of the trail and then head back, in our opinion, some of the more impressive features are further along the trail. Morning Glory is the final hot spring on the path, and we were glad we walked all the way to the end to check it out!
Yellowstone is home to so many hot springs and geysers, you’re be hard-pressed to hit them all, even with a few days in the park. While this walk doesn’t highlight all of them, you can leave knowing you were able to see some unique geological wonders.
hot springs along the Upper Geyser Basin boardwalk
Morning Glory hot spring
Grand Prismatic Hot Spring Overlook Trail
There’s so many hot springs in Yellowstone, but none is more memorable (or larger) than the Grand Prismatic. You can certainly check out the overlook at ‘ground level’, but in my opinion, the bird’s eye view is superior. There’s a bit of sweat equity involved, but the 1.5 miles round trip is very manageable (AllTrails link here)!
When you’re nearing the hot spring, you want to park at the Fairy Falls trailhead. If you’re driving around Grand Loop road clockwise, this means you’ll take the turnoff for the Fairy Falls trail, which is actually just before the Grand Prismatic overlook parking lot.
This is a relatively small viewing area and it does get rather popular, so come with patience in your heart. When you’re in Yellowstone— especially in the summer— it seems like everyone’s advice is to get to ‘XYZ’ early. Generally speaking, this is great advice, but when you’re only in the park for one day, you can’t hit everything early!
In our opinion, the Grand Prismatic is a spot that’s better to hit later. The colors of the hot spring “pop” and become more vibrant when the sky is overhead, so arriving a little later in the day should afford you awesome, vibrant views. It’s never fun to do a hike in the hottest part of the day, BUT at least it’s a relatively short hike!
Mammoth Hot Springs (optional)
Just inside the North entrance of the park, you’ll find Mammoth Hot Springs.Yellowstone is home to many different hot springs– what makes these springs unique are the travertine terraces that have formed as a result of the hot springs. The thermal water rises through limestone, carrying dissolved limestone to the surface, creating the memorable terrace formation these hot springs are known for.
To take in the multi-level wonder, there’s a boardwalk path that weaves in and through the hot spring. If you hit every nook and cranny, it’s about 2.5 miles long. Now, if you have time and want to stretch your legs, it’s a nice board walk saunter with a healthy amount of stairs. If you’re rushing along, you can more or less get the gist of it by poking around for 15 minutes or so.
If you’re planning on either arriving or departing the park via the North entrance, stopping here is a no-brainer. The terraces are rather unique and certainly worth a stop if it’s along the way. That being said, and this might be an unpopular opinion, but if you’re coming and going through the East, South, or West entrances, tacking on this stop miiiight not be worth the drive time. Beauty is in the eye of the beholder, but if we were crunched for time AND knowing this is the only big stop in the north part of the park, we’re not sure the “awe-factor” here is worth allllllll the extra driving it would take to see this single geological wonder.
One day in Yellowstone flies by! Maximizing your time can feel tricky… trying to see as much as you can but not be so rushed you hardly enjoy it. Our plan should thread that needle perfectly. We hope you have an amazing time exploring all the breathtaking beauty this historic national park has to offer. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Yellowstone National Park is a cornucopia of sights and experiences… a crown jewel in the national park system, sitting atop a super volcano. It was the first national park– not just in the United States but in the world! Whether you’re looking forward to the iconic sights or the quiet moments of peaceful nature, Yellowstone won’t disappoint. From the famous Old Faithful Geyser to the dozens of dazzling hot springs in the park to the breathtaking Grand Canyon of Yellowstone and all the little wonders in between, Yellowstone is memorable!
In a park of this magnitude, you could easily spend a week hiking and leisurely exploring. However, if you’re planning a multi-park road trip or perhaps trekking across the country, sometimes there’s only time for the essentials. If you’re hoping to hit all regions of the park, we recommend at least two days in the park. Yellowstone is large, so you will spend a couple hours just driving around. And that’s before you even get out to see anything!
If you’re zooming through and are looking for a one-day packed-to-the-gills itinerary, you can find that here.
Fast Facts About Yellowstone National Park
Size: 2,221,766 acres
Visitors: 4,501,382 visitors (data from 2023)
Closest Airport: the Jackson Hole airport (JAC) is ~50 miles from the south entrance of the park and the Bozeman airport (BZN) is ~90 miles from the north entrance
Became a National Park: March 1st, 1872 when President Ulysses S. Grant signed the Yellowstone National Park Protection Act (first national park in the United States AND in the world)
Highest point: 11,358 feet at Eagle Peak
Fun Fact: Yellowstone is larger than Rhode Island and Delaware combined! Even more fun— more than half the world’s geysers exist in Yellowstone.
road trippin’
We recently spent a few days in Yellowstone as part of a cross country road trip. This was our first big hiking trip with our son, so we were stoked to make the most of it. We’ve been told it gets more challenging as kiddos can run away, but man oh man… it was notably more time consuming to get out the door with an 8 month old in tow vs. just rolling out of bed ourselves. Everything we did, we did with him along for the ride, so whether you’re a solo traveler or parent to a young, wild soul, this itinerary should flow nicely for you!
There are five entrances into Yellowstone: East, Northeast, North, West, and South. This itinerary is centered around an arrival through the east entrance; however, the days’ activities circumduct the park, so you can hop into the “circle” from any entrance. Yellowstone is immense, so this is by no means an all inclusive list BUT this is a great snapshot of Yellowstone’s must-see highlights.
Grand Loop Road effectively makes a circle through the park, so this road serves as the backbone of our highlight reel. It also simplifies navigation in the park. Service in the park tends to be pretty poor, so the straightforward driving route and copious signage helps ensure everyone gets where they intend to.
DAY ONE
The day starts arriving through the East entrance of the park. Between the multiple entrances to the park and the many welcome stations at each entrance, the arrival process into the park is as streamlined as it gets; however, it’s always a good idea to get into the park earlier than later. Things start to get more crowded around 10am, so an earlier start helps ensure you can enjoy a bit more nature to yourself.
Hayden Valley
Driving north along Grand Loop Road will take you through Hayden Valley. This approximately 7 mile stretch of landscape is gorgeous to drive through. Keep your eyes peeled for wildlife because this area is one of the best spots in the park to spot some of the large mammals the park is home to. The grizzly and black bears are spotted more frequently in the spring and early summer days. They tend to be found at higher elevations as the summer goes on, but you never know where you might see one. Bison are more likely to be seen at any time throughout the summer, with coyotes commonly spotted as well!
There’s so many different areas to pull out if you *think* you might see something off in the distance…. or if you want to simply stare at the bison grazing nearby. There’s no singular recommended destination or overlook in Hayden Valley. It’s simply a beautiful drive with a high probability of animal sightings. This is first on the list because early risers may be even more likely to spot animals if you’re driving through at dawn (or dusk).
If you see a bunch of cars pulled over, there’s a good chance someone has spotted something exciting! If you see a cluster of cars, it doesn’t hurt to pull over as well! You never know what you might see!
photo via nps.gov
Grand Canyon of Yellowstone
The Grand Canyon of Yellowstone stretches for about 24 miles, and this amazing feature is worth taking in from a few different vantage points. There’s a bunch of awesome viewpoints to take in the canyon from different vantage points. We found Yellowstone to be a more accessible park, so even if you can’t or don’t want to hike, you can still take in the awesome vistas, just steps from your car.
Artist Point
If you’re in the park early, this is a nice overlook to wander over to. You are able to see both the canyon as well as the waterfall from afar– it’s a nice spot to catch the sunrise! Just an amazing way to start the day.
view of Yellowstone canyon at Artist Point
view of the falls at Artist Point
North Rim Hike… or Drive.
The North Rim Overlooks are connected by road as well as hiking trail, making them relatively easy to access to a variety of adventurers. While there are overlooks up by the parking lot, some of the cooler views are accompanied by a bit of sweat equity. For example, the Brink of Lower Falls trail drops 600 feet over a short 0.4-mile stretch of switchbacks to the Lower Falls viewpoint. This was probably our favorite spot along the North Rim but they are all worth hitting!
view of Yellowstone Canyon from Lower Falls (falls directly to the right)
Lookout Point, Grand View, and Inspiration Point all afford slightly different vantage points. Similar to Lower Falls, Lookout Point (view pictured below) also has a combination of stairs and graded descent that are worth the huffin’ and puffin’. Whether you’re driving or hiking, you won’t regret going to at each stop!
view of the falls from Lookout Point
If you look closely or zoom in on the above picture, just to the right of the falls, you will see a viewing platform with a handful of people standing on. This is the Lower Falls viewpoint!
steps down to lower viewpoint at Lookout Point
The Yellowstone River and Canyon are truly breathtaking and it’s so grounding to take in the technicolor wonder. What makes this canyon even more interesting is its constant evolution. If you look out across the canyon walls, you’ll notice some steamy, active hydrothermal features. The Grand Canyon of Yellowstone was our favorite area of the park!
view from Inspiration Point
Canyon Village
Yellowstone is unique for many reasons, the least of which being that it’s one of the most “city-ized” national parks we’ve been to. Now, millions of acres of the park remain largely unavailable and untouched by visiting tourists (as it should), so it’s less commercial and more self-sufficient. For example there’s multiple post offices throughout the park. There’s not just gas stations but small auto body shops as well. The park is home to multiple lodges, restaurants, and visitor centers too. And more bathrooms than I’ve seen in any other national park!!
Canyon Village is one of the small hubs or “cities” in the park. North Rim Drive ends right near this area, so it’s a perfect stop to grab some lunch…. or to send off a postcard!
photo via nps.gov
Lamar Valley (optional)
As you follow Grand Loop Road north, you will find yourself heading to the northeast corner of the park. As you approach Theodore Lodge, there will be an opportunity to turn right onto Northeast Entrance Road. While it’s not quite time to leave the park yet, Lamar River and the Lamar Valley are down this corridor.
Similar to Hayden Valley, Lamar Valley is a gorgeous expanse of scenery and known wildlife spotting locale. If you’re hoping to spot a wolf, this is actually the best place in the park to have a chance; however, dawn and dusk tend to be the best times to see them. While we didn’t see any wolves, we did see a whoooole bunch of bison!
Northeast Entrance Road stretches about 33 miles and takes about an hour to drive, so driving all the way out and back takes around 2 hours. Depending on how early you start your day, you might have time for this, but Lamar Valley is in the inner half of the drive, so going the full length of the road isn’t exactly necessary– especially during a two day trip!
Mammoth Hot Springs
Just inside the North entrance of the park, you’ll find Mammoth Hot Springs. Yellowstone is home to many different hot springs– what makes these springs unique are the travertine terraces that have formed as a result of the hot springs. The thermal water rises through limestone, carrying dissolved limestone to the surface, creating the memorable terrace formation these hot springs are known for.
To take in the multi-level wonder, there’s a boardwalk path that weaves in and through the hot spring. If you hit every nook and cranny, it’s about 2.5 miles long. After a stretch of drive time in the car, it feels good to stretch the legs out!
Catch Some Zzzzzs
There are so many options for where you may choose to rest your weary bones for the night. Day two is primarily focused on exploring the southern half of the park, so getting lodging farther south just makes it easier to hit the ground running in the morning. Accommodations in Yellowstone have a huge range. You can have convenience and breathtaking views with a budget-friendly price tag by camping in the park. There’s luxe lodge stays that will be well appointed and opportunely located. There’s also West Yellowstone just minutes outside the park.
Camping Out
If you own a tent, sleeping bag, and sleeping pad, this is a no brainer!! All three campgrounds have awesome, scenic views in the park AND avoid the wasted time that comes with driving out of and back into the park. It makes it easier to hit the ground running in the morning! The only downside of camping is that even in the summer months it can get chilly in Yellowstone…. like down into the 30s, so be sure to bring a warm sleeping bag! We decided this might be just a little too chilly for our 8 month old, but we hope to take him camping next time we roll through!
photo taken by our friend Zachary Splinter (IG: master_splint3r)
Mid-Range in West Yellowstone
West Yellowstone really is minutes, if not seconds away, from the West entrance to the park. We were booking accommodations last minute and snagged a room at the Best Western Western Inn (dog friendly!). Not only was the room great, but we were walking distance to the Yellowstone Beer Company as well as Firehole BBQ. Tasty beers and phenomenal barbecue!! If you have even a remote interest in smoked meat, this is a fantastic meal– especially after a full day adventuring around in the park.
The biggest aspect of ‘luxury’ associated with the on-property lodging is the convenience of being in the park. Despite West Yellowstone being “just outside the park”, it’s still about an hour long drive from West Yellowstone to Old Faithful. The cost of the room is tied up in location location location! and character! Can you imagine waking up and watching Old Faithful erupt from the comfort of your room?? The Old Faithful Inn is notoriously popular as the building was finished in 1904, constructed with local logs and stone– making it one of the largest log-style structures in the world!
There’s so many hot springs in Yellowstone, but none is more memorable (or larger) than the Grand Prismatic. You can certainly check out the overlook at ‘ground level’, but in my opinion, the bird’s eye view is superior. There’s a bit of sweat equity involved, but the 1.5 miles round trip is very manageable (AllTrails link here)!
When you’re nearing the hot spring, you want to park at the Fairy Falls trailhead. If you’re driving around Grand Loop road counterclockwise, this means you’ll actually drive past the signs for Grand Prismatic, following signs to the Fairy Falls.
Beware, even with the hike, this is a relatively small viewing area and it does get rather popular, so come with patience in your heart. While it’s wise to get a relatively early start to your day, this isn’t necessarily a recommended sunrise hike. The colors of the hot spring “pop” and become more vibrant when the sky is overhead, so arriving by 8:30-9:30am should afford you awesome views, while still allowing you to arrive at old faithful by/before 10am.
Old Faithful
Timing up your Old Faithful experience takes a bit of planning. This iconic geyser erupts every 94 or 68 minutes… plus or minus ten minutes. So while the eruptions are routine, they’re just far apart enough that you might find yourself waiting a while if you arrive right after the previous eruption. The Old Faithful Visitor Center has a sign out that estimates when to expect Old Faithful’s next performance. This is helpful but having something online is just a bit more useful as you try and time up your morning.
The Old Faithful area of the park will get busy… there’s no getting around that, but if you get to the park relatively early, you do have time to do the Grand Prismatic Overlook hike first. We recommend this because the ambient temperature earlier in the day is still rather chilly– even in the summer months. Why is this relevant? Well, Old Faithful is erupting hot hot hot water, so if it’s cold outside, the water plume becomes pretty shrouded in steam. Still neat to see but perhaps not the expected view.
Upper Geyser Basin hike
The Upper Geyser Basin hike begins just steps away from Old Faithful and showcases dozens of hot springs and geysers (AllTrails link here). This boardwalk trail stretches about 3.5 miles total. While it’s totally possible to just walk part of the trail and then head back, in our opinion, some of the more impressive features are further along the trail. Morning Glory is the final hot spring on the path, and we were glad we walked all the way to the end to check it out!
hot springs along the Upper Geyser Basin boardwalk
Morning Glory hot spring
West Thumb
West Thumb is essentially a large inlet of Yellowstone Lake. There’s a fun one mile loop along the West Thumb Geyser Basin Trail that takes you past the Thumb paint pots as well as a handful of geysers and hot springs, and the West Thumb shoreline (AllTrails link here)!
photo via nps.gov
Lake Yellowstone
Yellowstone Lake is the largest freshwater lake above 7,000 ft elevation in the United States, making this a relaxing spot to end the day. If the weather is nice, the park offers one-hour guided tours aboard Lake Queen II, for the Yellowstone Lake Scenic Cruise. This is a paid tour, but ticket prices are very reasonable. During high season, tours run into the late afternoon and early evening hours, so this makes for a lovely way to wind down. When we visited, an evening shower rolled through, so we just went and grabbed dinner at the Lake Lodge Cabin. They have tables right up against the window, giving you an amazing view out to the lake.
At this point in your adventuring, you’ve likely encountered an elk or two, but if you haven’t, they tend to wander around in the area of the park into the evening. We stayed in the Lake Yellowstone Cabins and were so delighted with all the elk we saw wandering around as we were arriving. Always practice mindful safety around wild animals! We ended up rather close, just because they caught us by surprise!
Sleep It Off
Where you rest for the night largely depends on where you’re heading in the morning. If you plan to leave the way you came (out the East entrance), bunking down near Yellowstone Lake, or even heading for Cody likely makes the most sense. If you plan to drive south to explore Grand Teton National Park next, staying in West Thumb might be a better stop.
Camping Out
From tent campers to RV campers and all the rooftop tents and fifth-wheelers in between, it’s hard to beat the bang for your buck you get with camping! As long as you have the right gear, this is an awesome way to experience the park… we’re already excited to come back and camp with our littlest camping buddy one day!
We stayed at one of the Lake Yellowstone cabins and loved it! Elk were wandering past our cabin as we arrived and it was so charming! Similar to the Mammoth and Old Faithful Lodge stays, perhaps a little expensive, but we were so thrilled with the location.
The map can look a little chaotic, just because Yellowstone is so big! Having a bird’s eye view of the park can make it a little easier to see the vision of the itinerary. This map is awesome because Grand Loop Road pops in red and almost all the stops noted above are highlighted below on the map.
Two days in Yellowstone fly by! Planning an action-packed itinerary is tricky— trying to make the most of your days… but not being so busy and rushed you hardly enjoy it. Our plan should thread that needle perfectly! We hope you have an amazing time exploring all the iconic sights and hidden gems of this historic national park. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
New Zealand is a country known for its gorgeous landscapes and heart-racing thrills, and the South Island is especially breathtaking. No city embodies this allure quite like Queenstown, with its mountainous vistas, winding canyons, and nearly endless opportunities for adventure sports. While you could easily stay longer, two full days in scenic Queenstown is enough to get a taste of what makes this spectacular city so special. We’ve compiled the perfect itinerary— a nice combination of action-packed and restful relaxation that will make it hard to leave.
Queenstown is a growing resort town, with booming tourism, and while no one wants to be a tacky tourist, there’s some things that are worth being just a little touristy for. I mean, how many opportunities in life will a gal get to go bungee jumping into a canyon?!
When Delta slashed Skymiles prices and made a round-trip flight to New Zealand 50k miles, we didn’t think twice! The long flight is more than worth it to experience all New Zealand has to offer– particularly the lovely and lush South Island. While the nearby mountain range, The Remarkables, is known to be great skiing in the winter, we visited in the summer, enjoying the vibrant colors and warmer temps of February. Could not recommend this time of year more highly! The weather was just absolutely perfect for all the fun we got into.
Where to stay?
Downtown Queenstown! You cannot beat the convenience of being walking distance from everything– plus you can avoid renting a car by using your own two feet. Uber runs in Queenstown, which makes it easy to get to and from the airport, when necessary. While it’s possible to snag a cheaper hotel or Airbnb a bit farther away, you’ll spend a dime on ubers or a rental car, so the slightly more expensive hotel is likely worth it!
To Drive or Not to Drive
If you plan to stay downtown (which we recommend) you don’t need a car. Everything is pretty walkable, plus most tour services have complimentary shuttles that run, so having your own car isn’t a necessity. Also, not all hotels have free parking for vehicles, so this gives you one less thing to worry about. If you plan to drive around and explore outside of Queenstown, we recommend just renting your car for the days once you leave!
Time Flies
Queenstown really is set up to be quite the year-round destination. Their summer months are December through February, so this tends to be the best time to go for warmer days and maximizing sunlight hours. We visited in February and found the weather to be nothing short of delightful— almost chilly for these FL girls.
The winter months of June, July, and August are filled with snow and the joys of shredding the gnar for any skiing or snowboarding visitors. We loved the vibrant allure of the summer months, but there’s much to be said for the untouched beauty of winter!
DAY 1
Odd Saint
To start the day off strong, swing by the cutest neighborhood eatery: Odd Saint. Not only is the breakfast delish but they also sell coffee from a local roaster. Even if you’re feeling a bit jet-lagged, a cup of eighthirty coffee will get you powered through your day. When we visit new places, I’m hard pressed to frequent the same spots twice… there’s so many new things to try; however, Odd Saint was so good, I found myself back here a couple times while we were in Queenstown.
Queenstown Hill
Once you’re fully caffeinated, it’s time to get your blood pumping and muscles burning! The Queenstown Hill Hike starts not far from the city and despite being convenient to access, it’s a bit steeper than you might initially assume, but not too technical. The view at the top makes the sweat equity more than worth it! The Queenstown panoramic landscape really is unforgettable!! Plus, there are 6 informational plaques to stop and read along your climb, to give you a little more background on Queenstown’s history.
As with any hike, it’s always a good idea to ensure you have enough water and a snack or two to enjoy at the top. Once you make it up there, you’ll never want to leave!
Fergburger
All that hiking’s going to have you ready for a big lunch! Generally speaking, ordering a burger outside the good ‘ole USA is a rookie move– almost guaranteed to disappoint; however, we’d heard so much hype about Fergburger, we figured we had to give it a try… and it lived up to the hype! Hands down the best burger we’ve ever eaten abroad! The line can get a little long, so either call and put a pick-up order in ahead of time, or arrive with a bit of a patient mindset. The burger will be worth the wait!
Whimsical Wandering
Fergburger is in the downtown Queenstown area, so when you’re finished eating, it’s nice to just wander a bit, check out the shops… or perhaps snag an ice cream cone and just look out across Lake Wakatipu.
Skyline
Everything in the downtown area is pretty close, so it won’t take long to reach Skyline… or at least the base of Skyline. Getting up to the Skyline complex means taking a dreamy gondola ride up to Bob’s Peak. As you might imagine, SkyLine offers a breathtaking view of the horizon and local landscape while also affording all kinds of fun.
If you’re feeling a little competitive and ready for a racing rush, going on the luge is an absolute MUST. You might be thinking to yourself ‘What is a luge?’ The best answer would be ‘part go-kart, part toboggan’. Powered by gravity and the giddy excitement of flying downhill, luge rides are an even-more-fun-than-expected way to end the day.
While the luge is arguably their most popular attraction, there’s all kinds of fun to be had up here. Time of year can dictate availability, but there’s also stargazing, mountain biking, guided walks, paragliding, and ziplining if you’re keen to sneak in additional adventures for day one.
DAY 2
Shotover Canyon Swing
Start the day off right with the ultimate adrenaline rush! Queenstown is known for being home to all kinds of adrenaline junkie hobbies, and the bungee-jumping-esque Shotover Canyon Swing will send you on a wild ride and get your heart pumping in the best way. This was our favorite thing we did while in Queenstown because you just can’t beat the rush!!! After your initial jump, you can go again for a fraction of the initial cost. As you might guess, we couldn’t resist a second round of the thrill, and we both went soaring a second time!
As an added bonus there’s loads of different ‘jump styles’ to rock n’ roll with as you plummet into the canyon. We both got a little more brave on our second swinging jump and went down backwards from a handstand….. yeeeeee haw!!!
We didn’t do any boat exploration, BUT if you’re interested in zooming around in the canyon itself after you finish soaring through it, booking the Canyon Swing and the jet boat ride together can save you some pennies!
Queenstown Gardens
The Queenstown Gardens is an easy, short walk from the center of town and makes for a gorgeous afternoon saunter. If you’re visiting in the warm spring and summer months, you can expect to find colorful flowers in bloom and stretches of trees reaching for the sky. There’s also loads of different sculptures to check out as well. In addition to all the lovely flora, the gardens also provide quite the view of the surrounding lake, beach, and mountains. Holy moly, what a sight!!!
If you disc golf, and have room in your luggage, you might want to pack a disc or two… there’s a the course through the gardens!
Onsen Hot Pools
Wind down for the day at Onsen Hot Pools! Life is all about living and learning, and while we really enjoyed our hot pool relaxation, if we were to do it again, we would book an evening slot to take in the stars. The pools are so luxuriously relaxing, and the open roof would make for an incredible stargazing spot!! That being said, the view during the day really was rather remarkable, so you can’t go wrong– regardless of the time you visit.
There’s a few different room options, but we did the Original Onsen and loved it— would definitely chose this option again. The room includes a couple different beverage and snack choices, which was refreshing. If you’re feeling like you could use some extra relaxation, they do offer some spa services as well!
No car? No problem! When you make your booking, you can request a free shuttle service from central Queenstown.
Two days goes fast but it’s enough to get a nice glimpse of the highlights of Queenstown… and experience some of her thrills! It’s certain to leave you eager to come back one day– even just to take in the panoramic scenery one more time. Happy travels!
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FGCU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
Channel Islands National Park encompasses a small five-island archipelago and the expanse of ocean that surrounds them, off the coast of southern California. This rugged yet enchanting landscape is home to one-of-a-kind plants and animals– found nowhere else on the planet. The rustic charm and cultural identity of the Channel Islands make this national park unique in the midst of California’s impressive array of national parks. Located approximately 12 miles off the coast, Santa Cruz is the easiest of the islands to reach. Not only that, it tends to have the most amenable weather as well as the most opportunity for recreational exploration… all the best ingredients for memorable backpacking escapades.
What makes Santa Cruz Island extra special? The remote and wild island may not have any restaurants or concessions, but it boasts quite the seascape. The Pacific ocean is an alluring backdrop to the unforgettable island coastline— the perfect amalgamation of tranquility and pristine panoramas that make for the ideal backpacking adventure. In addition to the natural beauty, Santa Cruz is historically and ecologically meaningful as well. Santa Cruz was once home to the Chumash Indians and remains the only home of the island scrub-jay-only as well as some small island foxes. We were lucky enough to see both while we were there– as well as lots of yarrow, fennel, and California sage bush!
Fast Facts About channel islands National Park
Size: 249,561 acres
Visitors: 328,746 visitors (data from 2023)
Distance from LA: 1-1.5 hour drive + a ferry ride
Became a National Park: March 5th, 1980
Highest point: Diablo Peak at 2,450 ft (on Santa Cruz Island)
Fun Fact: in 2023 there were 23,881 visitors that camped in the backcountry
While I’ve done my fair share of camping before, this was my first non-Army backpacking trip for pleasure. Having a tent, sleeping pad, and jetboil is fancy digs!! The rolling 1,500ft total climb certainly wasn’t easy peasy but the untouched, remote wilderness is hard to beat and so very worth the sweat equity.
Ferry Ferry, Quite Contrary
The rather remote nature of the park means a little extra time and coordination is necessary to plan your arrival. The ferry to Santa Cruz Island is operated by Island Packers. The ferry departs from Ventura Harbor and takes a little over an hour to reach Scorpion Cove. While this is the more popular of the two stops, you’ll want to sit tight a little longer. The ferry waits ~20 minutes to allow everyone time to disembark before cruising to its second destination. About 30 minutes later, you’ll find yourself at Prisoner’s Harbor. Overall you can expect the ferry time to be about 2 hours.
important notes:
you MUST bring all the water you anticipate needing with you onto the ferry because there is no water available at Prisoner’s Harbor and there’s definitely not a tap at the back country campground.
On the ferry, fuel and water cannot stay in your pack → the packs get stacked, so you don’t want the water bursting. Your water should be either in bladders (place in the back of the boat you can store it) or you can also bring gallons and distribute it when you arrive on the island.
When you check in for your ferry, they give you physical tickets to get on the ferry both ways aka do not lose your return ticket!!!
Double check your return time!! Some of them are only 30 min off from one another, but you have to get on the right time (aka actually aim for 30 min early) or else there won’t be enough room for everyone. You don’t want to get left behind!
These Boots Were Made for Walking
Once everyone’s off the ferry, it’s time to get those packs all ready to go! If you plan to bring extra water (to consume after you’ve returned but before you depart on the ferry again) there are fox boxes to store your water in to ensure it’s safe from the wildlife. Just for planning and packing purposes, one gallon of water per person per day is recommended.
Del Norte is a backcountry campground a little over 3 miles from the Harbor. Getting there requires navigating a bit of a rolling hill landscape as you’ll find yourself climbing, descending, and climbing again, for a total elevation gain of around 1,000’. There’s only 4 campsites, and even in April, it was warm enough that we were glad to have the two campsites in the shade! Reservations are required in advance… it’s a bit too long of a trek to be a first come first serve campsite! Reservations are easiest to make online (link here), but you can also call to reserve a campsite (877) 444-6777.
Campfires are prohibited, but jetboils are very much allowed, so it’s still very possible to enjoy a nice hot dinner. The picnic tables make for a breezy spot to relax and play cards together. It’s a lovely spot to spend the evening together, and perfect for stargazing into the night.
Prisoner’s Harbor and Del Norte exude peace and make it easy to imagine what a simple life would have been like hundreds of years ago. The simplicity can be quite the reprieve from the every-day hustle and bustle, but it also means you’ll need to bring EVERYTHING you need with you. This is by no means an inclusive packing list, but here’s a handful of things you’ll be glad to have with you regardless of the time of year!
Packing Up and Packing Out
When morning rolls around, it’s time for a spot of breakfast and then packing everything back up! The trail to the Del Norte campground is an out and back, so you shouldn’t feel too worried about getting lost on the way back— it should all be rather familiar to you.
If you’re wanting to take the path less traveled, there is an option to come back a different way, if you are so inclined (we highlighted this below). Just in general downloading the trail on AllTrails was nice to have, just as a safeguard against any accidental wandering off the intended path.
Keep on Keepin’ On
Once you make it back to Prisoner’s Harbor, take a little break and enjoy a snack because you’ve got more hiking on the itinerary! The ferry should be back by 11am at the latest, which is worth noting because there’s a naturalist aboard that will lead a guided hike (pro-tip: sign the waiver right after you buy your ferry ticket so you don’t have to worry about this later)!
The hike is along the Pelican Bay trail, and is less of a hike to a specific destination and more of a let’s-enjoy-the-journey hike. This can be a perfect opportunity to spot wildlife! We saw a small Island fox while we were on this hike– this fox only exists on Santa Cruz Island!! The Island Scrub Jay is also found only on Santa Cruz and is more commonly seen around Prisoner’s Harbor!
Shippin’ Out
The ferry typically leaves to head back a little after 3pm, so even if you explore along the Pelican Bay trail, you’ll find yourself with a little extra time. We just went down and relaxed in and by the water, but if you bring a snorkel mask, there’s a kelp forest along the shoreline worth exploring. While sea kayaking is a popular activity on Santa Cruz, this is more commonly pursued on the east side of the island, near Scorpion’s Cove.
Before you know it, it’ll be time for the ferry to head back to the mainland, so soak up all the secluded serenity while you can! Keep your eyes peeled as you head back— we spotted a mama whale and her calf on our way back…. an incredible experience!!
Alternate Options
While we found the one-night backpacking trip to be a perfect sampling of Santa Cruz, here’s a few other ideas for folks a little less inclined to backpack or camp overnight.
If you hop off the ferry at Scorpion Anchorage, you’ll want to check out the Potato Harbor Overlook hike. This out-and-back hike clocks in at just over 5 miles, with 660’ of elevation, making it moderately challenging, but nothing too tricky. Definitely worth the effort to take in the gorgeous vista!
Have you ever been sea kayaking? Santa Barbara Adventure Company is the only company on Santa Cruz Island that offers guided kayaking trips. This is another Scorpion Anchorage stop, and it’s the perfect way to take in the iconic caves of the Santa Cruz coastline. Depending on your comfortability in a kayak, there’s a few different options regarding length of time out on the water. They also offer snorkel rentals and guided snorkeling tours!
Island Packers doesn’t just ferry people back and forth, you can opt for a nice day trip adventure with them. After departing from Ventura, you cruise into the Painted Cave, experiencing one of the biggest sea caves in the world. The colorful cave is named for the naturally occurring pigmentations, derived from various rock types and algae that make up its walls. The cave is also home to varied sealife as well– keep your eyes peeled for seals! After the cave exploration, the boat will head over to Prisoner’s Harbor to do the Pelican Bay trail hike (same one we did!). From there you’ll get to head back to Ventura.
final thoughts
Santa Cruz Island, particularly Prison’s Harbor, is an almost-untouched sliver of California’s coastline that calls back to a bygone era of symbiosis between nature and the Chumash Indians that once inhabited. The wild island and its impressive seascape make for an amazing backpacking trip– you won’t regret making the trek out!
Our friend made a lil vlog of our memorable backpacking adventure— check it out here!
If remote, warm island parks are your jam, we sure to check out Dry Tortugas National Park the next time you’re near the Florida Keys!
written by Kayla
A literal life saving queen, Kayla Grace is an Army nurse in Fort Irwin, California. When she’s not fixing up folks up in the emergency department, she is likely to be found running, walking, or hiking outside. She also has quite the green thumb and keeps all her plants alive… not just surviving but thriving! Before moving to CA, Kayla was stationed in Washington for a few years, where she discovered her her love for camping and the general woodland-fairy ambiance she exudes while out adventuring. Still rather new to the southern California region, Kayla is in her desert-girl era, exploring her new state with gusto.
Does an urban national park sound like an oxymoron? While national parks usually embody sprawling, untouched wilderness, the Gateway Arch breaks the mold as it celebrates the Westward expansion of the United States. This eye-catching memorial is the tallest man-made monument in the United States, designed by architect Eero Saarinen. There were over 170 unique designs; however, his particularly memorable design was chosen and has stood the test of time since its inception in 1963.
St. Louis is home to the one and only Gateway Arch National Park, making this park much easier to reach and robustly experience than others in the repertoire. While it might not take your breath away quite like the staggering beauty of some of the other larger, more natural parks, there’s a certain charm to the historic reminder of our country’s growth. While eager history and architecture buffs would likely be keen to make a day of it, for most, a half day is the perfect amount of time to allot for visiting the Gateway Arch National Park.
Fast Facts About GATEWAY ARCH National Park
Size: 91 acres
Visitors: 1,618,774 visitors (data from 2022)
Became a National Park: Feb. 23, 2018
Highest point: the top of the arch is 630 ft high — interestingly it’s also 630 feet wide from leg to leg
The upside of the park’s small stature is that it’s rather easy to get the full experience in a half-day visit. We swung through driving back up to Wisconsin, and this was baby Xavier’s first national park visit. While he *technically* visited Indiana Dunes, Rocky Mountain, and Olympic National Parks in utero, the Gateway Arch made for a very un-intimidating first national park for us to visit with him. I must say, he’s a hard man to impress… he had the audacity to try and sleep through the whole thing!!
Park vs Monument… the NPS tea
The Gateway Arch is the tallest monument in the United States, but that begs the question… why is it a national park and not a national monument? There’s not a great answer for this name change and corresponding national park designation, as they were decided upon in Congress. Interestingly, the National Park Service did have something to say on the matter submitted a statement to the hearing on the legislation for the name change that said:
“… the National Park Service strives to provide consistency in the naming of park units. To better align with the standard nomenclature for units of the National Park System, we recommend that Congress re-designate the unit as “Gateway Arch National Monument.” National parks contain a variety of resources and encompass large land or water areas to help provide adequate protection of the resources. The existing 59 designated national parks protect at a minimum thousands of acres each, and some span millions of acres. At only 91 federal acres, we believe that the Jefferson National Expansion Memorial is too small and limited in the range of resources the site protects and interprets to be called a national park.’”
This makes Gateway Arch National Park the only urban national park in the repertoire– certainly unique, but also setting an interesting precedent for future designations. Will this remain the only smaller, more urban national park or will others join its ranks in the years to come? Only time will tell!
When To Visit
While the most popular time of year to visit is in the spring and summer months, we stopped by on a beautiful day in January and very much recommend a mid-winter visit. There were no lines to deal with, and even on a more frigid day, so much of what you come to see is indoors, so the time of year is less important.
TIME TO EXPLORE
Depending on where you’re coming from, getting into the arch may be a bit counter-intuitive. If you head over right from the designated parking garage, you won’t have any problem wandering to the west entrance, which faces Fourth Street and the Old Courthouse. If you’re out walking along the river, the entry point is *not* in the base of either arch; however, you can exit from the arch legs, which sometimes confuses people.
Tickets
Upon entering the building, the ticket counter is easy to spot. If you plan to visit in the spring or summer months – especially on a weekend day, you should consider purchasing your tickets in advance, to ensure you’ll be able to make it up!
Security
With your ticket in hand, the next step will be going through security. Think of a more-relaxed version of TSA. You’ll have to empty your pockets and step through a scanner, but no one is going to make you dump out your water bottle. As an important note, no weapons, including pepper spray and fixed-blade knives (except fold-out pocket knives with a blade size less than 4″) are allowed, so if you keep pepper spray on your keychain or in your purse, you’ll want to make sure that stays in the car. Even if you don’t plan to take the tram ride, you will still need to go through the security checkpoint to get to the museum, cafe, documentary movie, and gift shop areas.
Museum of Westward Expansion
The museum is quite lovely to wander through, and rather engaging for visitors of all ages with its interactive displays and exhibits. Not only are there exhibits detailing the nuances of westward expansion in US history, but there’s a rather interesting section about the arch architecture. It’s fun to see the runner-up designs and learn more about the unique tram system that carries visitors to the top. Depending on how early you arrive before your tram time, you can explore the museum before or after you ride… or both!
Tram
Once you’re through the museum, the lower level space opens up, and you can head on down to get your tram ticket scanned. As the group awaits the arrival of all its participants, everyone is provided a boarding pass of sorts for their individual tram. Each tram can hold up to 5 people, but man oh man would that be a snug fit to put five grown adults in one tram car. I’m not sure how things go over the summer, but it was definitely nice that groups were more dispersed.
After everyone in the group has arrived, there’s a short background history of the arch provided, and then everyone is led over to their assigned tram. The ride up goes quickly, only taking a couple minutes.
The windows at the top are a little small, but it’s rather amazing to peer out of the Mississippi River and the city of St. Louis and realize you’re doing so from the top of the arch. Everyone has ample time (about 8-10 minutes) to look around, read some of the signage, and take a picture or two, and then it’s time to head back down. The descent is just slightly speedier than the ascent, and in no time at all, your back– boots on the ground!
Once you’ve ridden the tram, it’s worth a couple minutes of your time to pop back into the museum and read about the unique transportation system constructed to carry people up the arch… it’s one of a kind!
The Extras
We really enjoyed reading, watching, and listening in the museum, but if you’re keen to learn more, there’s a documentary movie you can check out (showtimes here). While tickets aren’t free, it’s likely the cheapest movie ticket you’ve bought in a while! You can also head over to the gift store to collect your passport stamp and pick up any mementos you might desire. There’s a little virtual reality experience you can check out as well– looks like something that could be fun for kiddos.
There’s a cafe if you’re feel pecking, but it’s worth noting, the upside of being an urban national park is that there’s a whole bunch of dining options within easy walking distance
The Old Courthouse
Once you’ve had your fill of arch exploration, you can head over to the courthouse. What is so special about this courthouse? It was the site of not one but two cases that became formative to the cultural landscape. In 1847 Dred and Harriet Scott, an enslaved couple, sued for and were granted their freedom. This case went through appeals and ended up going before the Supreme Court, which overturned the original verdict, stating that since slaves were property they didn’t have the right to sue. BIG YIKES. This case is reflective of culture in the United States at the time and is thought to be one of the precipitating factors of the Civil War.
It’s also where Virginia Minor and her husband sued for her right to vote. She went on to become a huge advocate for suffrage rights for women.
The historic courthouse is currently closed as it undergoes a multi-million dollar renovation project. That being said, it’s set to be finished by 2025, and should be quite impressive whenever it’s completed.
Riverboat Rides
Not exactly a park experience, but you can take in the Mississippi River and view the Arch from the water on a riverboat cruise. The boats are a callback to a bygone era, when steamboats ruled the river and drove local commerce. We visited on a beautiful January day, but it wasn’t quite let’s-take-a-riverboat-cruise warm, which is why the riverboat tours only run March through November.
If you’re passing through town, you could definitely see the Gateway Arch in a few hours, but if you’re looking to make a day of it, this would be a perfect way to savor the Arch and get to know a bit more about St. Louis and the history of the hard-working river.
Gateway Arch National Park is not only an impressive architectural monument, but it serves as an important memory to the westward expansion of our country and journey we took as a nation to get here. It’s certainly worth stopping by if you’re in St. Louis or road tripping nearby. Due it’s rather urban stature, it’s hard to compare the ~natural beauty~ of a man-made arch to some of astounding feats of nature at other parks; however, the very nature of this ‘park’ is a memorable memorial to the country’s growth that houses many of the nation’s most alluring national parks!
If you’re looking for your next national park adventure and you enjoy a national park with a little extra historical significance, Dry Tortugas National Park might tickle your fancy. This old fort can be found about 70 miles off the coast of the Florida keys, making it rather remote but incredibly picturesque.
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Packing for Europe in a backpack isn’t only for gap year students hostel-hopping! Not only are international checked baggage fees expensive, but who wants to risk their bag becoming lost luggage?! While a carry-on bag also fits the bill here, some of those old cobblestone streets are rough on the ‘ole spinner wheels. A nice backpack will be able to fit everything you need, while also affording you flexibility and easy mobility. Even if you plan to be gone a couple weeks, it’s sooooo possible to master packing in a backpack this summer. To make it even easier, we’ve included a handy checklist below!
First and foremost, what bag to pack in??? I’m obsessed with my Cotopaxi Alpa 42L backpack, and between the five of us sisters, we own four different variations of this fun and functional pack. The bag is designed perfectly to help maximize space and keep you organized while traveling.
The most important thing about packing a capsule wardrobe is planning pieces that can mix and match seamlessly. Having nice basics is the perfect way to rework your outfits, and have everything feel fresh. As someone that’s a big champion of leisurewear, I also love finding pieces that I could wear on a hike but I could also dress up and look nicer in as well. Below I’ve detailed everything I packed for our 11-day trip.
TOPS
Basic tees (3)
I own this cropped cotton tee from Old Navy in three different colors, and I’m nothing short of obsessed with it. It looks as perfect with a skirt as it does with leggings. Something like this is a nice staple that’s easy to mix and match between outfits.
Tank tops (2-4)
A couple tank tops are nice to have as Europe can get a bit toasty in the summer. I packed a reversible (can be worn high neck or scoop) white lululemon tank and a fun one shoulder cropped tank from Beyond Yoga. They’re versatile, breathe well, and keep you comfy.
Thin Long/Short Sleeve shirt (1-2)
While summer days do warm up, they can sometimes start a bit chilly. A thin shirt to cover your shoulders and/or arms can be nice to have!
Linen shirt (1)
Nothing beats a slightly oversized white linen shirt. It’s the perfect layer for almost any outfit! I actually tied my linen shirt to my fanny pack, which made it easy to have on hand when I got chilly
BOTTOMS
Leggings (3)
Perhaps this is a lazy girl packing ethos, but I’m just not one to pack jeans. This of course kinda depends on where you’re going, but much of Europe will get into the 80s and above during the day. If I’m not wearing a dress or skirt, I want my pants breathable! Leggings are also rather nice to have if you plan to go hiking at all!
Skort (1-2)
I personally could not be a bigger fan of skorts… it’s a way to elevate your look a bit, while still staying comfy and being able to walk, wander, climb, etc with ease.
Midi skirt (1)
Flowy and casual, a nice mid-length skirt will be short enough to let the breeze through, while still having you look rather nice. The perfect skirt could be worn all day exploring, dressed up for a fun dinner, and thrown on with a bathing suit the next day for the beach.
Denim shorts (1)
These are super versatile! You can wear them out exploring the city but you can also throw them on over a bathing suit at the beach.
Joggers (1)
Whether it’s for a plane ride or a train ride or just some time in the car, you’re almost assuredly going to have some time that gets spent traveling to your destination or from one place to another. Not every outfit you pack is going to be your hot girl summer ‘fit, and sometimes it’s nice to have a comfy pair of joggers when you’re traveling
OUTERWEAR
Light Jacket (1)
While summer days can be warm, mornings and evenings can get rather chilly. A nice light-to-mid-weight jacket is the perfect layer to keep you warm without being too bulky in your bag.
Cropped hoodie (1)
This is another piece that’s nice to have on your travel day. Perhaps a bit slouchier and cozier than your jacket. While summer days can get quite warm, it does cool off in the evenings… and it never hurts to have something comfy, cozy for those longer train rides.
DRESSES
Dealer’s choice (2)
Honesty, everyone is a little different, but I’d suggest 2 somewhat flowy dresses. Depending on what activities or dinners you have planned, you might want something a bit more dressy… or perhaps you’d get more use out of a sporty athleisure dress. Anything you pack should be something you’d be comfortable walking at least a mile or two in, but exactly what you go with can depend on your comfort and itinerary.
SHOES
Sneakers (2)
Not all sneakers are created equally, so I recommend packing two different pairs… one that’s a bit cuter– something you could wear with a dress but also wouldn’t mind walking a couple miles in. The other pair would be a pair of tennies you don’t mind getting dirty. This past summer I packed a pair of old black & white Brooks that I’d pretty much worn through the sole, and then just donated them the day before we left to leave room for a couple purchases on the way back.
Sandals (1)
Whether it’s your worn-in Birks or perhaps your favorite Target sandals, it’s nice to have something easy to slide on sometimes. They should still be comfortable enough that they could take you on a longer walk if necessary, but something you’d be okay taking to the beach as well.
ESSENTIAL EXTRAS
Underwear (12)
Can you ever pack too many pairs of underwear?? Even if I plan to do laundry while I’m gone, I almost never leave home without enough underwear to get me through… just in case!
Socks (7)
If you have access to a washing machine during your adventuring, 7 pairs of socks should do the trick– especially if you’re not wearing your sneakers every day.
Sports Bra (5)
I didn’t pack even a single a ~real bra~, but that’s just my style. I live in sports bras, and ~5 is enough. Depending on where you end up and how warm the weather ends up being, you might want an extra if you’re worried about getting sweaty, but 5 should do the job.
Bathing Suits (1-2)
Perhaps it’s the Florida girl in me, but you ALWAYS pack a bathing suit when you leave town… you never know when there’s going to be a beach or pool that needs adventuring. Depending on how much time you plan to spend at the beach it may be nice to have a second suit– plus they don’t take up too much space!
Pajamas (1-2)
Unless you’re a real sweaty sleeper, one or two pairs of pajamas should do the trick. Getting good sleep is essential when you’re traveling, so make sure you stay big comfy.
THE NON-ATTIRE ESSENTIAL EXTRAS
Toiletries
Never leave home without your toothbrush and (at least) the basics of your skincare routine. There’s nothing worse than getting ready for bed after a long travel day and realizing your toothbrush is sitting on the counter at home.
Chargers
Unless you’re going for a very unplugged, eat-pray-love kind of trip, you’ll want to ensure your chargers are in your bag before you leave for the airport!
Converter plugs
Your chargers won’t do you much good if you don’t have a converter. These are easy to snag at Target or on Amazon. Some hotels and Airbnbs might have a USB port you can plug directly into, but that’s not always a guarantee.
Fanny pack
Belt bag, waist bag, fanny pack… whatever you want to call it, it’s convenient to have. I’m not one for carrying a purse around, and I can fit my phone, a small wallet, hand sanitizer, chapstick, gum, and hand lotion in my pack. That’s everything I need! If I’m worried about getting cold, it’s easy to tie a long sleeve shirt onto the strap too. My go-to fanny pack is black, so it matches practically everything!
Small 12L hiking backpack
Even if you don’t plan to go hiking, most hiking day packs are light, quick-drying, and quite compact. Whether you’re going on a hike or a day trip, it’s nice to be able to have all your important things with you. The only “purse” I packed was a fanny pack, so the hiking backpack was perfect when I wanted to bring the tripod, an extra layer, not carry my water bottle, etc.
Water bottle
Ugh, my biggest gripe with (most) European travel is the lack of free tap water availability. Even in the US, I never go anywhere without my water bottle, so I always made sure it was filled to the brim before we set out in the morning. You won’t regret having your water bottle with you!
Sunglasses
Full disclosure, I actually brought two pairs of sunnies because I wanted to have a backup just in case I lost one of my pairs. Sunglasses are a gal’s best friend on a bright day!!
Sunscreen
Even just a small, travel sized sunscreen can be just what you need to keep your shoulders, chest, back, or whatever else from burning.
FRIVOLOUS & NON-ESSENTIAL
Small scarves
A small scarf or two is the perfect way to help add a bit of pizazz to your basics. You can wear then around your neck, you can turn it into a headband, or you can tie it to your bag as a splash of color.
Towel
Your fluffiest robe will have to stay home, but packing a quick-dry camping towel will fit in you bag easily. While it’s not quite as luxe, it does the job when you need to dry off after the pool, beach, etc.
Tripod
Very tacky tourist, but honestly not every random stranger ~understands the assignment~, and I’ve never regretted a single cute sister pic
Mini straightener
Definitely not an essential, but depending on how crazy your hairs get (or how cute you’re trying to look on vacation), some of the mini straighteners take up a pretty minimal amount of space, and just might be worth it for your hot girl summer.
Travel pillow
This is less of a necessity and more of a nice-to-have— especially if you plan to take any evening flights or early morning train rides. A little bit of comfort goes a long way when you’re trying to catch some zzzz’s.
Eye mask
This sounds like a bit of a prima donna packing list item, buttttt a nice eye mask can go a long way to help you sleep on an overnight flight. Plus, depending on where you’re staying, it can be nice to ensure you have complete darkness when it’s time to hit the hay.
on the other hand, some people can just pass out anywhere
THE LIST
If you do better with a nicely condensed packing list, we have it all spelled out for you here below! After a lifetime of being a last minute, throw-everything-I-might-need-in-the-bag packer, I can say, planning a capsule wardrobe can sometimes take a bit more time but it’s time well spent! It’s possible to have enough items for all your activities and still look cute and trendy while carrying everything you need right on your back.
Full disclosure, this summer I traveled with my Cotopaxi and a personal-item sized tote bag I used as a personal item. Since my travel pillow doesn’t really compress, I ended up keeping the pillow and my light jacket in the tote on my travel days. I either carried my water bottle or tossed it in the tote, but everything else fit in the backpack! Since my bottle was too big for the side pocket of the backpack, I slid the tripod in there, which was a perfect way to bring it along without taking up too much space.
The ultimate travel hack? Traveling with your little sister so you can swap clothes throughout the trip! Between the two of us, we had more than enough clothes and outfits for our 11 days. Also, if it’s possible, it’s nice to book an Airbnb or hotel with a washer/dryer, to ensure you’ll be able to do laundry somewhat easily, if necessary. We did one round of mid-trip laundry, and it was more than enough to keep us clean and comfy the rest of the trip!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
The Olympic Peninsula, a veritable cornucopia of ecosystems in western Washington, is home to the one and only Olympic National Park. This unique park houses a rainforest, wilderness beaches, sub-alpine forests, rugged glaciers, and breathtaking lakes, making it rather one of a kind. One could easily spend a few days here, exploring all the nooks and crannies of the peninsula, but sometimes time is of the essence. If you have limited time to spend exploring in Olympic, we have the perfect itinerary for you… but rest up and pack your snacks because it’s going to be quite the action-packed day!
Washington is home to three national parks— Olympic being the most-visited, with 2,432,972 visitors in 2022. It boasts 73 miles of wilderness coast, over 3,000 miles of streams and rivers, and 60 glaciers. For eager outdoorsmen (and women) the park has 611 miles of trails to scout out, which still leaves the other 95% of the park as a designated wilderness area. The medley of sights, sounds, climates, and creatures is truly amazing.
Fast Facts About OLYMPIC National Park
Size: 922,651 acres
Visitors: 2,432,972 visitors (data from 2022)
Distance from Seattle: 85 miles — 2.5 hour drive
Became a National Park: June 29th, 1938
Highest point: Mount Olympus at 7,980 ft
Busiest month to visit: August — 634,516 visitors
Sister Kayla currently lives in near-by Tacoma, so she’s had the opportunity for a bit more robust exploring, but my arrive-a-couple-days-before-our-friend’s-wedding timeline didn’t leave much wiggle room in the ‘ole itinerary. As always, a little bit of adventuring is better than no adventuring! Here’s as much as we could cram into ~24 hours in Olympic National Park.
Hurricane Ridge Visitor Center
In the northern mountains of the Olympic peninsula, you’ll find the Hurricane Ridge Visitor Center and trailhead. There’s more than one hike on the docket for today, so you don’t want to burn too bright too soon. If you just want to stretch out your legs, there’s a few meadow loop trails that let you meander without getting too taxing. Perhaps you’re feeling ready to take on the day?! The Hurricane Hill via Hurricane Ridge hike is 3.4 miles long with 826ft of elevation to climb. Not exactly easy peasy, but the panoramic views are a most amazing way to start the day.
Unfortunately we visited in June 2023, and the Hurricane Ridge area of the park was temporarily closed as the Hurricane Ridge Day Lodge burned down in May 2023. This temporarily changed operations in this region of the park, but the park has since re-opened. Currently, only 430 vehicles are allowed access at the Heart O’ the Hills Entrance on Hurricane Ridge Road. If you’re stressing about making it into the park, there is a shuttle service that runs, even as the park hits the 430 vehicle limit. You can find out more about the shuttle stops and cost here.
Even though the Hurricane Ridge area of the park has opened back up, it’s not quite fully operational at this point. The infrastructure is still limited, so don’t plan on stocking up on gift store swag or snacks at this visitor center… think porta-potties and big self-sufficiency energy. You can find more information and recent access updates here.
Crescent Lake
Heading west in the park will bring you to Crescent Lake and all the fun that awaits. There’s a few different spots to go hiking here, and they’re all great options. The Moments in Time trail clocks in at 0.7 miles with only 9 feet of elevation, so this is going to be perfect for anyone that’s looking for more of a walk than a big time hike. If you enjoy hiking but aren’t in the mood to tackle serious elevation, the Devil’s Punchbowl trail will be a nice 2.5 miles with just under 140 feet of elevation.
Now, if you’re looking for a real kick in the pants, Mount Storm King is the hike for you. It’s a little over 4 miles round trip and tackles 2,100 feet of elevation. What makes this even more exciting? The 4 miles is an out and back trail, so it’s really ~2 miles each way, with the first (and last) 0.5 miles being flat. For those of you math wizards, that means you’re going to crush over 2,000 feet elevation in 1.5 miles making it *not* a hike for the faint of heart.
Once you start going uphill, you pretty much don’t stop climbing until you reach the viewpoint… with the last portion of the hike being steep enough that there’s ropes in place to help weary hikers haul themselves up. That being said, the view at the top really is rather spectacular— more than worth the grueling climb. I did it while I was pregnant, so you definitely can crush it!!!
Rialto Beach
The next stop on the adventure route here is Rialto Beach. You can always pack your favorite floaties, but it’s not likely you’ll find yourself using them. Even when we visited in the middle of June, it was still rather chilly and overcast. You’re much more likely to be rocking gore-tex boots and rain pants!
Don’t let that slow you down– the beach really does have an ethereal sort of charm. Still feel like your legs have some energy left in the tank? Take a walk on the beach! If the tides are in your favor, you might even make it up to some cool rock formations on the north end of the beach via the Hole-in-the-Wall trail (3.3 miles out & back).
Hoh Rainforest & Campground
Continuing south but also a bit inland on the Peninsula, you’ll find the Hoh Rainforest. As you make the trek out to the rainforest, you’ll be able to watch the climate and topography change yet again. This is the last stop on the itinerary for the day… with a bit of a chose-you-own-adventure option. What do you consider a full day… sun-up to sun down, or a full 24 hours? If you have the time to stay the night, we do recommend popping a tent and hunkering down for the night. While the line for entry to this part of the park can get quite lengthy, arriving later in the day should help avoid peak wait times.
We stayed at campsite #70, and like the locale. Not necessarily the most private or secluded campsite, but it was along the river and nice and close to the bathroom— without being so close you have to worry about all the bathroom foot traffic. The campground is also an easy walking distance to the Hoh Visitor Center, so it was nice to set up camp and then go wander on over.
Extra things to know:
As an added bonus for any Twilight fans out there, getting from Rialto Beach to the Hoh Rainforest involves driving through Forks, WA. Yes, that’s right— the town in the Twilight series isn’t made up… it’s a real place out on the Olympic peninsula. While we didn’t catch a glimpse of any vampires, it’s always fun to feel like you’re in the pages of a book.
If you’re planning to swing by the grocery store, you might find yourself out in a bit of a food desert. The Forks Outfitters Thriftway is about the only grocery store you’re going to find as you go from the beach towards the rainforest, so either make sure you have everything you need for dinner before you leave Port Angeles, or plan to snag food at this local stop.
HOT TIP
As an aside, if you’re ever trying to snag a campsite on short-ish notice in a national park, the app ‘Campflare’ is a lifesaver. Campgrounds can fill up months in advance, and you can’t always count on the limited release (i.e. available 2 weeks, 1 week, 4 days out) sites to be available because those can go snatched-up-in-seconds FAST.
You input the campground you’re interested in staying at as well as the dates you’re looking for, and you will get notified immediately if a campsite becomes available. We’ve only recently discovered this app ourselves, but we’ve had good luck with snagging campsites at both Rocky Mountain and Olympic National Parks. A friend was able to luck into three consecutive nights at the same campground in Glacier with only ~2 weeks notice. Nothing is ever guaranteed, but it is rather helpful to know about!
waking up to find Kayla under her sleeping pad instead of over it ¯\_(ツ)_/¯
Spruce Nature Trail & Hall of Mosses Loop
To round out a cool 24 hours in the park, sneak in one final hike before you hit the road. While Olympic is home to glaciers, they remain remains rather elusive on this trip as the 35 mile round trip hike to Blue Glacier from the Hoh Visitor Center isn’t exactly one-day-itinerary material. Instead, the Spruce Nature Trail (1.2 miles) and Hall of Mosses Loop (0.8 miles) make for a nice morning walk before you head out for the day. Even if your legs are feeling tuckered out from all the hiking the day before, both trails combined tackle less than 110 feet of elevation, so it truly is just a walk as opposed to a grueling climb.
Time flies when you’re having fun, and the dynamic duo of sister time plus a new park makes for a very fast day of adventuring indeed. Olympic National Park has an amazing array of beautiful scenery to take in. It’s so worth making time to visit on your next trip out to Washington. Have time for more than one park? Head over to the iconic Mount Rainier next, to check out some outstanding day hikes.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
London is not only the capital of England but of all of the United Kingdom as well, making it quite the historic city to visit. It’s also a booming metropolis, with heaps of commerce and culture just waiting to be experienced. While it would be easy to spend a few days here exploring sights, sounds, and smells, sometimes the cars don’t quite shake out that way. Perhaps you just have a long layover? Or maybe you intentionally booked a stop-over in London, just to catch a glimpse before you jetset to your final destination. Whatever the reason, there’s loads to see and do, even if you only have 24 hours in London.
This past summer Dana and I were looking to use points to catch a flight back home. There was no availability for our dates out of Portugal or even nearby Spain, so we decided to check out some of the other bigger airports in Europe.
When we saw London had ample availability, we decided to book a cheap flight from Faro (check out the Algarve coast blog post here) to London and spent a day exploring a new city. We technically stretched it out into a 33 hour stop-over as we spent two sleeps in London, but this itinerary works just as perfectly for anyone that arrives early in the morning one day and doesn’t depart again until the following morning.
CATCHING ZZZZZZs
If you’re truly just in London for a long layover or stopover, it’s easiest to just stay at a hotel in the airport. This tends to streamline things for you as it’s easy to get to your hotel immediately and easy to fly out of there upon departure.
There are hotels located in all five terminals at Heathrow, and by and large, the most convenient will be whichever is attached to the terminal you’re flying out of. That being said, The Heathrow Express train, which gets you down to Paddington Station, leaves out of Terminal 2 & 3. So regardless of which terminal you arrive or depart out of, getting a hotel near this transportation point will make your adventure day easier.
Best Location
Hilton Garden Inn – Located in terminals 2 & 3… a little spendy but the cost just might be worth the convenience. This hotel is going to be the most convenient for anyone arriving or departing out of terminals 2 and 3, but it also makes catching the train into London suuuper easy. Plus you can watch planes take off from the hotel bar!
Best Value
Premier Inn London Heathrow Airport Terminal 4 (there is one at Terminal 5 as well) — Located in Terminal 4, the price is hard to beat, while still affording the convenience of being in the airport. This is prime for anyone flying out of Terminal 4, but it was also extremely easy to get to from Terminal 2. We found the train to be pretty straightforward to use, with plenty of attendants around to help shepard people in the right direction.
That Cash Money
When looking at European travel, it can be easy to forget that England uses the pound as its currency. This is only worth noting because the conversion rate can be very different from the euro at times, so just keep an eye out. Nothing’s worse than checking your credit card statement to discover you went way over budget!
If you’re just visiting London for the day, there’s no need to pull out cash. Generally speaking, you should be able to see and do everything you’d like, using your credit card.
Transportation
The train and the tube will be your friends!! We stayed at a hotel in the airport to make our departure as convenient as possible when the time came, but taking the metro from the airport into the city was pretty smooth! If you happen to have a longer stay in London, it certainly makes sense to find accommodations in the city, but if your stay is pretty brief, we definitely recommend staying nice and close to the airport.
We stayed at the Premier Inn in Terminal 4, which means we caught a train from Terminal 4 to Terminals 2 & 3. While the intra-airport train is free, you will need to either tap your card (as it’s enabled) or snag an Oyster card to grant access onto the train. The train between the Terminal 5 station and Terminal 2 & 3 station departs every 30 minutes starting at 5:16am, so make sure you show up a little early for your train, otherwise you might find yourself sitting with a long wait for the next train. From the Terminal 2 & 3 station, we hopped on the Heathrow Express and were in Paddington Station a mere 15 minutes later!
Regardless of where you arrive from, you’ll likely want to take a connecting tube ride to St. Paul station, which is where the walking tour begins. If you find public transportation overwhelming, taking a taxi or uber is always an option as well!
Pro tip: If you plan to use the Heathrow Express buy your tickets as soon as your plans are concrete, because the earlier you buy your tickets, the cheaper they are! As an alternative, the Elizabeth line is a slightly slower but also less expensive train service line.
Hot Packing Tips
While this is far from an all-inclusive packing list, we have three packing recommendations to make! London has a well earned reputation for its grey and rainy days, so packing a weather-proof jacket or poncho juuuuust might come in handy. At the very least, you won’t regret having clothes that dry rather quickly.
Secondly, dressing in layers is never a bad move. Even in the middle of summer, I walked around with a jacket all day long, so don’t assume summer means warm and sunny! Third, but perhaps most important, it’s a full day of wandering about, so definitely make sure you have a good pair of walking shoes packed. Depending how many extra detours you make, you will find yourself walking over 6 miles!
THE ONE DAY ITINERARY
St. Paul’s Cathedral
St. Paul’s Cathedral is an illustrious Anglican cathedral in London. It sits atop Ludgate Hill, perched at one of the highest points in the city. You’ll know you’re in the right place when you see the iconic dome and spires. While the church is named after the Apostle Paul, it has celebrated the lives of many prominent Englishmen (and women!)— perhaps most notably the wedding of Prince Charles to Princess Diana.
When you’re squeezing a whole city into one day, there may only be time for one cathedral tour, and the two you’ll really be between are St. Paul’s and Westminster Abbey. Each has their draw, but we doubled down on tickets to St. Paul’s Cathedral because you get both the historical significance as well as an amazing view! It is absolutely amazing to explore this jewel of the London skyline.
Sky Garden
Sky Garden is a short walk down the road, and holds the title for highest public garden in the city! Not only is it home to endless shades of green, but it also makes for a fabulous overlook of the city. The best part? This charming garden is free to visit!!
While they will allow visitors in without a ticket during less popular visiting time, you will want to book tickets in advance to secure entry– especially if you’re planning to roll through during high season. This is the best way to ensure you’ll be able to get in. You can book tickets up to 3 weeks in advance, so we recommend setting a reminder on your phone to ensure you don’t forget!
Tower Bridge
While the London Bridge is heralded in nursery rhymes sung by children everywhere, the Tower Bridge is arguably a more beautiful architectural design piece– with loads of history as well. Not only is the bridge lovely to see from the bank of the Thames, but it’s a pedestrian bridge, so you can wander right across and take in the river as you stroll. The bridge is free to cross, but you can pay to go up into the towers. While this would potentially be a fun vertical detour on a longer trip, there will be other spots you can take in the views, so we recommend taking in the river as you pass to keep on moving and grooving.
Borough Market
The Borough Market is nestled under the railway lines, and makes for a wonderful multi-purpose stop. First and foremost, it should be about lunchtime at this point in the day, so grab yourself a bite! Whatever cuisine you have a hankering for, they almost assuredly have someone selling your desired plate. Even after you’ve had your fill, this vibrant marketplace is teeming with unique stalls to discover— just a cornucopia of cuisine, color, and culture.
Tate Modern
Time for a fun this-or-that option. When you only have one day, it’s hard to squeeze EVERYTHING in– especially if it’s an activity that eats up more time. Option #1… the ever stately Tate Modern! This contemporary museum along the Thames River will have you wandering around with no regard for time. Not only are the exhibits equal parts thought-provoking and awe-inspiring, but the building itself is an architectural delight. The museum is free to enter, which grants you access to some exhibits, but not all. If there’s anything extra that catches your eye, admission tends to be pretty reasonable, so it’s a fun way to explore the art culture and scene here.
London Eye
Coming in hot is our Option #2, the London Eye. When it opened in 2000, the London Eye was the tallest ferris wheel in the world. It has since been surpassed by four other towering, gravity defying wheels— making the London Eye a respectable 5th place holder. Riding this massive ferris wheel makes for both a fun ride as well as a fabulous overlook of the city. Definitely a little touristy, but something you certainly can’t do at home (at least not for most!)
While it would be ideal to hit both the Tate Modern and London Eye in one day, even the most intentional planners might have a hard time squeezing both stops into the itinerary— especially in high season! When visiting the London Eye, you’ll want to account for a certain amount of time spent waiting in line to get up (think 20-30+ minutes)… plus the ~35 minutes it takes to complete the revolution.
Big Ben
As far as renown clocks go, Big Ben pretty much takes the cake. Interestingly, the nickname ‘big ben’ actually refers to the bell in the clocktower. The eye-catch timepiece was previously named the Clock Tower, but was renamed the Elizabeth Tower in 2012 to commemorate the Diamond Jubilee of Queen Elizabeth II. It’s not necessarily a long stop, but definitely worth stopping by to see for yourself!
Westminster Abbey
Westminster Abbey is an important historical spot, for numerous reasons. The Westminster Abbey was founded in 960 AD by Benedictine monks, and has been an enduring place of worship ever since. This is where the coronation for the monarchy occurs– with King Charles being rather recently appointed. As a matter of fact, the Abbey has been the coronation church for the UK since 1066. You’ll also find 17 previous monarchs settled here for their final resting place. It’s no surprise this extravagant church has been named a World Heritage Site… for any eagle-eyed royal wedding watchers, this is also where Prince William married Princess Kate.
Buckingham Palace
Buckingham Palace is a rather stately embodiment of the monarchy, and so very worth stopping by. If you have time, you might be able to squeeze in a tour! During the high season, this will be hard to squeeze in on the fly, so if you’re feeling rather passionate about wanting to wander the halls of Buckingham Palace, you will need to book a tour in advance. They will sell out!
Even if you’re not itching to see Buckingham Palace from the inside out, watching the Changing of the Guard can be a unique experience. Thus occurs every day at 11:00 am in June and July or Mondays, Wednesdays, Fridays and Sundays, August through May. Our walking tour forms a rather oblong ‘U’, but if you do it backwards, the timing should be perfect to catch the guard change.
Trafalgar Square
Trafalgar Square really makes for quite the smorgasbord of London culture and art. There’s statues, fountains, and sculptures as well as the National Gallery…. plus London’s smallest police station. What more could you want? A bathroom perhaps?? Right about this time in the day, a public bathroom was quite the welcome sight, so just know that’s here as well– you do have to pay to use the bathroom, but it’s very cheap and well worth it if ya gotta go!
Piccadilly Circus
Piccadilly Circus isn’t quite animals and acrobats… think Times Square meets Bethesda Fountain. This massive intersection of streets has become an attraction for its digital screens and billboards, fountain, and nearby shopping. While there’s going to be the expected tourist trap haunches, there’s loads of other shops to wander through, making this a perfect final stop.
Beep, Beep — Back It Up
From Piccadilly Circus, it’s not too hard to backtrack to the hotel. While there’s loads of apps to help navigate transportation, we already had Google Maps downloaded, and felt it did a fab job getting us where we needed to go.
A chock-a-block day, full of sights, sounds, smells, and more than your fair share of walking can leave you feeling pretty tuckered, it’s easy to power through knowing you only have 24 hours in London to take it all in! Cheers to making the most of your layover.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
The land of fire and ice! For being a relatively small country in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean, Iceland has an impressive array of sights to behold. From fjords to volcanos to waterfalls to beaches and all the glaciers in between, the topographic variety here is truly astounding. This is quite the dream vacation locale for anyone that thrives on outdoor exploration adventures. Four days in Iceland will give you a taste of the grandiose and fantastic landscapes this beautiful country is known for.
IcelandAir allows travelers to add a 1-7 day stopover in Iceland to their trip, without any additional fees. This is an amazing opportunity to explore two places for the cost of one… at least regarding airfare. So much to see and so little time… or rather so little PTO (is there ever enough?!) While a stop-over of any length is going to be an amazing experience, we’d suggest trying to squeeze in a four day stay. This is enough time to allow you a robust snapshot of the country and a little buffer for your arrival/departure, while still leaving you time to explore your final destination.
Where To Go?
Perhaps it’s a bit of a hot take, but if you only have four days in Iceland, we recommend skipping Reykjavik, Iceland’s capital and biggest city, in favor of more time exploring the raw, natural beauty of Iceland. While there’s awesome culture, food, and sights in the city, what makes Iceland truly unique is outside the city limits.
If you’re looking into traveling to Iceland, you’re bound to read about the Ring Road eventually. While four days is plenty of time to capture a glimpse of Iceland’s charm, it’s a bit tight to try and traverse Ring Road in its entirety. As such, we’ve outlined four amazing days out exploring the south and southeast pockets of the country. This part of Iceland has such a dense accumulation of amazing sights. The perfect way to maximize your time!
How To Get There
We just returned from Iceland (check out our ten day Ring Road itinerary here) and, we’re already excited to go back! While I love tent camping and the occasional backpacking trip, I can’t say I’m quite as outdoorsy as my raised-in-the-wilderness-of-Oregon husband (he’s actually from Portland, but spent an above-average amount of time wilderness adventuring). As such, I was a little nervous about committing to van life, but it was all for nothing!! The vans are intuitively designed, the bed was surprisingly comfy, the toilets and showers in the campgrounds were beyond satisfactory, and we ate such yummy meals!
What’s better than exploring, getting a little lost, savoring the hot springs, hiking it out, and and just plain gasping at all the scenic drives??? If you’re one the fence about committing, JUST DO IT!!
Renting a Van
Where to even begin? Ecotourism has exploded in Iceland and with it so has the converted campervan industry. How do you know which one to choose? Who includes all of the things you want and need? Is an airport shuttle included? How much space do you need?
The why
Before we even get into the nitty gritty, why rent a van in Iceland? Why not just drive around and get hotel rooms? So many reasons! First and foremost, Iceland is big spendy. Even a ~budget~ trip can get expensive quickly! Renting a car plus getting hotel rooms is almost certainly going to add up to more than the cost of the rental van. An added money-saving bonus is that meals out add up quickly too, so having your own kitchen allows you the opportunity to make food instead of eating out for every meal. You don’t want to blow your whole budget on the stopover!
The second reason would be the flexibility. Before we left, I spent hours and hours scouring blogs, reading Iceland travel books, checking Instagram accounts, etc. trying to craft the perfect itinerary… and we still shot from the hip and changed plans the day of more than once to do something different. When you’re just driving to a campground, it’s nice to be able to have that ability to change your mind.
Anyone that’s done much camping will already know where I’m headed with reason number three here… the VIEWS! While it’s not quite the same as backpacking to a remote alpine lake, there’s a handful of the campsites that are so amazing, and you just wouldn’t get the same view with a hotel. Our favorite campsite was actually in a location that just had camping options— 45 min from the closest hotel, so in order to truly enjoy this place you had to be all in.
The who
We spent extensive time comparing different van rental companies, and as such I feel pretty confident recommending Happy Campers! Not only was everything in the van exactly as advertised, but the customer service was excellent.
The other things that swung us to Happy Camper were a collection of smaller perks… all the overnight bedding was included as were the gas cooking canisters. Our rental included our pick up and return to the airport as well as a wifi transponder and GPS for use throughout the entirety of the trip! We were sooooo pleased with our experience.
the What
You may be thinking how big of a van do I need? Is four wheel drive (4WD) necessary? The very frustrating answer is… it depends! If you’re visiting in the summer months, you can traverse the ring road, and more specifically everything on this itinerary, in a 2WD vehicle without any issue. Some people really prefer to pull away from the crowds and would rather sacrifice more popular stops for some F-road exploration. F-roads are roads in Iceland that you MUST have a 4WD to explore due to the road conditions you may encounter. One could also argue that during a 4 day trip, there’s enough to see accessible via 2WD vehicle that a 4WD van isn’t reaaaally necessary.
Now, visiting in the winter is a whole other dealio. We drove on roads in Iceland that had us thinking… if this isn’t an F-road, what do the F-roads look like?!?! Now, if we were encounter some of those same roads in the middle of winter with ice and snow on the road, I would definitely want a vehicle with 4WD. Even friends that visited a couple months ahead of us in May woke up to snow one day and were glad they had a car with a little extra oomph!
go big or go home
Now to the important question… which van size are you going to go for? While there’s loads of different companies, they all more or less offer different spins on the same vans. We opted for Happy Camper’s Happy 2 – 3 Pax rendition of a Renault Trafic van. Having never lived the #VanLife before, I was worried about feeling crammed in one of the smaller WV Caddy, Renault Kangoo, or Dacia Dokker sized-vans.
I wanted us to have enough space that we could enjoy ourselves during our trip and I wasn’t constantly needing to re-arrange things. I also didn’t want to feel like Salvador and I were too on top of one another. Nothing ruins a vacation adventure like getting sick of each other halfway through… but it would potentially be easier to just make it work for a couple days as opposed to if you were van-living for a week or more.
I’ll be honest, I casually scoped out the smaller vans, and I’m very glad we decided to punch up to the bigger version. While we certainly could have made it work, I think it was a bit more enjoyable experience for both of us to have the extra space. PLUS Salvador was 2 weeks out from an ankle surgery, and I don’t always have the best body awareness, so the extra room helped us avoid any nefarious ~whoopsie daisy~ situations.
There are bigger vans you can rent as well, but I subjectively think it’s a bit more space than you need– especially if you’re just visiting for a few days. That being said, everyone’s space vs cost desire is different!
Fast & Furious
Be aware of your surroundings as you’re driving. This is always true, but in Iceland there are cameras set up to catching speeding travelers. These speeding tickets are so easy to avoid because all of the speed check cameras have a sign posted about a quarter mile ahead that warns you of the upcoming situation. Most of the cameras are in the south part of the island as you approach/depart Reykjavik. Up in the north, near Akureyri, you’ll find an uptick as well. Nothing to stress about, but good to be aware of— no one wants to find out they got a ticket 1 month later.
Cash Out
Unlike many other European countries, you can really get through a whole trip to Iceland without needing any cash. Some of the shower machines at campsites requires 100 ISK coins; however, the campsites will almost always just charge you evenly for these coins when you pay for your nights stay. Gas stations can be a little finicky and might make you pay with a debit card (pin required), but there’s no real need to hit up an ATM or exchange for cash before you leave.
Fast & Furious
Be aware of your surroundings as you’re driving. This is always true, but in Iceland there are cameras set up to catching speeding travelers. These speeding tickets are so easy to avoid because all of the speed check cameras have a sign posted about a quarter mile ahead that warns you of the upcoming situation. Most of the cameras are in the south part of the island as you approach/depart Reykjavik. Up in the north, near Akureyri, you’ll find an uptick as well. Nothing to stress about, but good to be aware of— no one wants to find out they got a ticket 1 month later.
DAY ONE
First and foremost, gotta pick up the van…or rental car! This might take a little longer than you expect, so be sure to leave yourself some wiggle room. Today will be about six hours of drive time, but it’s such a beautiful drive, the time really does fly by.
When you’re arriving from the United States, many of the flights seem to be evening flights, which typically means a morning arrival in Iceland. Pack a comfy neck pillow, your best eye mask, and some ear plugs for good measure, to help ensure you catch a couple winks of sleep on the flight. While this can sometimes be a kick-in-the-pants way to start the day, it makes for an awesome way to maximize your arrival day.
If you do decide to rent a campervan, perhaps the most convenient perk is that your bed and your car are one in the same. This means that if you’re tired and need a one hour power nap, you can pull over into a parking lot and pass out for a bit (this is do-able in a sleepy-girl-pinch, but overnight camping should always be done in a campground).
Once your sleep tank is full, stop by the grocery store to stock up on a couple days worth of snacks.
Drive time: 6 hours
Diamond Beach
It’s a bit of long haul out here, but you’ll be allll about the stops as you weave your way back. This beach earns its sparkling name from the small chunks of glacier ice that wash up on the shore… sorry, no gem hunting here! Not only is it rather different to see an icy beach, but the mountainous backdrop is unforgettably beautiful as well.
Jökulsárlón Glacier Lagoon
The Jökulsárlón Glacier Lagoon is actually just on the opposite side of the road as Diamond Beach. You can keep your car parked where it is and just wander under the bridge. The lagoon is chock-a-block full of icebergs from the Breiðamerkurjökull Glacier. The ever-changing collection of icebergs is like a mural come to life with the poignant shades of blue and the dark ribbons of ash, serving as a reminder of past eruptions.
I mean, if you’re looking for a fun place to take a photo for your pregnancy announcement, this certainly isn’t a bad spot! 🙂
Fjallsárlón Glacier Lagoon
Yet another amazing stop that a photo just can’t do justice to. It’s wild to think you can see this massive glacier from Ring Road and can take a short hike to witness it up close and personal. Or at least pretty close. The glacier slopes down to meet the lagoon, so you can wander to the edge of the lagoon and take in the magnificence of the dynamic duo.
Vatnajökull National Park — Skaftafell Nature Reserve
Not only is this a beautiful pocket of the national park to explore, but it’s also where we recommend camping for the night. The perk of rolling into your campsite a bit earlier in the day means you can hopefully snag a top notch spot. Once you’re all situated, you can set out on a hike or two. The Svartifoss Waterfall trail (2 miles) and Skaftafellsjökull Glacier trail (3 miles) are two awesome hikes to sample the area.
Outside of the hiking exploration, the campsite itself was one of our favorites. Your camping fee for the night includes toilets, plenty of sinks for cleaning dishes, hot showers (with lots of stalls for showering!!), AND a washer and dryer.
This may not seem like a huge deal, but it’s über convenient. Many of the campgrounds we visited either had no washer/dryer *or* just a washer, no dryer— almost always for a fee. You’re unlikely to have any laundry to do if you’re stopping in Iceland on your way TO your final destination; however, if you’re on your way home, it might be nice to wash a few things while dinner cooks!
You just can’t beat supper with a view!!!
DAY TWO
The best part about a four day trip is that every day is going to be shockingly amazing. Today might just bring you the most astounding collection of views. From a jaw-dropping canyon to a puffin-filled beach to the BEST campsite you’ll ever visit, day two is almost guaranteed to be unforgettable.
Drive time: about 3 hours
Fjaðrárgljúfur Canyon
This picturesque canyon isn’t far off of Ring Road, but it’s worth the stop! From the parking lot, there’s a ~2 mile out and back trail that provides a few different opportunities to peer into the canyon, and you’ll want to take all the glimpses you can get! The Fjaðrá River winds its way through the steep canyon, with a couple of striking waterfalls making an appearance as well. We happened to pass through on a rather drizzly day, and it was still so amazing!!
A little pop culture fun fact for all the ‘Beliebers’ out there, Justin Bieber filmed his “I’ll Show You” music video here.
Reynisfjara Beach
This is another groovy black sand beach but the sand isn’t necessarily what draws in visitors. The tall basalt columns that line the shore make this beachy keen spot rather iconic. As a bonus, you might be able to see some wild puffins here! When we visited, there were dozens of puffins hanging out on the top of the rocks along the beach.
Dyrholaey Arch
You can spot the Dyrholaey Arch from afar at the Reynisfjara Beach or go investigate up close and personal. If you didn’t catch a glimpse of any puffins at Reynisfjara Beach, you might find some here!
Þakgil Campground
While there’s loads of lovely campsites in Iceland, Þakgil is the best!!!!!! Imagine this: waking up to see lush green mountains divided by a sparkling stream, right outside your campervan. It is so very worth going out of your way for. Located about 45 minutes off of the ring road, it’s not the most economical for time, but you’re getting so much more than just a place to park your car for the night!
Does it seem like today’s itinerary is a little light? That’s because Þakgil isn’t just a campground— it’s also a trailhead. So be sure to arrive with time to hike it out! There’s an amazing 9-10 mile all-day hike the treks out to a glacier, or a more palatable 2.5 mile hike that makes for a perfect evening walk. When you look up trails for Pakgil, you’ll find people generally talking about the red, yellow, and purple trails; however, when we visited (summer 2023) , the red trail was closed and there was a fairly new blue trail available to explore.
Since Salvador was unable to go hiking and the general nature of this area is that it’s a bit more remote, I abstained from solo-Han hiking out to the glacier and decided to save that for a future Iceland adventure. You’ll quickly find out this place embodies the kind of natural beauty that’s not only worth going out of your way for but worth coming back for!! Even if you can’t do a long hike, I can confirm the blue trail afforded some amazing vistas.
But will I make it???
Reading google reviews can leave you in such a tailspin. The road to get to Pakgil is certainly laden with potholes and a couple blind hills/corners, so drivers should plan to take it slowly. That being said, it was totally totally doable to make the journey in a 2WD van. It was even a drizzly morning the day we drove in (i.e. not the most dry, perfect conditions), and we never felt unsafe!
Also, despite being rather ~out there~ this campground still had everything you might need for an evening of camping fun. Hot showers, toilets, a wash station, and even a cool covered eating area in a cave!
DAY THREE
The theme song for today is all about chasing waterfalls… with an adventurous snorkeling detour. Not only does the day start with a behemoth of a fall, but you’ll get to hike it out on a trail full of amazing waterfalls. From very popular to off-the-beaten-path, today’s the day to explore them all!
Drive time: 6 hours
Skógafoss
There’s a handful of must-see waterfalls in Iceland, and Skógafoss is certainly one of them. Not only is it beautifully immense, but you can appreciate it up close and personal. We were super lucky and didn’t encounter much rain when we were in Iceland, but it was worth packing our rain jacket and rain pants to get close enough to feel allllll the waterfall mist.
Fimmvörðuháls hike
The Fimmvörðuháls hike is a rather long hike. It’s possible to complete in a single day if you’re feeling frisky and very prepared, but it’s also very commonly backpacked by people. Stretching a total of 16 miles and tackling over 4,000 ft of elevation, this point to point trail highlights various terrains in the Icelandic backcountry. Think endless waterfalls, desolate lava fields, dramatic glaciers, and lush vistas. If you consider yourself even a casual hiker, doing at least part of this trail is a must!
The first 4-5 miles of the Fimmvörðuháls trail is known as Waterfall Way, which makes it a perfect stretch for anyone hesitant to commit to 16 miles of terrain. We’d originally discussed tackling this hike together; however, with Salvador out for the count, I solo hiked about 2 miles out and back to get a glimpse of the glorious trail. It did not disappoint!!
The trail is super easy to find, because it starts at Skógafoss. There’s a ~400 step ascent to the top of the waterfall, and once you’re done checking out the waterfall from a bird’s eye view, you just keep following the trail until you feel ready to turn around… or until you get to Basar!
GullFoss
This will be the last big time waterfall on the itinerary, so take her in, in all her grandeur! It’s a short walk from the parking lot, down a flight of stairs to the prime viewing area. There’s actually enough of a path that you can wander down and see Gullfoss from a few different vantage points. You’ll want to have your rain jacket to brave the spray… and leave behind any accessories that might blow away easily.
Geysir Geothermal
Have you ever seen a geyser before? If not, here’s your chance! The Geysir Geothermal area is actually home to a few geysers, but most of them stay pretty dormant. Strokkur is the exception, with eruptions occurring every few minutes. It’s such a wild experience to watch the ground bubble up and then turbulently erupt!
Thingvellir National Park
Onto the last Icelandic National Park: Thingvellir! This UNESCO World Heritage Site has both geographic and historical significance, earning it the prestigious designation.
The Silfra Fissure runs through Thingvellir National Park, and tour guide services, like Arctic Adventures, will suit you up and guide you through this underwater world of mystery. The water is exceptionally clear with visibility over 100 meters. The Silfra Fissure is aptly named as it is the space between Eurasian and North American tectonic plates. This makes Silfra one of the only places in the world where you can go snorkeling along a continental rift!
We had heard from friends that this is a must-do adventure; however, for us, this snorkeling trip was unfortunately a casualty of the itinerary tweaks we made after Salvador had surgery. Believe it or not, submerging a healing incision and kicking around for an hour is highly discouraged 2 weeks out from an Achilles tendon repair. We’re already excited to dive in whenever we return!
Once you’re all dried off, take those legs for a nice, easy hike to Öxarárfoss. There’s a couple different parking lots to choose from, which will affect how far you hike, but generally speaking, it’s a pretty flat hike that takes you to a lovely waterfall. Don’t be a waterfall snob after all the grandeur you’ve seen thus far! It may not be the largest or most powerful fall of the trip, but this waterfall makes for a lovely perch to take in the unique topography and geography in this region of the country.
Bring It Back Around
While there is a campsite in Thingvellir National Park, we actually recommend just finishing your loop and heading all the way back to Keflavik. It makes for 3 medium-to-rather-full drive days, but the upside is that your final day in Iceland will involve virtually no driving. We stayed in the Vogar Campground in Keflavik, which was only 10 minutes from our van rental company. This made everything run super smoothly on our drop-off day, so this is our personal recommendation. The most amazing thing about renting a van is that you can change your mind and switch up your plans a million times over… it’s amazing not to be tied to a hotel reservation or specific plan.
DAY FOUR
After powering through three days of Iceland’s most amazing sights, sounds, and smells, the vibe for today is complete relaxation! Iceland is known for its a etherial hot springs, and the crowning jewel is the one and only Blue Lagoon.
BLUE LAGOON
Visiting Blue Lagoon is an activity best planned in advance. Due to its popularity, it’s highly recommended to purchase your tickets as soon as you cement your plans. Your ticket is for a specific window of time on a given day. Days and times will sell out— especially in the summer, so look early to ensure you have top pick!
When visiting for the day, you have a couple options for your day’s experience. The pricing for each of these levels of is dynamic and can fluctuate slightly across days of the week. You’ll also find that some times of day are more expensive than others. Generally speaking ‘premium’ will be slightly more expensive than ‘comfort’, with the ‘luxury’ being a more size-able jump in price. Family activities can add up quickly, but at Blue Lagoon children 13 and under enjoy free admission. The saved pennies can go towards all the snacks little people eat!
COMFORT
PREMIUM
LUXURY
Includes: – Entrance to the Blue Lagoon – Silica mud mask – Use of a towel – 1st drink of your choice
Includes: – Entrance to the Blue Lagoon – Silica mud mask + two additional masks of your choice – Use of a towel – 1st drink of your choice – Use of bathrobe – 1 glass of sparkling wine if dining at Lava restaurant
Includes: – Five luxurious hours at the Retreat Spa – Includes a private changing suite – Unlimited access to both the Retreat Lagoon and the Blue Lagoon (and all the extra luxe amenities in the Retreat center)
example of the dynamic pricing
Replenishing the energy stores
You really can spend all day here… some morning relaxation followed by a delicious lunch and then back into the hot springs you go. Where to eat? You won’t find a food court here, that’s for sure. There’s a cafe with both dining-in and take-away options as well as three restaurants— all serving fresh, locally sourced ingredients and unforgettable views. While the food is bound to be good wherever you end up, they do have a Michelin-starred establishment, heralded for its gourmet revelations. This is a recent accomplishment as the Moss Restaurant just received their Michelin-star in 2023! It’s easy to make a reservation online when you book your admission ticket.
Take off
At the end of the day, it’s time to pack up and head home… all the way back home! Blue Lagoon is only ~20 minutes away from the airport, so it’s beyond easy to store your bags while you’re relaxing, shower off, and then jetset off for home. It’s always amazing just how quickly ten days flies by!
We were quite the unlucky pair for Blue Lagooning— one pregnant belly and one fresh ankle surgery/incision meant we had to skip this bucket list attraction; however, we already know we’ll be back one day to enjoy all the mud masks and steamy warmth.
So long, farewell
Iceland is beyond magnificent with its cornucopia of astounding natural beauty. To compare it to other places we’ve been, we found Iceland to be a rather unexpected combination of Hawaii meets Alaska?? Strangely enough. But anyways, we hope you enjoy your four days in Iceland adventure, and we wish you all the most exhilarating explorations as you venture out.
If a picture’s worth a thousand words, how many is a video worth??? Here’s a short video recap of some of our favorite sights… pick Iceland, chose Iceland— you won’t regret it for a second! Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
The land of fire and ice! For being a relatively small country in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean, Iceland has an impressive array of sights to behold. From fjords to volcanos to waterfalls to beaches and all the glaciers in between, the topographic variety here is truly astounding. This is quite the dream vacation locale for anyone that thrives on outdoor exploration adventures. You’ll have the experience of a lifetime driving along Iceland’s circumferential highway: Ring Road.
Ring Road is an 820 mile or 1322 km long highway that connects most of the towns and cities in the more populated regions of the country. Besides being important for country infrastructure, it makes for a perfect highlight reel to anyone looking to see the country in a weeklong (or in our case ten day) snapshot. Ring Road circles the island, making it the perfect foundation for road trip travel. Follow the often-paved-but-also-rather-gravel-y road for all the unforgettable views and memories. We’ve cultivated the perfect ten day itinerary for your Icelandic campervan road trip!
We just returned from Iceland and, we’re already excited to go back! What’s better than exploring, getting a little lost, savoring the hot springs, hiking it out, and and just plain gasping at all the scenic drives??? While I love tent camping and the occasional backpacking trip, I can’t say I’m quite as outdoorsy as my raised-in-the-wilderness-of-Oregon husband (he’s actually from Portland, but spent an above-average amount of time wilderness adventuring). As such, I was a little nervous about committing to over a week of van life, but it was all for nothing!! The vans are intuitively designed, the bed was surprisingly comfy, the toilets and showers in the campgrounds were beyond satisfactory, and we ate such yummy meals!
If you’re one the fence about committing, JUST DO IT!!
collecting camping passes for the virtual scrapbook <3
Renting a Van
Where to even begin? Ecotourism has exploded in Iceland and with it so has the converted campervan industry. How do you know which one to choose? Who includes all of the things you want and need? Is an airport shuttle included? How much space do you need?
The why
Before we even get into the nitty gritty, why rent a van in Iceland? Why not just drive around and get hotel rooms? So many reasons! First and foremost, Iceland is big spendy. Even a ~budget~ trip can get expensive quickly! Renting a car plus getting hotel rooms is almost certainly going to add up to more than the cost of the rental van. An added money-saving bonus is that meals out add up quickly too, so having your own kitchen allows you the opportunity to make food instead of eating out for every meal.
The second reason would be the flexibility. Before we left, I spent hours and hours scouring blogs, reading Iceland travel books, checking Instagram accounts, etc. trying to craft the perfect itinerary… and we still shot from the hip and changed plans the day of more than once to do something different. When you’re just driving to a campground, it’s nice to be able to have that ability to change your mind.
Anyone that’s done much camping will already know where I’m headed with reason number three here… the VIEWS! While it’s not quite the same as backpacking to a remote alpine lake, there’s a handful of the campsites that are so amazing, and you just wouldn’t get the same view with a hotel. Our favorite campsite was actually in a location that just had camping options— 45 min from the closest hotel, so in order to truly enjoy this place you had to be all in.
The who
We probably spent almost as much time exploring all of the various car-camping options as we did planning the trip… not joking quite as much as I wish I was. Due to the extent of reconnaissance we did, I feel pretty confident recommending Happy Campers as a van rental company! Not only was everything in the van exactly as advertised, but the customer service was excellent.
Three weeks before we were supposed to arrive, we reached out to see if there were any automatic vehicles available in their fleet. We’d originally rented a manual van and planned to have Salvador drive the whole way, BUT plans changed when he tore his right Achilles. He ended up having surgery exactly two weeks before we left, and I had never driven a manual transmission a day of my life. The gravel-y rolling hills of Iceland did not seem like the most ideal place to learn.
Even though we didn’t see anything available on their website, we emailed Happy Camper to see if there would be any way to switch over to an automatic van, and by golly, they were able to finagle the fleet and make it happen.
The other things that swung us to Happy Camper were a collection of smaller perks… all the overnight bedding was included as were the gas cooking canisters. Our rental included our pick up and return to the airport as well as a wifi transponder and GPS for use throughout the entirety of the trip! We were sooooo pleased with our experience.
the What
You may be thinking how big of a van do I need? Is four wheel drive (4WD) necessary? The very frustrating answer is… it depends! If you’re visiting in the summer months, you can traverse the ring road in a 2WD vehicle without any issue. Some people really prefer to pull away from the crowds and would rather sacrifice more popular stops for some F-road exploration. F-roads are roads in Iceland that you MUST have a 4WD to explore due to the road conditions you may encounter. One could also argue that during a 7-14 day trip, there’s enough to see in Iceland accessible via 2WD vehicle that a 4WD van isn’t reaaaally necessary.
Now, visiting in the winter is a whole other dealio. We drove on roads in Iceland that had us thinking… if this isn’t an F-road, what do the F-roads look like?!?! Now, if we were encounter some of those same roads in the middle of winter with ice and snow on the road, I would definitely want a vehicle with 4WD. Even friends that visited a couple months ahead of us in May woke up to snow one day and were glad they had a car with a little extra oomph.
go big or go home
Now to the important question… which van size are you going to go for? While there’s loads of different companies, they all more or less offer different spins on the same vans. We opted for Happy Camper’s Happy 2 – 3 Pax rendition of a Renault Trafic van. Having never lived the #VanLife before, I was worried about feeling crammed in one of the smaller WV Caddy, Renault Kangoo, or Dacia Dokker sized-vans.
I wanted us to have enough space that we could enjoy ourselves during our trip and I wasn’t constantly needing to re-arrange things. I also didn’t want to feel like Salvador and I were too on top of one another. Nothing ruins a vacation adventure like getting sick of each other halfway through!
I’ll be honest, I casually scoped out the smaller vans, and I’m very glad we decided to punch up to the bigger version. While we certainly could have made it work, I think it was a bit more enjoyable experience for both of us to have the extra space. PLUS Salvador was 2 weeks out from an ankle surgery, and I don’t always have the best body awareness, so the extra room helped us avoid any nefarious ~whoopsie daisy~ situations.
There are bigger vans you can rent as well, but I subjectively think it’s a bit more space than you need, but everyone’s space vs cost desire is different!
Fast & Furious
Be aware of your surroundings as you’re driving. This is always true, but in Iceland there are cameras set up to catching speeding travelers. These speeding tickets are so easy to avoid because all of the speed check cameras have a sign posted about a quarter mile ahead that warns you of the upcoming situation. Most of the cameras are in the south part of the island as you approach/depart Reykjavik. Up in the north, near Akureyri, you’ll find an uptick as well. Nothing to stress about, but good to be aware of— no one wants to find out they got a ticket 1 month later.
Cash Out
Unlike many other European countries, you can really get through a whole trip to Iceland without needing any cash. Some of the shower machines at campsites requires 100 ISK coins; however, the campsites will almost always just charge you evenly for these coins when you pay for your nights stay. Gas stations can be a little finicky and might make you pay with a debit card (pin required), but there’s no real need to hit up an ATM or exchange for cash before you leave.
When To Go
Iceland is going to be beautiful in every season. As the days get shorter and colder, the aurora borealis begins to return, which only adds to the mystic wonderland ambiance of the island. Summer brings nearly endless hours of daylight and more moderate temperatures. The drier and more mild Icelandic weather tends to drive tourism to the summer months.
After reading so extensively about how popular Iceland becomes in the summer, we were honestly expecting to encounter more people on the road and whilst we were out adventuring. I don’t want to mislead anyone, parking lots will fill up and trails will be well traveled, but we never ran into any issues where we were unable to find a parking spot or go where we’d planned because of a crowing issue.
You can catch snow in Iceland as early as October or as late as May, so if you’re trying to avoid any snowy situations, I’d recommend planning your trip outside that time window. Since the fellow traveler situation wasn’t too crazy and the weather was rather perfect while we visited, we’re big champions of an early to mid-July visit! June or August would be rather lovely as well.
Chow Time
Food stays a top priority for this hungry girl. If you’re already thinking “what am I going to make for 10 days?”, have no fear. Cooking in the van really wasn’t that different than cooking on a stove at home. Our camp stove was build right into the internal structure of the van… it was almost like we had a mini kitchen!
Before we left, we packed a small container of Lawry’s seasoning salt and a lemon pepper I just snagged from Target. These were clutch to have for all of our cooking endeavors.
Breakfast
We kept breakfast pretty simple. I’m used to eating protein bars for breakfast, so I packed enough of those to last our whole trip. Salvador would usually have a yogurt or Skyr (Icelandic dairy product with the consistency of yogurt). He was also a big fan of some of the pre-made salmon sandwiches available in the grocery store. That made for an easy breakfast (or lunch) as well.
LUNCH
I won’t be winning any awards for creativity here… we ate the same thing for lunch almost every single day, but it was good! We maintained a stock of fresh bread, eggs, sliced turkey, and tomatoes in the cooler, so every day for lunch we had a delicious egg sandwich. It was a perfect combination of being nutritiously balanced and fresh!
You really just need a pan and spatula for this, so it doesn’t take long or create many dishes. This is key when you’re living out of the van day in and day out!
Dinner
Chef Salvador had full rein in the camper-van kitchen, and he served up some YUMMY meals. A few of our favorites include:
Lamb Macaroni & Cheese
Spaghetti and Chicken breast with a side of sliced bread
Tacos
Chicken with Pasta salad
Lamb chops and salad
This obviously isn’t the most innovative list of meals you’ve ever seen, but don’t think campervan means you’ll be eating freeze-dried dinners for a week! We also ate out a couple times as well, which was not only tasty, but a nice reprieve from dishes. 🙂
The Highlight Reel
If a picture’s worth a thousand words, how many is a video worth??? Here’s a short video recap of some of our favorite sights… pick Iceland, chose Iceland— you won’t regret it for a second!
DAY 1
First and foremost, gotta pick up the van! This might take a little longer than you expect, so be sure to leave yourself some wiggle room. There’s flexibility in the driving schedule because the total drive time for today is only around 4 hours, which is very doable.
We had an overnight flight arriving into Reykjavik, which I honestly thought would be perfect. We upgraded our seats, packed a comfy neck pillow, a tried and true eye mask, and threw in some ear plugs for good measure… only to sleep zero total minutes on the flight. As such I was full on crashing as we were supposed to be starting our drive.
The most insane perk of renting a camper van is that your bed and your car are one in the same, which means that if you’re tired and need a one hour power nap, you can pull over into a parking lot and pass out for a bit (this is do-able in a sleepy-girl-pinch, but overnight camping should always be done in a campground).
Once your sleep tank is full, stop by the grocery store to stock up on a few days worth of snacks. You’ll find spots in both Reykjavik and Borgarnes, so no need to stress about finding food. From there, it’s time to catch some views on the Snæfellsnes Peninsula.
Drive time: approximately 4 hours
THE Raidfeldsgja Gorge
This gorge makes for a great place to stretch your legs out. It’s a short uphill walk from the parking area up to the entrance of the gorge, but it’s rather fun to hop along the rocks to further explore up into the gorge. Like most spots in Iceland, the pictures really don’t do it justice— don’t let this dissuade you. It’s a perfect first stop to take in the immense landscape up close and personal.
Arnarstapi Cliffs
Oh man, get ready to feel that ocean breeze on your face! This will be the first glimpse of the uniquely cool basalt columns found all over Iceland. This lava-rock-meets-the-ocean junction is not only beautiful but rather peaceful as well. There’s also a cliff walk you can wander over to if you feel like living life on the edge!
Hellnar viewpoint
There’s loads of places to pull off and take in the coastline, but the one in Hellnar is especially picturesque. Not only is it fun to get out and see the landscape from different vantage points, but after a few hours of driving, hopping out every 20 minutes or so is kinda nice.
Snæfellsjökull National Park
Being that it’s the first day, there’s no crazy hikes on the agenda. That being said, if you’re keen on an afternoon saunter, Snæfellsjökull National Park is the perfect place to stop. Salvador’s recent Achilles surgery didn’t alter our itinerary a ton, but it did change how much hiking we did. The park has loads of amazing trails to check out— it’s a national park for a reason!
Djúpalónssandur Beach
Djúpalónssandur Beach is actually part of Snæfellsjökull National Park, so this may be a bit redundant… but if you only make one stop in the park, it should be here! The black sand beach is rather picturesque, and the overlook of the beach is quite accessible for those with mobility impairments. As an added treat, we saw an arctic fox here, which was pretty special!
Ólafsvík Campsite
Tonight, plan to bunk down at Ólafsvík Campsite. This lovely campsite includes the cost of showers, so if you’re feeling a bit mucky, here’s your chance to rinse off! The bathrooms are nice, the showers-to-campers ratio is perfect, and they also have free wifi available. While the campground is tucked away just off the road, the surrounding area is just perfectly picturesque.
There’s a little road that makes for a nice post-dinner walk. It showcases views of both the town of Ólafsvík as well as the endless stretch of ocean.
DAY 2
There’s no two ways about it, today is the longest drive day of the trip… but better to get it over with early, while you’re still hopped up on that beginning-of-trip excitement! Get ready to be shocked at just how fast 80km/hr feels on a gravel road. We were rather surprised at just how many “main” roads are gravel… and rather pot-holey at that.
Drive time: about 6.5 hours
Kirkjufell Mountain
Only 20 minutes down the road from the Ólafsvík Campsite is Kirkjufell Mountain and its neighboring waterfall. While there’s loads of massive, powerful waterfalls in Iceland, this one is exceptional because of the very picturesque waterfall-mountain combo. As a matter of fact, it’s become a rather iconic photo spot on the Snæfellsnes Peninsula.
It’s a pretty simple walk from the parking lot to the waterfall. If you’re in the mood to walk around more and stretch your legs before a longer stint in the car, there’s ample trail space!
Hvitserkur
Oh man, if unique rock formations really tickle your fancy, this rhino is worth bumping out for, butttttt this is actually the only thing we did on our trip that we *wouldn’t* necessarily recommend. When we were there, you couldn’t get down to the beach, and he was honestly a little smaller than we expected, observing him from afar. So please enjoy this picture. Take it in and shave off the 45-60 minutes it would add to your day’s drive time!
An interesting bit of Icelandic folklore, some of the various rock formations found around the island are said to be trolls that were forever frozen in time. What do you think? Cheeky troll? Or rock eroded with time? I suppose we’ll never really know!
Hofsós Swimming Pool
Where to go instead? The Hofsós swimming pool! While we ended up omitting this stop (minimal pool and hot spring hopping since Salvador had a surgical incision we were trying to keep dry), it came highly recommended to us by a friend that visited a few years back! The pool is kept nice and warm and offers views overlooking the fjords… if you’re lucky, you might just see puffins or whales swimming by!!!
AkuREyri — Systragil campground
The Systragil Campground makes for a quiet spot to bunk down for the evening. While it was one of the smaller facilities we visited (two bathrooms, one shower), there was also a small playground for little kids to enjoy. It also still has a nice shelter to cook in and an area to clean off your dishes. Showers are an extra fee and so is use of the washing machine. Beware though, there’s no dryer, so everything would need to air dry! Besides the facilities, there’s a lovely little waterfall nearby, which is fun to go check out before you hit the road again.
DAY 3
Iceland’s geography is impressive for so many reasons, but the range of landscapes to be seen on this small, island country will truly blow you away. From astounding waterfalls to Mars-esque lava fields, you will continue to feel amazed by the vast nature scenery. After yesterday’s long haul, today’s zippy little drive will feel like nothing— especially since it’s broken up by the stops!
Drive time: approximately 1.5 hours
Godafoss
Iceland is practically the land of waterfalls, but there’s a handful in the country that are extraordinarily spectacular. Godafoss is certainly one of them!! It’s always humbling to witness the power of a waterfall, and this one is no exception. From your overlook perch at the top of the falls you can take it in with a birds eye view, but there’s also a path that brings you down to a pool at the bottom of the falls (from the East bank side).
There’s actually two parking lots— east and west— which both lead to paved trails that provide two similar yet slightly different views. We kinda preferred the east, but with Godafoss being so mighty, it’s hard to pick which vantage point is best!
pseudocraters of Mývatn
The pseudocraters are fun to spot, and the walking path along Mývatn Lake is a nice way to take in the scenery from a few different perspectives and viewing platforms. This hike/walk isn’t too long but makes for a nice length to stretch your legs out.
Dimmuborgir lava field
The expanse of lava is such a stark contrast to the previous lakeside views. This spot really is a choose-your-own-adventure dealio because for anyone just looking to take in the vast lava field, there’s a viewing area, with various informational placards detailing the history of the area. You can also head down into the lava field and go hiking around. There’s a handful of different trails to explore as well as some cave dwellings to check out.
Hverfjall crater
As your driving to the crater parking lot, you may start to think… I’m climbing up the side of that?! But it actually went down easier than expected. Hiking up the crater is totally worth doing— both to see inside the crater itself but also for the panoramic views of Mývatn. Hiking up and all the way around the crater is about 3 miles, but even if you don’t have time for the whole circumferential journey, it’s worth it just to do part of it as an out and back!
Grjótagjá Cave
Look familiar to anyone? In season three, episode five of Game of Thrones, there was a scene filmed in this cave! This is an easy and low key stop (no more than 10 min), but the sparkling blue water is rather pretty. Plus it’s literally right along the way to the nature baths, so why not stop and check it out?!
Mývatn Nature Baths
Wowie wow wow… going to a hot spring in Iceland is a MUST! The Mývatn Nature Baths are so warm and relaxing, with spectacular views. You’ll find two large pools (one a bit warmer than the other) plus a rectangular hot tub for anyone looking to get extra toasty warm. There’s also a couple steam rooms to enjoy as well. They have a swim-up bar for all your libation needs as well as free pitchers of water placed around the pool area to ensure no one gets parched.
We put two Tegaderm patches on Salvador’s incision and hoped for the best as we embarked towards the pool. We actually used a wheelchair to help him get down the ramp without concern for slipping on any wet surfaces. As such, we can confirm that this hot spring nature bath is friendly to those with mobility impairments.
Just a heads up: before you get into any public pool or hot spring it is required to get naked and shower off. No need to bring your own soap though— they had some divine-smelling local products to use!
The 411
Pregnant women are discouraged spending too much time in hot springs so as not to excessively raise the core temperature; however, we were very very pleased to find out Mývatn Nature Baths had two pools— a warmer one that ranged from 37 to 39 degrees Celsius and a cooler one that ran 33 to 36 degrees Celsius (plus a third 40 degree Celsius ‘hot tub’). This was perfect because we were able to just hang out in the cooler (i.e. no warmer than body temp) pool without worrying about any damage to Sprout (he doesn’t have a name yet).
The ever iconic Blue Lagoon doesn’t have to same cooler vs warmer pool option, so if you’re pregnant and stressin’ about missing out on a hot spring adventure, this is a safer option for you to consider. Everyone’s body, baby, and health considerations are different, and our lived experience should never be used in lieu of a health care professional’s advice, BUT it’s always nice to know your options. 🙂
Vogafjós
Are you ready to take a little break from camper van cooking? This laid-back fine dining restaurant is the perfect spot to take your relaxed hot spring self. The farm to table ethos and historic recipes make this dinner more than worth the splurge. Everything they brought to the table left us wanting more… geysir bread that’s cooked underground using geothermal heat? YUM! The lamb shank and arctic char were clean-plate-club delectable, and the slice of cake had us ready to order another. If you only plan to eat out for a few meals, this should be one of them!!
Bjarg
Oh my goodness, just look at the picture below. What an amazingly beautiful campsite right on Lake Myvatn. There were toilets, a dish-washing station, and hot showers included in the camping fee. We found the facilities-to-campers ratio to be just right. We were so stoked to snag one of the last campervan spots facing out to the lake!!
DAY 4
This will be the second longest driving day, but man oh man is it amazing… and somehow doesn’t feel like too long of a drive day, because the drive time is broken up by adventurous stops and unforgettable views.
Drive time: about 6 hours
DETTIFOSS
Day four is off to a strong start, visiting one of the most powerful waterfalls in Europe. Dettifoss is in Vatnajökull National Park and the Vatnajökull glacier melt feeds its rushing waters. As you travel around the country it’s pretty amazing to get to experience so many waterfalls of such magnitude. Fun fact: the opening scene of the movie Prometheus features the one and only Dettifoss!
Stuðlagil Canyon
Oh man, when people ask “What was your favorite things you did in Iceland?” it’s such a hard question to answer because even just driving along ring road is such a visual delight. That being said, hiking down into Stuðlagil canyon and climbing around on the basalt columns definitely makes the top five memory moments. While the hike out isn’t anything too crazy, the columns and the canyon are just breathtaking. Being able to tinker around and explore down into the canyon makes it even better!! This is a must-do stop on your ring road itinerary!!!
There are two parking lots for this hike. One you will find initially, right before a bridge. If you keep driving down a rather pot-holey road (do-able in a campervan if you take it slow), you will find another parking lot, which is where we recommend parking. It does tend to fill up though, so it’s behoove of you to arrive sooner rather than later. Worst case scenario you’ll just end up tacking on an extra couple miles to your hike by leaving from the farther lot.
Poor Salvador got to hold down the fort in the van while I was out hiking and canyon rock climbing, BUT on the other side of the canyon, there’s an overlook. While this saves you the 3-4 mile hike, it’s still not the most mobility-impaired friendly as Salvador single leg hopped all the way down… and all the way back up! So so proud of him for being a trooper and powering through.
Rjúkandi Waterfall
What’s wild about the Rjúkandi Waterfall is that it’s literally just a side-of-the-road pit stop. Yup, right off ring road— no detour required. We actually flew right past it initially but thought it looked cool enough to double back for! It’s a short walk up to the falls and they really are lovely. This is an easy little 15-20 minute stop but worth it! Just another example of the immense natural beauty all over Iceland.
Höfn
On your way south, ring road bumps out along the coastline to trace the eastern fjords. While this is assuredly beautiful, we stayed more inland following 95 to 939, which provided us some of the most spectacular road-side views of the drive. Absolutely astounding topography that really leaves you struggling to keep your eyes on the road. Part of what makes this longer drive day fly by is that the drive itself feels like a treat!
Despite some pretty average Google reviews, we stayed at the campground in Höfn and found it to be perfectly amenable. Do you every read other people’s reviews and think that maybe, just maybe, someone had a little too high of expectations for a campground? This spot had two separate areas of bathrooms and showers (not included but pretty cheap) to accommodate all the campers as well as a covered area for cooking, eating, and washing up. They also had a washer and dryer here as well, but it seemed a little spendy at ~$7 per load per machine. But alas when your clothes are dirty, you gotta do what you gotta do!
We had actually been torn between staying here and at the Vestrahorn campground (only 20 minutes apart), but the grocery store 850 meters down the road from the Hofn campground was what tipped the scales this way. Not only was the campground solid, but the Netto was fab as well. We were rather surprised to see people flocking to snag their pastries in the morning like they were a hot commodity. Worth swinging by if you need to stock up on food!
DAY 5
After a longer day of driving, today’s 2 hours will seem like nothing— especially since a stop halfway through kinda breaks up the drive. As you come into this pocket of the country, the variety of dreamy landscapes is truly unmatched. The main showstoppers today will be glaciers, lagoons, and the might of an Icelandic national park. It’s such a unique experience to watch the topography change as you make your way down and around the island.
Drive time: approximately 2 hours
Diamond Beach
This beach earns its sparkling name from the small chunks of glacier ice that wash up on the shore… sorry, no gem hunting here! Not only is it rather different to see an icy beach, but the mountainous backdrop is unforgettably beautiful as well.
Jökulsárlón Glacier Lagoon
The Jökulsárlón Glacier Lagoon is actually just on the opposite side of the road as Diamond Beach. You can keep your car parked where it is and just wander under the bridge. The lagoon is chock-a-block full of icebergs from the Breiðamerkurjökull Glacier. The ever-changing collection of icebergs is like a mural come to life with the poignant shades of blue and the dark ribbons of ash, serving as a reminder of past eruptions.
I mean, if you’re looking for a fun place to take a photo for your pregnancy announcement, this certainly isn’t a bad spot! 🙂
Fjallsárlón Glacier Lagoon
Yet another amazing stop that a photo just can’t do justice to. It’s wild to think you can see this massive glacier from ring road and can take a short hike to witness it up close and personal. Or at least pretty close. The glacier slopes down to meet the lagoon, so you can wander to the edge of the lagoon and take in the magnificence of the dynamic duo.
Vatnajökull National Park — Skaftafell Nature Reserve
Not only is this a beautiful pocket of the national park to explore, but it’s also where we recommend camping for the night. The perk of rolling into your campsite a bit earlier in the day means you can hopefully snag a top notch spot. Once you’re all situated, you can set out on some hikes. The Svartifoss Waterfall trail (2 miles) and Skaftafellsjökull Glacier trail (3 miles) are two awesome hikes to sample the area.
Outside of the hiking exploration, the campsite itself was one of our favorites. While it was the most expensive place we stayed, we felt it was more than worth the cost of admission. Your camping fee for the night includes toilets, plenty of sinks for cleaning dishes, hot showers (with lots of stalls for showering!!), AND a washer and dryer.
This may not seem like a huge deal, but it’s über convenient. Many of the campgrounds we visited either had no washer/dryer *or* just a washer, no dryer— almost always for a fee. After 5 days of frolicking around, you just might have a handful of things you’d be happy to see cleaned, so jump on the opportunity– might as well do it if you’ve already paid for it!
You just can’t beat dinner with a view!!!
DAY 6
Just when you thought it couldn’t get any better, Iceland brings you arguably your most astounding collection of views yet. From a jaw-dropping canyon to a puffin-filled beach to the most amazing campsite you’ll ever visit, day six just might be the best day of all.
Drive time: about 3 hours
Fjaðrárgljúfur Canyon
This picturesque canyon isn’t far off of ring road, but it’s worth the stop! From the parking lot, there’s a ~2 mile out and back trail that provides a few different opportunities to peer into the canyon, and you’ll want to take all the glimpses you can get! The Fjaðrá River winds its way through the steep canyon, with a couple of striking waterfalls making an appearance as well. We happened to pass through on a rather drizzly day, and it was still so amazing!!
A little pop culture fun fact for all the ‘Beliebers’ out there, Justin Bieber filmed his “I’ll Show You” music video here.
Reynisfjara Beach
This is another groovy black sand beach but the sand isn’t necessarily what draws in visitors. The tall basalt columns that line the shore make this beachy keen spot rather iconic. As a bonus, you might be able to see some wild puffins here! When we visited, there were dozens of puffins hanging out on the top of the rocks along the beach.
Dyrholaey Arch
You can spot the Dyrholaey Arch from afar at the Reynisfjara Beach or go investigate up close and personal. If you didn’t catch a glimpse of any puffins at Reynisfjara Beach, you might find some here!
Þakgil Campground
While there’s loads of lovely campsites in Iceland, Þakgil is the best!!!!!! Imagine this: waking up to see lush green mountains divided by a sparkling stream, right outside your campervan. Is so very worth going out of your way for. Located about 45 minutes off of the ring road, it’s not the most economical for time, but you’re getting so much more than just a place to park your car for the night!
Does it seem like today’s itinerary is a little light? That’s because Þakgil isn’t just a campground— it’s also a trailhead. So be sure to arrive with time to hike it out! There’s an amazing 9-10 mile all-day hike the treks out to a glacier, or a more palatable 2.5 mile hike that makes for a perfect evening walk. When you look up trails for Pakgil, you’ll find people generally talking about the red, yellow, and purple trails; however, when we visited (summer 2023) , the red trail was closed and there was a fairly new blue trail available to explore.
Since Salvador was unable to go hiking and the general nature of this area is that it’s a bit more remote, I abstained from solo-Han hiking out to the glacier and decided to save that for a future Iceland adventure. You’ll quickly find out this place embodies the kind of natural beauty that’s not only worth going out of your way for but worth coming back for!! Even if you can’t do a long hike, I can confirm the blue trail afforded some amazing vistas.
But will I make it???
Reading google reviews can leave you in such a tailspin. The road to get to Pakgil is certainly laden with potholes and a couple blind hills/corners, so drivers should plan to take it slowly. That being said, it was totally totally doable to make the journey in a 2WD van. It was even a drizzly morning the day we drove in (i.e. not the most dry, perfect conditions), and we never felt unsafe!
Also, despite being rather ~out there~ this campground still had everything you might need for an evening of camping fun. Hot showers, toilets, a wash station, and even a cool covered eating area in a cave!
DAY 7
The theme song for today is all about chasing waterfalls. Not only does the day start with a behemoth of a fall, but you’ll get to hike it out on a trail full of amazing waterfalls. From very popular to off-the-beaten-path, today’s the day to explore them all!
Drive time: about 3 hours
Skógafoss
There’s a handful of must-see waterfalls in Iceland, and Skógafoss is certainly one of them. Not only is it beautifully immense, but you can appreciate it up close and personal. We were super lucky and didn’t encounter much rain when we were in Iceland, but it was worth packing our rain jacket and rain pants to get close enough to feel allllll the waterfall mist.
Fimmvörðuháls hike
The Fimmvörðuháls hike is a rather long hike. It’s possible to complete in a single day if you’re feeling frisky and very prepared, but it’s also very commonly backpacked by people. Stretching a total of 16 miles and tackling over 4,000 ft of elevation, this point to point trail highlights various terrains in the Icelandic backcountry. Think endless waterfalls, desolate lava fields, dramatic glaciers, and lush vistas. If you consider yourself even a casual hiker, doing at least part of this trail is a must!
The first 4-5 miles of the Fimmvörðuháls trail is known as Waterfall Way, which makes it a perfect stretch for anyone hesitant to commit to 16 miles of terrain. We’d originally discussed tackling this hike together; however, with Salvador out for the count, I solo hiked about 2 miles out and back to get a glimpse of the glorious trail. It did not disappoint!!
The trail is super easy to find, because it starts at Skógafoss. There’s a ~400 step ascent to the top of the waterfall, and once you’re done checking out the waterfall from a bird’s eye view, you just keep following the trail until you feel ready to turn around… or until you get to Basar!
arbaejarfoss
This waterfall is a little more off the beaten path— like the parking lot only holds 4-5 cars. It’s a rather chill stop, but so peacefully beautiful! We plopped down on the grass, shared a snack, and enjoyed this little slice of nature without much else going on around us. Nothing too crazy but a perfect lovely moment to share— a perfect spot to relax and reflect on some of your favorite places you’ve been and the couple days left to go.
Ölverk Pizza & Brewery
After a week on the road, a hot meal you don’t have to cook yourself might be just what you need. With indoor and outdoor seating options, the ambiance was very relaxed, and the pizza was delicious! Salvador enjoyed the couple beers he had here as well, so we have nothing but strong recommendations to give. Treat yourself to a little pizza and beer!
Borg campground
Honest reviews only, this was probably the most boring campground we stayed at in regard to views and natural beauty, but it’s conveniently located— especially since we figured driving a little extra today means less driving tomorrow. The bathroom and shower situation was solid, and there was a nice spot to clean up dishes, so no complaints here! Really though, anywhere you stay after Pakgil will kiiiinda be a relative disappointment.
DAY 8
Today’s the day for some Golden Circle Highlights. The Golden Circle is an area of sights, not far from Reykjavik, that tends to be easy to access by car or tour group. Close enough to hit up on a day trip excursion. The proximity to Reykjavik means that it that tends to get a little more touristy and crowded but not overwhelmingly so.
Drive time: about 2.5 hours
GullFoss
This will be the last big time waterfall on the itinerary, so take her in, in all her grandeur! It’s a short walk from the parking lot, down a flight of stairs to the prime viewing area. There’s actually enough of a path that you can wander down and see Gullfoss from a few different vantage points. You’ll want to have your rain jacket to brave the spray… and leave behind any accessories that might blow away easily.
Geysir Geothermal
Have you ever seen a geyser before? If not, here’s your chance! The Geysir Geothermal area is actually home to a few geysers, but most of them stay pretty dormant. Strokkur is the exception, with eruptions occurring every few minutes. It’s such a wild experience to watch the ground bubble up and then turbulently erupt!
Thingvellir National Park
Onto the last Icelandic National Park: Thingvellir! This UNESCO World Heritage Site has both geographic and historical significance, earning it the prestigious designation.
The Silfra Fissure runs through Thingvellir National Park, and tour guide services, like Arctic Adventures, will suit you up and guide you through this underwater world of mystery. The water is exceptionally clear with visibility over 100 meters. The Silfra Fissure is aptly named as it is the space between Eurasian and North American tectonic plates. This makes Silfra one of the only places in the world where you can go snorkeling along a continental rift!
We had heard from friends that this is a must-do adventure; however, for us, this snorkeling trip was unfortunately a casualty of the itinerary tweaks we made after Salvador had surgery. Believe it or not, submerging a healing incision and kicking around for an hour is highly discouraged 2 weeks out from an Achilles tendon repair. We’re already excited to dive in whenever we return!
Once you’re all dried off, take those legs for a nice, easy hike to Öxarárfoss. There’s a couple different parking lots to choose from, which will affect how far you hike, but generally speaking, it’s a pretty flat hike that takes you to a lovely waterfall. Don’t be a waterfall snob after all the grandeur you’ve seen thus far! It may not be the largest or most powerful fall of the trip, but this waterfall makes for a lovely perch to take in the unique topography and geography in this region of the country.
Where to go next
We worked our way through the sights, sounds, and smells of Thingvellir National Park a little faster than we’d planned (perhaps because we were unable to go snorkeling :/ ). We felt like we’d sufficiently explored after a few hours, but not everyone might feel the same! There’s certainly more to see if you’re interested in some of the historical heritage aspects that earned it its UNESCO World Heritage designation. This is a total dealer’s choice opportunity. If you’re keen to see more of the historical roots in the park, spent the night in the Thingvellir campground! This was our original plan, but we decided to pivot and spend the evening near Reykjavik instead.
The essentials: ice cream & beer
While tomorrow will be a more thorough perusal of Reykjavik, tonight you can snag some well-earned treats. That’s right, during our time in Iceland I was doing the Lord’s work sampling all kinds of different chocolates, and I can say with confidence that OmNom makes the most amazingly tasty chocolate treats. You don’t have to swing by their shop to purchase one as they are available in grocery stores nationwide, BUT if you go to their store in Reykjavik, you can also sample some of their ice cream which was QUITE delish.
RVK Brewing Co. is another local treat-yo-self spot if you’re looking to enjoy an ice cold beer. It’s actually a little trickier to find than you’d expect (walk down the hill from the film stores), BUT they have a new taproom under construction, so hopefully that will make it an easier find for any future beer connoisseurs. Totally, totally worth making the effort to go check it out if you fancy craft beer.
Vogar Campground
Last night in the van!! While we originally thought we’d spend the night in Thingvellir National Park, it ended up being rather nice to snag a campsite along the water here. I mean, look at that sunset!!
The other bonus is that Vogar is only 10 minutes away from our rental company, Happy Campers. When we got up on day 9, re-packing our stuff, clearing our all the trash/recycling, and stopping to top off the gas tank weren’t the most time consuming processes ever but it did take longer than we initially expected. It was nice to know we didn’t have much of a drive to make it back to base camp.
DAY 9
You made it all the way around Ring Road! After a week of camp meals, the agenda for today is snacking your way through the city. That’s right, today is all about exploring Reykjavik.
Depending on when your van is due back, you can either drop off your van and catch a shuttle into Reykjavik or just drive that van into the city. The latter would certainly be the easier option, but we’ve laid out all the ways you can get yourself into the city for some Reykjavik sauntering around.
Drive time: depends on where you’re staying the night— it’s no more than 1.5 hours round trip from Keflavik to Reykjavik and back.
getting to Reykjavik
Once your van is returned, the question becomes… how does one get around? Uber, Lyft, Bolt, etc do not run here, and taxis are expensive. We’re talking ~$125 for a one way trip from Keflavik to Reykjavik. This will be the least cost effective but most time efficient way to make the journey. We returned out van early in the day, so we spent a little extra time to save some dollars.
Before returning our van, we dropped our bags off at our hotel because they very graciously agreed to hold them for us. We then returned the van and took Happy Camper’s free shuttle to the airport. From the airport, we hopped on the FlyBus shuttle that goes directly from the airport to a bus stop only a 5-10 minute walk from the general center of town. The FlyBus airport transfer still costs $30/person, so when comparing to a taxi, you save about $60… the more people you have in your party, you might just be better off taking a taxi!
On the way back we just rode a public transportation bus, which took a little bit longer, but was rather comfortable. At this point in the day Salvador’s ankle was aching so we didn’t really mind the longer journey. The bus stayed empty enough Salvador could keep his leg propped up, so we were big chillin’ just scrolling through the 177378498 pictures on our camera roll. Getting from Reykjavik back to our hotel took about an hour and fifteen minutes (~30 minutes longer than a taxi) and cost $17/person.
wandering around Reykjavik
Our plan for Reykjavik was to more or less wander around and just take in the city. We’re big fans of eating our way through a new place, and Reykjavik did not disappoint. By the time we got to town, I was I-want-food-right-now hungry, so we took a chance on 101 Reykjavik Street Food. This restaurant along the rainbow road keeps a pretty simple but delicious menu— comprised mostly of soups. We both snarfed down our lunch… plus the owner also brought us out a complimentary hot chocolate and a couple dessert to sample.
We headed to Kofinn next so Salvador could further sample the local craft beer scene. Turnabout is fair play, so after we finished there, we went to Saeta Husid for some rolled ice cream. I’d actually never tried ice cream quite this way before, but it was rather delectable. This is a pretty popular area, so there’s loads of fun shops and store to wander through as you walk around.
If you’re looking to grab another drink somewhere, head to Kaldi Bar! Not only were the beers deliciously refreshing, but the pub had quite the cozy ambiance as well. If you consider yourself a fearless eater, consider sampling the fermented shark at Cafe Loki. If this sounds terrible, that’s because it is!!!! It’s undigestible in its original form, so to become digestible, the shark must be fermented for 6 months. Salvador sampled some, but I didn’t feel so inclined.
Hallgrímskirkja is hard to miss as this eye-catching church is the tallest in the country. The organ-pipe-esque appearance is said to be designed in resemblance of the basalt columns found around the country. Hallgrímskirkja isn’t far from the center of Reykjavik, so this magnificent church won’t be hard to find!
Hotel Duus
Hotel Duus was perfectly situated close to the airport but also right along the harbor, so we ended the trip with an amazing bed and a marvelous view. An added bonus, Antons Mamma Mia is an above-averagely tasty spot just walking distance down the road. Good eats AND good sleeps… that’s what it’s all about. Especially by the end of the trip!
Their website isn’t the worst, but it’s also not the best ever… don’t let this dissuade you! When you’re looking to book a hotel near the airport do not just assume they will have a free airport shuttle. This doesn’t seem like a huge deal, but taxis are actually pretty spendy, even for short trips. Hotel Duus having the airport transfer included is a really nice perk.
DAY 10
After nine days of chock-a-block full days, the last day of the trip only has one stop: Blue Lagoon! Hands down the most infamous of all the hot springs in Iceland, the Blue Lagoon makes for a perfect relaxation station.
Drive time: no driving! just catching a taxi 🙂
BLUE LAGOON
Visiting Blue Lagoon is an activity best planned in advance. Due to its popularity, it’s highly recommended to purchase your tickets as soon as you cement your plans. Your ticket is for a specific window of time on a given day. Days and times will sell out— especially in the summer, so look early to ensure you have top pick!
When visiting for the day, you have a couple options for your day’s experience. The pricing for each of these levels of is dynamic and can fluctuate slightly across days of the week. You’ll also find that some times of day are more expensive than others. Generally speaking ‘premium’ will be slightly more expensive than ‘comfort’, with the ‘luxury’ being a more size-able jump in price. Family activities can add up quickly, but at Blue Lagoon children 13 and under enjoy free admission. The saved pennies can go towards all the snacks little people eat!
COMFORT
PREMIUM
LUXURY
Includes: – Entrance to the Blue Lagoon – Silica mud mask – Use of a towel – 1st drink of your choice
Includes: – Entrance to the Blue Lagoon – Silica mud mask + two additional masks of your choice – Use of a towel – 1st drink of your choice – Use of bathrobe – 1 glass of sparkling wine if dining at Lava restaurant
Includes: – Five luxurious hours at the Retreat Spa – Includes a private changing suite – Unlimited access to both the Retreat Lagoon and the Blue Lagoon (and all the extra luxe amenities in the Retreat center)
example of the dynamic pricing
Replenishing the energy stores
You really can spend all day here… some morning relaxation followed by a delicious lunch and then back into the hot springs you go. Where to eat? You won’t find a food court here, that’s for sure. There’s a cafe with both dining-in and take-away options as well as three restaurants— all serving fresh, locally sourced ingredients and unforgettable views. While the food is bound to be good wherever you end up, they do have a Michelin-starred establishment, heralded for its gourmet revelations. This is a recent accomplishment as the Moss Restaurant just received their Michelin-star in 2023! It’s easy to make a reservation online when you book your admission ticket.
Take off
At the end of the day, it’s time to pack up and head home… all the way back home! Blue Lagoon is only ~20 minutes away from the airport, so it’s beyond easy to store your bags while you’re relaxing, shower off, and then jetset off for home. It’s always amazing just how quickly ten days flies by!
We were quite the unlucky pair for Blue Lagooning— one pregnant belly and one fresh ankle surgery/incision meant we had to skip this bucket list attraction; however, we already know we’ll be back one day to enjoy all the mud masks and steamy warmth.
So long, farewell
Iceland is beyond magnificent with its cornucopia of astounding natural beauty. To compare it to other places we’ve been, we found Iceland to be a rather unexpected combination of Hawaii meets Alaska?? Strangely enough. But anyways, we loved our ten day ring road adventure, and we wish you all the most exhilarating explorations as you venture out.
Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Portugal is a beautiful, historic country to visit, with its biggest cities situated along picturesque waterways. The Algarve best exemplifies this with its dramatic cliffs and world-class beaches. Spending a few days exploring the dazzling southern Portugal coastline goes by in the blink of an eye… mostly because you’re not visiting just one city but many. With so many gorgeous landscapes, you’re going to have trouble picking a favorite! Savor all the most memorable highlights of the Algarve coast, with its sandstone cliffs, dreamy sunsets, and unforgettable beaches. Our comprehensive four-day itinerary will ensure you see all the most amazing, breathtaking views.
When you’re planning a trip it’s often difficult to discern how much time to spend in a given area. Is four days enough in the Algarve? Can you squeeze in the highlights in less time? While it would be easy to extend your stay, four days is enough to see the highlights and do some thorough wandering around. Inversely, any less than is really too little time to hit all the big highlights. Four days is the perfect amount of time to visit the most outstanding areas and get a feel for the region’s character.
Having experienced a couple all-too-short layovers in Portugal, we recently decided it was time to go all in on an exploration extravaganza. We just finished a ten-day city-hopping adventure, and we’re already dying to go back! Growing up in South Florida, we’ve spent our fair share of time on the beach, but the beaches along the Algarve coastline are truly some of the most beautiful in the world.
Sometimes setting out, getting a little lost, and taking in small unexpected wonders can be the most amazingly memorable experience. If you’re keen to make the most of your time in the Algarve, we have an outstanding, action packed itinerary for you. Below we’ve detailed our favorite beaches, — plus all the tips and tricks to ensure you make the most of your time.
When to Visit
But first when to visit?! Time of year can make or break your experience, but everyone is different! Do crowds stress you out? Can you spend the day out wandering around in the middle of summer? Are you keen to avoid the rainy season? What’s important to you will help dictate your perfect time of year…. or perhaps it’s just about getting away from work whenever they can spare you!
Summer
The Algarve is a delight year-round, but some times of year are certainly better for visiting than others. Portugal will feel rather summery from June to mid-September, with July and August being the hottest months. This also happens to be the high season in Portugal, where you’ll find the highest concentration of tourists and prices will tend to be higher during this time as well. Super lovely as everything is open, the chances of rain are about as low as it gets, and everything is green and lively. The cons of summer visits are the high volume of fellow travelers and the heat may be a bit oppressive to any more northern-based visitors.
As a note: we were here mid-July and didn’t find the warm weather to be too bad; however, we’ve grown up with the hot and humid heat of summer in southwest Florida!
Winter
In the Algarve the wintery months of December, January, and February tend to not only be colder but rainer as well. There’s beauty to be found in every season, but if you visit in the winter, you’ll want to make sure you bring some layers…. and a rain jacket! You’ll love being able to explore without nearly as many people.
The cons of a winter visit pertain mostly to the weather and some of the spots that may be closed in the off-season. That being said, everyone has a different idea of what’s cold… doesn’t get snow, so anyone used to a biting winter may find a Portuguese winter to be a nice reprieve! Think highs in the 60’s and lows in the 40’s.
Spring & Fall
What does that leave? The shoulder seasons… arguably the best time to visit! If you can visit late April into May, it affords you the opportunity to enjoy all the sights of the Algarve— plus there’s less crowds to maneuver. Similarly, late September and into October will allow you to still explore before the weather turns chilly again, and the stifling crowds of the summer have started to thin out yet again. Plus, airfare over the summer can become astonishingly expensive, so booking outside of peak travel times can keep a little extra money in your pocket as well!
Transportation Station
While a car is not necessary for exploring much of Portugal, it really does help streamline your time efficiency when trying to explore the south coast. Areas like Porto and Lisbon are more compact, making it easy to walk pretty much everywhere you need to go, with loads of bus and trains available to facilitate adventures (or rescue tired feet) as necessary.
Inversely, the Algarve is a region, with dozens of small towns nestled into the coastline. As such, the easiest and most time-efficient way to get where you need to go will be renting a car. We used Enterprise (out of the Faro Airport), and we loved our zippy little hybrid (but read below for sketchy rental car company practices)! It was perfect for exploring all the nooks and crannies of this ruggedly beautiful coast.
Just a reminder, when you leave the USA, oftentimes the cheapest cars to rent will have manual transmission, so ensure you know how to drive the car you’re booking before making any final selections!
you can never be too careful
While we did love the car we rented and can confidently report it performed well for us, we were extremely underwhelmed with the customer service. Enterprise, Alamo, and National were all rented through Guerin, a local company. We declined insurance coverage through Guerin as my booking credit card includes rental car coverage.
When we were picking the car up, I took a video of the car as it had some very mild damage that I didn’t want us to be later charged for. I was SO GLAD I did because when we went to return the car, they told me that we’d damaged two wheel wells and had gotten a small, cosmetic, knick in the tire wall. If I didn’t have my own video of the car, we would have had to submit a claim for damage we didn’t incur. ALWAYS take pictures or videos of your rental cars!!!
Where to Stay
There’s a handful of bigger cities along the southern coast, like Faro, Albufeira, or Lagos that will have a plethora of options to chose from. Any of these spots would be lovely to base out of, but the more bustling locales tend to be a little more touristy.
There’s nothing inherently wrong with that, but we if we were to make a recommendation, we’d actually recommend hunkering down in Portimao, Ferragudo, Carvoeiro. Why? The central location is perfect— close to amazing beaching, stellar hikes, and the iconic Benagil Cave. Plus, it’s a little less overwhelmingly touristy here!
We stayed at this Airbnb and loved that it was rather removed from any chaos and the little family vineyard was so peaceful and relaxing.
DAY ONE
Fargo is the most common city to arrive into, with both a train station as well as the Faro International Airport shepherding lucky visitors to the cerulean blues and jaw dropping cliffs that await. Faro itself is a charming town, but with limited time, we recommend spending half the day here before heading west.
Ponto Smokehouse is this little hole-in-the-wall pulled pork spot just steps away from the Faro Train Station. Definitely nothing fancy, but the fresh baked buns and delicious smoked pork are such a fast, yummy, and well-priced bite. If you happen to arrive on a late morning/early afternoon train, it’s so worth stopping in for a bite!!
Salty Experiences
Nothing makes you feel wide awake quite like surfing. Are you down to shred the gnar? Hang ten? Salty Experiences offers group and private surfing lessons to help dip your toe into the pool of possibilities. If surfing is a little more splashing around than you’re keen on, they also have canoeing and stand-up-paddleboarding adventures available as well!
Honestly, no need to splurge for a private lesson— you kinda just get taken out with the class, so just sign up for the group surf lesson! They do an awesome job helping everyone get up, offering advice specific to each person’s skill level, and ensuring it was a great experience for everyone.
You take a boat ride out to the surf spot to kinda pull away from the main area of the beach and get to a locale with a bit more wave action. This also means we definitely left our phones behind so we could dive in without concern for any waterlogged electronics. That being said, the image of Dana, with a big ‘ole smile on her face, riding the whitewash waves into the beach, will forever make me smile!!
Drive West
Ferragudo, Carvoeiro, or Portimão are the perfect middle ground to base out of for all of the Algarve wandering to be had. From Faro to Ferragudo, it’s less than an hour’s drive, so once you’re all rinsed off, it’s time to hit the road. When you roll in town, drop off your bags, grab your towel, and get ready to explore some beach vistas.
Life’s a Beach
There are so many beautiful beaches and so little time! Cheers to your camera roll being chock-a-block full of all the dreamiest beach photos you’re going to stare at for months to come! Whether you’re looking to beach-hop or pick one and stay ‘til sunset, you’re headed across the Arade River, to the lovely town of Portimão. There’s a handful of key, must-see spots to check out here.
Praia da Rocha
A rather long beach, this is the perfect locale if you’re looking to stretch your legs out and go on a relaxing beach walk. Another plus, this beach has lifeguards, which can be especially nice for any nervous swimmers or families with kids. It’s hard to pick a favorite beach along the Algarve because there are just so many beautiful vistas.
Praia dos Três Irmãos
This beach is easy to access with a sloping boardwalk guiding you down to the beautiful beach. Once you’re there, you can dip your toes in the refreshing water, and— if the tides allow– there’s also loads of little coves to explore, which add to the adventure of this sandy spectacle.
Praia da Prainha
The staircase down to the beach may feel never-ending, but the beach and beautifully eroded coast are truly unbelievable. It feels like a fun adventure to walk around the cliffs and find secluded spots. While you’re hard-pressed to find a bad sunset spot along the Algarve, Praia da Prainha makes for a gorgeous spot to end the day. We recommend making the trek back up the stairs to enjoy the sunset from above, but it’s truly beautiful from any vantage point along the coast.
Rest up! Tomorrow is an action-packed day, with lots of hiking, kayaking, and cave exploration, so make sure to tuck in early, so you can hit the ground running in the morning!
DAYTWO
The early bird gets the worm…. but also the Benagil Cave to themselves! From morning paddling to picturesque beachside relaxation to dreamy evening sunsets, your second day exploring the Algarve coastline will be hard to beat.
Benagil Cave Kayak
You may be thinking… why kayak to the cave instead of taking a boat ride… where you don’t have to work at all?? The sweat equity goes a long way, because it means you get to actually hang out and wander around in the algarve. The powerboats will come into the cave, but they don’t dock on the beach— that privilege is reserved for the kayakers!
There’s loads of different companies that offer tours out to the cave, but Secret Algarve offers a 7:00am excursion, which we highly recommend!!! I know it sounds early, but this is one of the most popular attractions in South Portugal, so if you fancy the idea of having the space a bit more to yourself, it will be worth setting your alarm clock.
BEACH
Praia de Benagil is the beach you’ll launch out of for your kayak journey, but once you’re done paddling, we actually recommend relocating to a Praia de Carvoeiro. Praia de Benagil is lovely but just get a little hectic with everyone coming and going.
Not far down the road, Praia de Carvoeiro is a small but charming beach that makes for a beautiful place to lay out and relax. I honestly don’t think I would every get tired of looking out at the sandstone cliffs and the sparkling blue water. This makes for a perfect spot to camp out for the day. Even in the summer, the water remains refreshingly cold, so overheating won’t be a problem. While the beach itself isn’t terribly conducive to a long walk on the beach, you can wander along the boardwalk to catch a birds eye view of the beach— or follow all the way to Algar Seco to explore this unique rock formation.
Lagos
The drive to Lagos is only 35 minutes or so, which makes for a pretty easy ride. Lagos is ripe with ethereal sunset locales, but we have the perfect sunset experience locked down. Be sure to arrive at the Dona Ana Beach parking lot at least an hour before the sunset, because you’ll be walking your way to Ponta da Piedade via a gorgeous boardwalk.
While there is a more direct route there, the boardwalk is filled with loads of little viewpoints and access to different beaches, such a Praia do Camilo. I’m not sure I’d ever get tired of looking out at each uniquely amazing sandy paradise. The boardwalk continues to wrap its was west, so really, find whatever spot you like best and wait for the sun to sink away.
Pro tip— you are up on cliffs, so the sun sets a bit sooner up here as it will slip behind the elevated cliffs before it sets into the horizon. Just a reminder that this is not a spot you’d want to be cutting it close for the sunset…. you just might miss it!
DAY THREE
Rise and shine… again! While there’s no real rush to get up and out the door, this morning’s hiking adventure is rather popular, so it’s always nice to get out ahead of the crowds– especially if you’re visiting in the high season. Another bonus of getting out early? Summer days can get rather warm, so an early start means hiking in a bit cooler temperatures.
Seven Hanging Valleys
So where are you headed? Praia da Marinha is a beautiful beach, but it also serves as a trailhead for the Seven Hanging Valleys hike. This amazing hike meanders along the coastline, affording unparalleled views of the staggering cliffs and the crashing waves of the ocean below.
The hike takes around 2.5 hours to complete and clocked in around 4 miles— and that’s just going one way! To be fair, we walked out to just about every outlook and also stopped to take more than our fair share of pictures, so it’s certainly possible to knock it out at a faster clip. If you do this as an out and back hike will be about 8 miles total if you plan to trek back to your car. We ended up just catching an uber back to our car, to save energy for the rest of the day.
Praia do Vale de Centeanes is on the west-end of the hike, so if you feel the need to rest coming on immediately, you can always just relax beach-side there and then either hike or uber back to your car! The beauty of this trail? Since it’s an out and back hike, you can start at either end!
There was a bit more we wanted to explore near Marinha, so that’s where we decided to base out of, but you can start wherever makes the most sense for you! Also worth noting, Marinha has a bigger parking lot.
Pro tip: If you’re visiting in the summer, the parking lot will fill up. To ensure you’ll be able to secure a spot, we recommend arriving by 9am. When we were leaving around noon, there was a literal honking and yelling ordeal going on over who would get out spot as we were driving away!!
Albufeira
Rinse off, pack your bags, and get ready to hit the road for Albufeira. While a bit touristy, this alluring beachside city is certainly worth making a day-trip for. You’ll get to enjoy a whole new set of views and beach-town charm. Albufeira isn’t huuuge, but there are some top spots you’ll want to make sure you check out.
First stop? The Albufeira Old Town Square! This eclectic hub is home to street performers, shops, musicians, a small art museum, and loads of tasty restaurants. The cobblestone, tiles walls, and blossoming flowers made for quite the vibrant promenade.
Next, wander on over to the nearby Miradouro Pau da Bandeira. This overlook is perched above Albufeira’s Praia dos Pescadores (pictured below), and makes for a dazzling view of both the town and the beach itself. Even more unique, there’s an outdoor escalator that will take you from the viewpoint down to the beach. While there certainly aren’t commonplace throughout Portugal, we saw a handful of them during our explorations and can confirm they were quite lovely to have when it’s time to start climbing back uphill.
After a morning of hiking and wandering around, you might be feeling like you’re ready for a nap. Praia dos Pescadores makes for a lovely spot to stretch out… or go run wild in the blow-up obstacle coarse just off shore. If you’re looking for something a bit more removed, Praia dos Arrifes is only fifteen minutes west, and is another marvelous beach option. They both will have bathrooms and dining options nearby, which is clutch.
DAY FOUR
beach bum at Praia da Mesquita
Nothing hits the spot quite like laying out and taking a nap on the beach. And lucky for you, you have a few options for beaches to rest at. After a couple of rather active mornings, the name of the game today is finding a relaxation station.
Praia da Marinha will be the easiest to access as this is the same beach parking lot yesterday’s hike started from. This beach is the perfect picturesque spot to drift off into a well-deserved little cat nap.
If you arrive at the beach before 9am, you’ll more or less have it to yourself for a bit, but as the day rolls on, more beachgoers will start to arrive. If you keep heading west and the tides are cooperating to let you climb over a few rocks, you’ll find Praia da Mesquita! In the summer months you’ll be hard-pressed to get any nooks or crannies of the coastline to yourself, but this area might just be a bit more secluded than Praia da Marinha.
So Long, Farewell
From Ferragudo back to Faro it’s about a 45 minute drive, so ensure you leave enough time to drop your bags, return a rental car, etc. as necessary. We arrived via train and left by plane, and we can attest that both the train station and the airport are pretty easy to navigate– even without being fluent in Portuguese.
The Algarve offers scenic coastlines, amazing views, delicious food, and outstanding hikes. Four days here will fly by! Where are you headed next? Will your travels take you to Lisbon, Portugal’s capital city (check out our Lisbon blog post here)? Or perhaps go take in the gorgeous northern wine country in Porto (click here for a perfect three day Porto itinerary)?? It’s amazing how each region embodies the Portuguese landscape and culture in a different way. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Portugal is a beautiful, historic country to visit, with its biggest cities situated along picturesque waterways. Porto is no exception with the Douro River winding its way through its heart and the vast Atlantic Ocean to the west. Porto is known for its impressive bridges, port wine, and remarkable neoclassical architecture. Spending a couple days exploring this city goes by in the blink of an eye! Our comprehensive three-day Porto itinerary will ensure you see all the most memorable spots.
When you’re planning a trip it’s often difficult to discern how much time to spend in a given area. Is two days enough in Porto? Would three days be better? Yes…. but also no. Two days is enough to hit the highlights of Porto, and get a feel for the city’s ambiance and charm (which there is loads of).
Despite this, we actually highly recommend staying a third day to head inland and explore Douro Valley. This allows you to see all the rich history of this beautiful coastal town as well as the rolling hills of Portugal’s wine country. But more on that later!
fresh off the plane
Having experienced a couple all-too-short layovers in Portugal, we recently decided it was time to go all in on an exploration extravaganza. We just finished a ten-day city-hopping adventure, and we’re already dying to go back!
While guided tours can be a great way to support the local economy and experience the local perspective, sometimes setting out, getting a little lost, and taking in small unexpected wonders can be its own memorable experience. If you’re keen to make the most of your time in Porto, we have an outstanding, action packed itinerary for you. Below we’ve detailed the best viewpoints (miradouros), historical landmarks, and best spots to grab a bite, as well as some beautifully tiled churches — plus all the tips and tricks to ensure you make the most of your time.
When to Visit
But first, when to visit?! Time of year can make or break your experience, but everyone is different! Do crowds stress you out? Can you spend the day out wandering around in the middle of summer? Are you keen to avoid the rainy season? What’s important to you will help dictate your perfect time of year…. or perhaps it’s just about getting away from work whenever they can spare you!
Summer
Porto is a delight year-round, but some times of year are certainly better for visiting than others. Portugal will feel rather summery from June to mid-September, with July and August being the hottest months. This also happens to be the high season in Portugal, where you’ll find the highest concentration of tourists and prices will tend to be higher during this time as well. Super lovely as everything is open, the chances of rain are about as low as it gets, and everything is green and lively.
The cons of summer visits are the high volume of fellow travelers and the heat may be a bit oppressive to any more northern-based visitors. That being said, we visited mid-July and found the temperature to be quite reasonable, with highs only reaching into the upper 80s. We did ensure all our accommodations had air conditioning though as it would have made for rather warm afternoons and evenings alternatively.
Winter
In Porto the wintery months of December, January, and February tend to not only be colder but rainer as well. There’s beauty to be found in every season, but if you visit in the winter, you’ll want to make sure you bring some layers…. and a rain jacket! You’ll love being able to explore without nearly as many people. The cons of a winter visit pertain mostly to the weather and some of the spots that may be closed in the off-season. That being said, everyone has a different idea of what’s cold… Porto doesn’t really get snow, so anyone used to a biting winter may find a Portuguese winter to be a nice reprieve!
Spring & Fall
What does that leave? The shoulder seasons… arguably the best time to visit! Why? If visit in May, it affords you the opportunity to enjoy all the sights of Porto as the city is blooming— plus there’s less crowds to maneuver. Similarly, late September and into October will allow you to still explore before the weather turns chilly again, and the stifling crowds of the summer have started to thin out yet again. Plus, airfare over the summer can become astonishingly expensive, so booking outside of peak travel times can keep a little extra money in your pocket as well!
Transportation Station
Our opinion: no keys please! While having a car in Portugal can be nice to allow you some flexibility with intra-country travel, it’s really not necessary within the city of Porto. You can get pretty much anywhere you need to go by walking or train travel— even pedestrian bridges to make crossing the river easy peasy. If your feet ever start to tire, they do have ride-share options available, and we found Uber to be very reasonable.
Where to Stay
Everyone’s budget and expectations for travel are varied. What’s most important for your stay? Being right in the heart of the action? Having a room with a view? Relaxing with all the lux amenities? Do you mind climbing a couple flights of stairs? Do you prefer hotels over Airbnbs? Or do you live for the community atmosphere in hostels?
Regardless of what your accommodation vision board is, you will want to book your stay sooner rather than later— especially if you’re traveling in the high season over the summer. Rooms tend to go quickly! Making reservations in advance is especially important for anyone trying to keep their budget low as cheap accommodations tend to book up. That being said, Portugal overall tends to be a more economic European country to visit if you’re looking to stretch your pennies.
I hope your legs are fresh and ready for a full day of walking around and seeing the sights! Porto is a rather hilly city so your sightseeing will also be your workout! For those a little nervous about a day full of walking, Porto has a pretty adept public transit system that’s easy for tourists to navigate.
The following sights and subsequent walking path are organized in a way that creates a loop, so you can really explore the sights and sounds of Porto in whatever order works best for where you’re staying. You can find our walking path map for the day here.
Avenida dos Aliados
Located along Liberdade Square, Avenida dos Aliados is the center of Porto. It’s the main avenue in this north populus, and it honors the Allied countries from World War I in a grandiose manner. Not only is it rich in historic character, but it’s also home to hotels, shops, and cafes. A nice, open first stop to promenade through. If you’re looking for a bit of a breakfast splurge, stop into Cafe Guarany for retro-chic ambiance and a tasty breakfast.
Igreja do Carmo
This picturesque church is most notable for its alluring exterior, covered in vivid blue azulejos. Depending on how you’re rocking with time and how intrigued you are by historic churches, there are options to tour the church and explore the hidden house, gilded interior, and even see the small catacomb within.
Even if you’re not feelin’ the tour, this is a fab spot to just stroll by. The rather iconic exterior makes it a popular photo locale— both to capture the artistic beauty of the church as well as a fun, memorable selfie. The tiles make for a fun backdrop if you’re keen on a photo with some of Portugal’s famed decorative tiles!
Palacio de Cristal
The Jardins do Palácio de Cristal is a bit farther off the walking path loop than some of the other spots, but it’s so worth it! It can be beautiful to take in the sights of a historic city, but there’s something relaxing about being able to enjoy the lush green of the gardens, the beautiful tulip blooms, and the exotic peacocks strolling about. As a bonus you’ll also be treated to lovely views of the Douro River and sweeping rooftop landscapes.
This actually ended up being one of my favorite stops. It was so peaceful to be able to snag a spot in the share, share a gelato, and lookout over the city.
Clerigos Tower
Up next, the Clérigos Church! In case you skipped out on the tour of the Igreja do Carmo, you’ll have your next opportunity at the ornate baroque church. What makes this church definitely worth the price of admission? It houses Torre dos Clérigos, a 75-meter-tall bell tower, with over 200 steps that afford a fabulous, 360° view of Porto.
It does get busy though, so if you’re visiting in the summer, we recommend you purchase tickets in advance for your desired time window to ensure you’re able to go up. If you show up mid-day and they’re sold out of your desired time, there’s still hope! They’re likely to have evening tickets still available, and the Clergios Tower makes for an awesome spot to catch the sunset (see pictures below). A word to the wise? Book the time window 30 minutes before sunset to give yourself time to make it up the stairs and snag a perch along the wall facing the sunset! It does get full up there as the sun goes down.
As a note: while the church and its accompanying tower views are truly breathtaking, there WILL be other options for outstanding views if the thought of being in a narrow, mid-century staircase on a hot summer’s day gives you the heebie jeebies. At the very least, it’s a lovely stop to include in a walk-about of the city.
Palácio da Bolsa
In the Infante D. Henrique Square, you’ll find the Palácio da Bolsa… which at one point was home to the Porto Stock Exchange. The neoclassical building has been a national monument since 1982, and is now the headquarters of Porto’s Commercial Association. Intricate details are prolific throughout the palace but we thought the Arab room was the crown jewel! They offer half hour guided tours (in four languages) to help navigate the gilded building. This is another spot that requires time window tickets during the summer. So, if you’re keen to explore here, make sure you book in advance!
The Palácio da Bolsa is located in the Ribeira neighborhood of Porto, which is known for its charming cobbled streets and lively atmosphere. Take your time exploring all the nooks and crannies in this charismatic neighborhood!
Church of Saint Ildefonso
Completed in 1739, this is yet another beautiful church in Porto. If religious relics are your jam, you will thrive on all the various historic churches, monasteries, and covenants in Portugal; however, if you’re less religious or just not as intrigued by the array of artifacts (the church fatigue can get real), the Church of Saint Ildefonso is still soooo worth stopping by to admire from the outside.
The azulejo tiles that cover the exterior are such a niched art form and very unique to the area. The tiles here depict the life of Saint Ildefonso as well as some relevant biblical scenery. It’s amazing to see how over 11,000 tiles have been weathered and stood the test of time since the early 1930s.
Rua Santa Catarina
Rua Santa Catarina is the epicenter of commerce in the city, with arguably the best assortment of shops, restaurants, and cafes— as well as a handful of charming churches. The pedestrian-only street makes it easy to wander around and lose track of time. The most notable stops along the way?
Capela das Almas (Chapel of Souls) is a quaint church, with loads of charm. It’s covered in azulejos that were painted with scenes from the lives of saints. Eye-catching to look at and a lovely place to snag the perfect adventure girl picture of yourself. Casa do Chocolate not only makes tasty chocolates, but they had the best chocolate gelato I ate during our time in Portugal….. and I sampled more than my fair share of gelato!
Café Majestic will catch your eye with its beguiling curb appeal and a draw-dropping interior. Boasted to be one of the most beautiful cafes in the world, Majestic was restored to its original Belle Époque style, reminiscent of old Parisian cafes. If you’re feeling a little extra posh, this makes for a fun spot to grab a bite.
Dinner Please
A gal can only wander for so long before it’s time for a snack… or perhaps a whole meal. Along our walking path, you’re guaranteed to happen upon loads of different amazing spots, but just in case you’re looking for a little guidance these restaurants are all worth visiting.
Petisqueira Voltaria — a delightful array of tapas as well as the Porto sandwich special: the Francesinha
Chama — trendy dishes brought to you by wood-oven, with locally-sourced ingredients
Muu Steakhouse — an upscale steakhouse, but also a great spot for some tasty seafood as well
Le Monument — a Michelin star fine dining experience with 10- and 14-course dining options
DAY 2
Another action packed day will have you out and about taking in as many sights as daylight will allow– plus some gorgeous views as the sun sets! Not only will today’s jaunt highlight Porto, but you’ll have an opportunity to cross the Douro River and adventure to nearby Gaia as well! You can check out the walking path map for day 2 here!
Mercado do Bolhão
The Mercado do Bolhão is an amazing fresh market with all kinds of goods to peruse. From fresh flowers to fruits and veggies to olives, cheeses, and meats to pastries and wine… everything one might be looking for in a market. The marketplace itself has been recently renovated, so not only are the treats and sweets a delight but the building is open and modern.
Perhaps we were just lucky gals when we were visiting, but our Airbnb hostess left us some Algarve oranges, and they were AMAZING! I purchased more from the Bolhão market on two separate occasions, and then another handful while we were down near Portimão. They were just so incredibly tasty!!!
As a note: some vendors will accept card payments, but we would recommend having some cash (i.e. euros) on hand to ensure you’re able to purchase whatever your heart— or stomach— desires.
São Bento Train Station
You won’t be taking a train anywhere today, but the São Bento Train Station is still worth a stop! Sound a little bananas? This train station not only serves as a point of transit, but it’s also home to an azulejos mural depicting scenes from Portugal history. Getting to experience all different spots around the city with the unique blue and white tiles is a fun way to experience Portuguese history and art all in one!
Porto Cathedral
It wouldn’t be a day out in Porto without at least one cathedral on the agenda! The Porto Cathedral is as intricate as it is majestic, and the craftsmanship of the building will hold appeal to anyone— not just Catholic visitors! It is free to enter but it only costs €3 to explore more— which is totally worth it for some bird’s eye views of the city. The cathedral sits up on a hill, so it has a fab vantage point!
Luis I Bridge
Now if you’re looking to keep leveling up on views with outstanding perspectives, let those walking boots carry you to the Luis I Bridge. This double decker bridge connects Porto to Vila Nova de Gaia, making it easy to meander across the river and keep sauntering. Plus the bridge is extremely pedestrian friendly for anyone ardently exploring by foot. Don’t be mistaken though, this bridge is so much more than just a connection point, it affords the most fantastic views of Porto, Gaia, and the Douro River.
Gaia Riverfront
Also known as Ribeira de Gaia, the riverfront is less of a singular destination and more of a general area to savor. There’s always fun to be had when getting a little lost exploring someplace new. This niche of Portugal is renowned for its port wine, so pack your sommelier cap and squeeze in some tasing. Since we knew we were going on a couple winery tours the following day, we skipped the wine cellar tours, but still meandered down to Churchill’s Lodge for beautiful views and a bit of wine tasting— primarily by Dana of course since I’m pregnant 😉
There’s loads of little vendors selling their wares, and Dana and I couldn’t resist these fun hats (pictured below)!
Teleferico de Gaia
At this point in the day your feet might just be getting a little tired of walking, and lucky for you, there’s an easy and adventurous way to make your way back up toward the bridge. Teleferico de Gaia suspends cable cars along the Gaia riverside, offering a rather unique mode of transportation. While it’s totally possible to make the walk, isn’t it more enticing to fly through the sky taking it all in from above?? By the end of the day, you really will have seen the Douro River from every vantage point. The lower station is near the Cais de Gaia Municipal Market, and it will drop you off at the upper station, adjacent to Jardim do Morro.
Miradouro do teleférico
The Miradouro do teleférico is right next door to the Mosteiro da Serra do Pilar, but you can save yourself the €2, and watch the sunset from Miradouro do teleférico— which is free! There’s loads of little spots (such as this one) to hang out along the river, take in the view, and just enjoy a moment of peace. If you’re looking for a dinner and a show, Esplanada do Teleférico serves up some tasty digs and offers a stunning perspective of the sun as it sets.
Day Three: Douro Valley
It’s time to strike out away from the city! Where to next? Wine country!! Whether you’re a wine savant or considering your first ever vineyard tour, there’s so much to be seen out in the northern Portugal countryside. The rolling views of the countryside and the winding river create a tapestry of vibrant emeralds just waiting to be savored. This UNESCO World Heritage site is a must-visit for your Portugal itinerary.
We used public transportation and our best walking shoes to get around Porto, so we booked a tour to explore Douro Valley. The tour included two winery tours as well as a traditional Rabelo boat ride on the Douro River… plus lunch, historical stops, loads of beautiful photos, and all the fun facts from our tour guide. It really made for a spectacular day!!
Our tour is linked here. We loved having an 8-person cap to the group to keep it less chaotic. It is possible to take the train from Porto to the station in Douro Valley, but the tour made it incredibly convenient and stress-free to get from one place to another. Plus the perspective of our tour guide made it an even more authentic experience.
Porto offers rich character, amazing views, delicious food, and profound history. Three days here will fly by! Where are you headed next? Will your travels take you to Lisbon, Portugal’s capital city (check out our blog post on Lisbon here)? Or perhaps go take in the gorgeous southern coastline in the Algarve?? It’s amazing how each region embodies the Portuguese landscape and culture in a different way. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Lisbon is the perfect spot for visitors looking to experience it all. Not only is it Portugal’s capital, but Lisbon’s also one of the oldest cities in Western Europe, which amplifies to the rich character it exudes. While Lisbon has the bustle of a bigger city, its historic roots and breathtaking coastal views make it a must-visit on any Portugal itinerary. The amazing food and charismatic music will leave you wanting more. We’ve compiled the best two-day Lisbon itinerary to help make the absolute most of your time!
Is two days enough in Lisbon? While it would be easy to extend your stay, two days is enough to see the highlights and do some thorough wandering around. Be sure to pack your most comfortable walking shoes though, because walking around in Lisbon requires tackling some hilly climbs. Honestly if you have a third day to tack on, we’d recommend exploring outside the city a bit— there’s a couple day trips that are simply too amazing to pass up. But more on that later!
Having experienced a couple all-too-short layovers in Lisbon, we recently decided it was time to go all in on a Portugal exploration extravaganza. My sister Dana and I just finished a ten-day city-hopping adventure, and we’re already dying to go back!
While guided tours can be a great way to support the local economy and experience the resident perspective, sometimes setting out, getting a little lost, and taking in small unexpected wonders can be its own memorable experience. If you’re keen to make the most of your time in Lisbon, we have an outstanding, action packed itinerary for you. Below we’ve detailed all the best viewpoints (miradouros), historical landmarks, best spots to grab a bite, as well as beautiful cathedrals and monasteries— and all the tips and tricks to ensure you make the most of your time.
When to Visit
But first, when to visit?! Time of year can make or break your experience, but everyone is different! Do crowds stress you out? Can you spend the day out wandering around in the middle of summer? Are you keen to avoid the rainy season? What’s important to you will help dictate your perfect time of year…. or perhaps it’s just about getting away from work whenever they can spare you!
Summer
Lisbon is a delight year-round, but some times of year are certainly better for visiting than others. Portugal will feel rather summery from June to mid-September, with July and August being the hottest months (but in my opinion , still very tolerable). This also happens to be the high season in Portugal, where you’ll find the highest concentration of tourists and prices will tend to be higher during this time as well. Super lovely as everything is open, the chances of rain are about as low as it gets, and everything is green and lively. The cons of summer visits are the high volume of fellow travelers and the heat may be a bit oppressive to any more northern-based visitors.
Winter
In Lisbon the wintery months of December, January, and February tend to not only be colder but rainier as well. There’s beauty to be found in every season, but if you visit in the winter, you’ll want to make sure you bring some layers…. and a rain jacket! You’ll love being able to explore without nearly as many people and enjoy the festive Christmas market.
The cons of a winter visit pertain mostly to the weather and some of the spots that may be closed in the off-season. That being said, everyone has a different idea of what’s cold… Porto doesn’t really get snow, so anyone used to a biting winter may find a Portuguese winter to be a nice reprieve!
Spring & Fall
What does that leave? The shoulder seasons… arguably the best time to visit! If you can visit late April into May, it affords you the opportunity to enjoy all the sights of Lisbon as the city is blooming— plus there’s less crowds to maneuver.
Similarly, late September and into October will allow you to still explore before the weather turns chilly again, and the stifling crowds of the summer have started to thin out yet again. Plus, airfare over the summer can become astonishingly expensive, so booking outside of peak travel times can keep a little extra money in your pocket as well!
Transportation Station
Our opinion: no keys please! While having a car in Portugal can be nice to allow you some flexibility with intra-country travel, it’s really not necessary within the city of Lisbon. You can get pretty much anywhere you need to go by walking or train travel— plus they do have super affordable ride-share options available if your feet ever start to tire.
Where to Stay
Everyone’s budget and expectations for travel are varied. What’s most important for your stay? Being right in the heart of the action? Having a room with a view? Relaxing with all the lux amenities? Do you mind climbing a couple flights of stairs? Do you prefer hotels over Airbnbs? Or do you live for the community atmosphere in hostels?
Regardless of what your accommodation vision board is, you will want to book your stay sooner rather than later— especially if you’re traveling in the high season over the summer. Rooms tend to go quickly! Making reservations in advance is especially important for anyone trying to keep their budget low as cheap accommodations tend to book up. That being said, Portugal overall tends to be a more economic European country to visit if you’re looking to stretch your pennies.
Budget
LX Hostel — prime location in LX Factory with a fun rooftop bar
Yes! Hostel — prime location just off Rua Augusta, short walk to the Tagus River
Home Lisbon Hostel — prime location in the Baixa neighborhood with a tasty diner
Lumen Hotel — prime location with awesome rooftop pool
Luxe
Memmo Príncipe Real — a polished 5-star hotel nestled into a hill in the Bairro Alto neighborhood
Bairro Alto Hotel — a chic, boutique 5-star hotel in Bairro Alto with a dreamy terrace
Brown’s | Avenue Hotel — a modern 5-star hotel combining comfort, luxury, and cosmopolitan charm
The Lumiares Hotel & Spa — a hip 5-star hotel with colorful, Lisbon-influenced decor and an airy rooftop bar
*hot tip: if a spendy hotel is out of budget, you can always go grab dinner or a drink at a posh spot to enjoy the views and the luxe ambiance for a couple hours
DAY ONE
I hope your legs are fresh and ready for a full day of walking around and seeing the sights! Not only will the step count be high, but Lisbon is a rather hilly city. You won’t be missing any workouts today! For those a little nervous about a day full of walking, Lisbon has a pretty adept public transit system that’s easy for tourists to navigate. Our wandering today keeps us largely in the Alfama neighborhood (walking map here).
National Pantheon
To get things started, the National Pantheon is a must see national monument. The high central dome and overtures of Portuguese Baroque architecture make this church turned tomb yet another eye-catching historical locale. Not only is the dome memorable in design, but it also affords a 360–degree view of the city. We’re all about exploring historic roots AND a good viewpoint. The National Pantheon delivers both in spades!
IGREJA DE Sao Vicente de Fora
The Monastery Sao Vicente de Fora is another significant building in Lisbon, steeped in historic roots and shaped by the passing of time. Its roots date back to 1147 but the reconstruction across centuries left it with a Mannerism façade, reminiscent of late Renaissance architecture. So worth paying €5 to go inside and wander around, but at the very least you have to stop by and see the outside of this gorgeous monastery and pop in the back to see the internal architecture as well (free).
Graça Viewpoint
Also known as ‘Miradouro Sophia de Mello’, this viewpoint might just be the best in the city. You can see so much of Lisbon… from the Castelo de São Jorge to all the apricot rooftops to the Tagus sparkling in the distance and everything in between. While there’s no cost to see the viewpoint, you have to put in a bit of sweat equity as you climb the stairs to get there. If you’re looking to stop and stay a while— maybe sip on a morning coffee— Esplanada de Grace is a lovely cafe right next to the viewpoint that makes for a charming post to relax for a moment.
Lisbon Cathedral
The goal for today is to hunt down all the national monuments in Lisbon— kidding… if only there was the time! The Lisbon Cathedral is the next compilation of historical, architectural, religious and spiritual sentiment on the docket. Inside this illustrious cathedral you will find religious relics and artifacts. If you get excited by digging deeper into religion, you’ll definitely want to take the time to explore the interior of the cathedral.
For others less keen on religious history, it’s certainly worth meandering in to take a peak but further internal exploration can be omitted. The day goes fast, so you might have to pick and choose your investment of time at various stops.
Rua Augusta
Rua Augusta is the main commercial drag in downtown Lisbon, but with some pizazz! Stretching from Rossio Square to the Praca do Comercio, you’ll find fashion, food, performers, and so much more along this stretch. The iconic Rua Augusta Arch is a hard-to-miss ornate stone archway that exists on the Praca do Comercio end of the street. It was built as a symbol of resiliency following the 1755 earthquake, and stands today adorned with historical figures, allegorical figures, and latin inscriptions.
As you’re walking along the Rua Augusta, you have an easy detour option: the Santa Justa Lift. If there’s no wait, we encourage you to hop on board and soar to the top as this particular tourist attraction typically has a 30+ minute wait (in high season). Having the character-rich elevator ride is the ideal choice, but if your legs aren’t too tuckered out yet, you can always climb the stairs up to the same viewing platform the lift stops at.
Praca do Comercio
Once you’ve shopped, snacked, and explored your way along the Rua Augusta, you’ll find yourself in the Praca do Comercio— also known as the Terreiro do Paço— translates to ‘Commerce Plaza’. This area used to house the state department and Supreme Court of Portugal; however, now it’s more museums, culinary treats, and welcome centers than political powerhouse. This bustling square is a melting pot of historic grandeur, niched cafes, and waterfront views.
The plaza opens up to the Tagus River, with a small beach area if you’re looking to cool your jets. It’s more of an ankle wading, playing in the sand, and taking in views of the 25 de Abril Bridge kind of beach than it is a spot to swim, but it’s still refreshing and lovely!
Miradouro de Santa Luzia & Miradouro das Portas do Sol
Miradouro de Santa Luzia and Miradouro das Portas do Sol are two viewpoints only steps away from one another, and both equally worth visiting as they provide slightly different vantage points.
Between the two, Miradouro de Santa Luzia has a prettier terrace, with the blue and white azulejo tiles Portugal is known for; however, the openness of the Portal do Sol terrace makes it a bit better to snag the perfect picture. Right around the corner from Portas do Sol you’ll find a coffee and cocktail bar with a fabulous view— what’s better than a view with a drink in hand?!
Castelo de São Jorge
Last but not least? The mighty Castelo de São Jorge! This national monument has been remodeled and reconstructed over the years, but its origins date back to the Iron Age. At its elevated perch, the castle is visible all throughout the Alfama neighborhood, so getting to see it or rather knowing what it is when you see it, makes it a helpful and beautiful landmark!
Hot take: the iconic Castelo de São Jorge isn’t the most noteworthy spot. From its position overlooking the city, it calls to curious tourists, but we found there’s not loads to see in the castle. The redeeming pearl that makes it worth the price of admission?? A beautiful view of Lisbon! However, there’s other (arguably better) viewpoints that won’t cost you a penny!
Wining & Dining
The self-paced walking expedition is organized to walk you through in a loop that takes an hour to an hour and a half— but that’s before you stop to take in what each spot has to offer. By the time you’ve conquered your daily allotment of stairs and uphill climbs, you just might be ready to head back to your hotel or Airbnb to cool off in the AC and give your feet a rest.
The time of year will dictate how the rest of your evening goes. If you’re visiting in the summer, you have time to grab dinner and a drink somewhere because the sun doesn’t set until almost 9pm. In the winter months, you might want to catch the sunset first and then grab dinner.
Miradouro da Senhora do Monte
Miradouro da Senhora do Monte is arguably the best spot in the city to watch the sunset. You’ll be glad you took a little evening rest because, as with most of the viewpoints in the city, you do have a bit of a climb ahead of you. But man oh man is it worth it!!! Watching the sun set over the city is just the most amazing way to end your first day. This spot will fill up, so it doesn’t hurt to get there 30 minutes before sunset to ensure you can snag a good spot!
L’ape Italian Lounge is the perfect pre-sunset dinner spot as it’s just a short walk from the viewpoint and the caprese bruschetta and lasagna are live-rent-free-in-my-mind amazing.
Free Walking Tours
If you love the idea of a wandering walking tour of the city but are keen to have a guide, check out the free walking tour options! The tours run about three hours so you can listen and learn, but also still have time to do your own exploration. While there is no specific cost associated with the tour, the guides do make money off of tips, so if you go and you enjoy it, be sure to show them a little love.
Tours are an awesome because there’s not much information posted outside theres historic buildings, so if you want to learn more, you need to either head inside and explore or have a guide provide you with the spark notes!
DAY TWO
Today your travels will bring you to the southwestern-most district of Lisbon: Belém! While it’s totally possible to walk the hour and a half there, a tram ride or uber will get you there in about 10-15 minutes, so in order to make the most of your time, we recommend using the automated transportation of your choice to expedite your commute. You’ll still get your steps for the day in as the following itinerary will keep you moving and shaking!
Belém Tower
The iconic Belém Tower stands tall in the waters of the Tagus. Once the ceremonial gateway of Lisbon, this 16th century defense system makes for a perfect way to start your day. Its picturesque architecture is reminiscent of a castle, with a walkway-moat for visitors to cross and explore the interior. Tours inside are options if you’re itching to see more.
Padrão dos Descobrimentos
Padrão dos Descobrimentos translates to Monument of Discoveries, and was built as a celebration of the Portuguese Age of Exploration during the 15th and 16th centuries. This is a bit of an opportunity for a choose-your-own adventure. We just stopped by and looked at the monument from the outside on our way to the Jerónimos Monastery, but tickets to the the exhibition, viewpoint, and educational film are super reasonable if you have time for a bit more wandering.
Jerónimos Monastery
A couple minutes down the road, you’ll find the stately Jerónimos Monastery. The late Portuguese Gothic Manueline architecture makes exploring the inside of the castle a must— worth is just to appreciate the vast and ornate cloister! A word to the wise: arrive early and order your tickets in advance so you don’t waste time waiting in line. Jerónimos Monastery and Belem Tower together are one of five UNESCO World Heritage Sites in Portugal. While it may seem like there’s loads of historic stops on our sight-seeing bucket list, they’re all unique and worth the individual stops.
Pastéis de Belém
Often imitated, never duplicated, Pastéis de Belém has been making pastries since 1837. The original pastel recipe was created in the Jerónimos Monastery, but when the monastery closed in 1833, the pasteis de belem lived on in a small cafe just down the road. This patented egg tart pastry is made by hand every day in Pastéis de Belém— if you like custard delights, you absolutely must stop and sample one of these tasty treats! You’ll see them sold in bakeries all over the country, but this is said to be the original recipe for their inception.
cristo rei
Time for a bit of zig-zagging— across the river that is! Head over to Almada to take in the Cristo Rei (picture above). While I haven’t been to Rio to see Christ Redeemer, Dana was just there a few months ago (pictured below). She can confirm that they are quite different, but still very much worth visiting. Even if you have no interest in the statue of Christ, it’s rather fun to drive across the 25 de Abril Bridge. Even more impressive is the view of Lisbon for the other side of the river!!!
To make the most of your time, we recommend ubering here as well as back across the river when you’re done taking it all in. It will be a little more expensive than you’d expect (we generally found ubers in Portugal to be pretty cheap)— just because there’s a toll to cross the bridge, but overall worth it for the economy of time.
LX Factory
As you arrive back across the river, make your way to the LX Factory. This isn’t a production facility, but more of a factory of experiences. LX Factory houses restaurants, bars, coffee shops, retail, and office spaces, making it a lovely spot to explore small business in the community. There’s loads of fun shops and eateries to check out, as well as Livraria Ler Devagar… a fun bookstore— with floor to ceiling options for you to peruse! The only downside? Most of the books are in Portuguese (as they should be)!
Fado Show
Fado is a folk-style music with multi-cultural origins; however one thing is for certain: it’s a staple in the Lisbon entertainment scene! The overarching artistic themes of love and destiny prevail, but you absolutely must go listen to truly understand. Restaurants called ‘Fado Houses’ serve dinner and employ artists to perform every night. The Fado performances are more than just background music– conversation comes to a halt and the guests savor the cultural experience. Tickets can get a little spendy, but if you love local, live music, this would be a must-do activity!
Lisbon Food:
Food recommendations can be a little tricky as everyone has their own personal taste, and Lisbon has SO MANY options for food. These were all places we tried and loved or spots that were recommended to us!
TimeOut Market — multiple restaurants housed in one building (like an upscale food court)
Lisboa Card
Lisbon offers a “city pass” type card that provides free and reduced price of admission into many of the key tourist attractions. In addition, it also provides one with free use of all metro, trams, buses, lifts, buses, and trains within the general Lisbon area (i.e. will cover your train in and around Lisbon and even out to Sintra but not all the way up to Porto). While a Lisboa cardholder has access to all the free and discounted rates, the card itself comes at a price— which varies depending on how long you plan to use it.
24 hours
48 hours
72 hours
Adults
€21,00
€35,00
€44,00
Children
€13,50
€19,50
€23,00
The Lisboa Card can be purchased here. If you decide this is an option that makes sense for your trip agenda, make the purchase! Moments later, you will receive an email with a voucher redeemable upon arrival in Lisbon at the Lisboa Welcome Center, Foz Palace, or Lisboa Airport for your very own Lisboa Card. Just FYI, these are totally fine to purchase in advance— the card is valid for a full 365 days after its purchase date and is validated upon its first use.
A gentle word of caution would be to look at your plan for the day and decide if you’d truly save money with the Lisboa Card, or if it would actually cost you more. It will provide free entrance into some places but in other places it only offers a 10% discount. Don’t just assume it’s going to get you in everywhere for free! I will say, if you are daunted by the hilly nature of Lisbon and the extent of walking required in this itinerary, you might enjoy the unlimited access to the city transit!
But Wait, There’s More
While two days is enough to pack in the big highlights of Lisbon, we actually recommend staying in the city for at least three days. Why? Lisbon’s surrounding cities have some incredible day trips to explore. From castles to world class surfing, this pocket of Portugal just keeps drawing you in for more! The following cities can be explored individually or as part of a combined touring adventure. We’ve linked a few tours that might be helpful to facilitate your outside-the-big-city exploration.
Sintra
Both whimsical and extravagant, this historic town is home to a UNESCO World Heritage site and so many vibrant castles. You can either take the train to Sintra and explore on your own or visit with a guide service (tour options here). The vibrant Pena Palace alone is worth making the trek for!
Cascais
This Portuguese fishing town turned resort town boasts bustling beaches and historic monuments alike. It’s also a popular surfing spot! You can explore your tour options here.
Nazaré
Known as a fishing town with amazing ocean views and a 17th century baroque church, this town lets you pull away from the crows and enjoy nature’s beauty. Perhaps most illustrious is Praia do Norte, which is famed for its surfing conditions! Check out your tour options here.
Berlenga Islands
A small archipelago about 8 miles off the coast of Peniche, these islands are home to marine life and birds that thrive amongst its cliffs and ocean ecosystem. Berlenga Grande is accessible only by boat, which adds to the thrill of adventure. It also means this area is best explored with a tour guide.
Where to pick largely depends on your overall Portugal itinerary. If you’re only spending time in Lisbon, you might enjoy taking the time to go see the Atlantic coastline. We knew we were going to spend time down on the Algarve coast, so we deferred some of the Lisbon adjacent coast/beach towns in favor of Sintra and all her castles. As such we can say with confidence that it’s an AMAZING way to spend that day, but you really won’t regret any of your choices for exploration!
Lisbon offers rich character, amazing views, delicious food, and profound history. Two or three days here will fly by! Where are you headed next? Will your travels take you to Porto, Portugal’s wine country (check out our Porto blog post here)? Or perhaps go take in the gorgeous southern coastline in the Algarve?? It’s amazing how each region embodies the Portuguese landscape and culture in a different way. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Rocky Mountain National Park is nestled in northern Colorado, just an hour and a half outside of Denver. With miles of scenic drives, countless alpine lakes, and mountains galore, you’re practically guaranteed gorgeous views and unforgettable days. With so much to see, an action-packed itinerary is all but guaranteed! Make sure you pack your sturdiest hiking boots and your favorite trail snacks because there’s so much adventuring to be done.
How much time do you need to explore? Depends on how much time you have! Since the park is relatively short drive from Denver, it’s totally possible to make a day-trip out of it. That being said, if you’re coming from out of town to really explore the park, we recommend at least three days. This will allow you to tackle a couple big hikes and traverse the different regions of the park.
Fast Facts About Rocky Mountain National Park
Size: 265,807 acres
Visitors: 4,434,848 visitors annually (data from 2021)
Highest Elevation: 14,259 feet at Long’s Peek
Camping: there are five campgrounds in the park, which welcomed 110,586 tent campers and 55,326 RV campers in 2022
Hiking: 355 miles of trails in the park
National Park Initiation: Established in 1915 by President Woodrow Wilson
Rocky Mountain is huge and does have a truly beautiful range of landscapes, so three days gives you enough time to explore all the different areas of the park and really appreciate the topography. Regardless of the time of year you visit, you are sure to be blown away and humbled by the magnitude of mother nature in this charming pocket of Colorado.
Getting into the Park: Timed Entry Permits
what is it?
From May 26th through October 22nd Rocky Mountain operates with a timed entry system, to better regulate visitors to the park. The purpose of the timed entry program, is not to limit the overall quantity of visitors into the park, but rather to help spread out everyone’s arrival throughout the day. Systems like this are in place at a handful of different parks to help diffuse traffic and crowding in high season. If you are visiting outside these dates, you won’t have to worry about any entry permits!
Rocky Mountain’s timed entry system has two options: either ‘Park Access’ or ‘Park Access +’. Bear Lake Road hosts a handful of rather popular hikes that increase the traffic to this area. If you are interested in visiting the Bear Lake Corridor, you will need to secure a Park Access Plus reservation, which will grant you access to everywhere in the park. If you’re not terribly keen on the hikes off Bear Lake road, the Park Access reservation will get you anywhere in the park, besides the Bear Lake Corridor.
The ‘Park Access’ permit is required for those arriving between 9am and 2pm. The ‘Park Access +’ pass is required for visitors accessing the park areas after 5am and before 6pm. If you plan to arrive outside of these hours, you will not need to worry about snagging an entry permit.
It’s worth noting, if you’re planning a multi-day trip to Rocky Mountain, you will need a Timed Entry ticket for every day you plan to be there.
how do i get it?
Both the Park Access and Park Access+ Timed Entry Permits are released on a first-come, first-serve basis. You can reserve your timed entry passes online here. The reservations become available according to the following schedule:
Planning a last minute trip and not seeing much available for entry times? Don’t fret! The parks system retains 40% of the available Park Access and Park Access+ timed entry permits to be released first-come, first-serve starting at 5 p.m. the night prior. For example, if I’m hoping to visit the park on June 5th, the remainder of the passes become available on June 4th at 5pm.
Camping
Rocky Mountain has five different campgrounds dispersed throughout the park, and they are POPULAR! There’s an online reservation system in place to help facilitate campsite booking, which is pretty user-friendly. Campsites open up 6 months in advance, and they go fast— especially for holiday weekends throughout the summer.
To help the last-minute-camper, they do a limited release for a handful of campsites, so there’s still hope you might be able to snag a campsite 2 weeks or 1 week out. We’ve also used the app Campflare before to help snag campsites people cancel. You set the campground, campsite type, and dates, and it will notify you immediately if something becomes available. Awesome resource!
Glacier Basin
Glacier Basin campground opens in late May and stays open until mid-September. If you’re planning to do lots of exploring and hiking in the Bear Lake area of the park, this campground will have you perfectly situated for all of your alpine lake and waterfall adventures. You can scope out availability as well as more information here.
Longs Peak
This campground has limited availability for use due to its higher elevation and increased snowfall. It typically opens mid-summer and closes in early fall (dates vary here more than the other campgrounds). You can check here to see if the campground is open yet. It’s worth noting, this is the only first come, first serve campground in the park (i.e. will not be available for online reservation).
If you’re keen to stay near the Long’s Peak trailhead but find the campground still closed, there’s other options! While staying in Estes Park wouldn’t be too lengthy of a drive, the Dao House is only 7 minutes away form the trailhead. This is super convenient if you’re looking to streamline an early morning hike. We stayed at the hostel-part of their lodge, in lieu of camping, but they have “normal” hotel rooms and cabins available as well. We really enjoyed it!
Moraine Park
The Moraine Park Campground is the only campground you’ll find open year-round. That’s right, if you feel like riskin’ it for the biscuit during the winter season, you’ll be able to bunk down in Moraine Park. You can find more information as well as availability here.
Timber Creek
Timber Creek Campground is the only campground on the west side of the park. It’s perfectly situated between the Alpine Visitor Center and Grand Lake, making it a nice spot to base out of for all your west-side exploring. Timber Creek opens in late May and closes up shop in late September. You can check out availability here.
Aspenglen
Just past the Fall River entrance to the park, the Aspenglen Campground opens in late May and hosts eager campers until late September. As you might imagine, this spot provides easy assess to the Fall River area trails. This campsite has the convenience of being close to Estes Park, on the more-popular east side of the park, while being a bit smaller and more secluded than Moraine Park and Glacier Basin. You can find campsite information and availability here.
We tent-camped on site A in the A Loop and loved the little slice of peace and calm (with amazing bathrooms nearby). Definitely recommend!
just so ya know
If you have a camping reservation for Aspenglen, Glacier Basin, or Timber Creek Campgrounds, you do not need an additional timed entry permit to enter the park. A timed entry permit is included with your campground reservation— you will be permitted in the park beginning at 1pm. The Aspenglen and Glacier Basin campgrounds will provide ‘Park Access+’, while those staying at Timber Creek Campground will have ‘Park Access’ (see map above for access location differentiation). If you plan to arrive any earlier than that, you would need to snag a separate, additional entry pass.
If you’re more keen to explore the backcountry, all of those wilderness permit reservations can also be made on recreation.gov here.
Pack Your Sack
An all inclusive packing list is difficult to detail at length as it truly depends on the time of year you’re visiting— as well as what trails you plan to hike. For example when we visited in late May, some trails were dry while others were rather muddy and others yet still had a couple feet of snow. Regardless, there’s a few staples that are nice to have:
A light jacket
Whether it’s cool at the summit or you’re just keen to ensure you stay warm on your snack/view break, you won’t regret bringing a little jacket along.
Trekking pole(s)
I didn’t used to feel like I needed these, but they can be SO CLUTCH when you’re tackling some serious elevation. I personally am more of a one pole gal, but pack whatever you need!
Merino Wool Socks
Merino wool will keep your feet warm when you need it to, but there’s so much more to it than warmth! They are generally a more supportive material to have hugging your foot for hours on end, and if you do find yourself with wet feet, merino wool will still keep you warm, even if you get it wet.
Layers
This is less specific, but generally speaking it’s nice to have a tank top + short sleeve + long sleeve + jacket outfit as opposed to just wearing one thicker shirt or jacket, just because temperatures can fluctuate throughout the hike. It’s nice to be able to adjust accordingly!
Hiking Boots
You’ll see plenty of people risking it all in their trainers, but we really recommend packing your hiking boots or at the very least trail running shoes to ensure you’re properly equipped.
Yak Trax
Even in the summer?! You’d be surprised! The Long’s Peak trailhead is up at over 9,000 feet of elevation, so the snow there will last well into June. The extra grip is a savior when you’re tromping through the snow!
Water Bottle
Water is a must! Get a bladder for your daypack or fill your reusable bottle up to the bring. It’s always better to be carrying a little extra water in your pack than it is to find yourself parched out on the trail. While you’re at it, maybe throw in a Gatorade too!
Snacks
We made multiple-times-a-day trips to the Safeway in Estes Park, so you don’t necessarily need to bring a full meal into the park, but you should definitely plan to bring some snacks along with you on the trail! Everyone’s summit snack of choice is different. We love a little trail mix and protein bar to power us back up, but there’s nothing like a pack of Gushers to reward yourself for a job well done.
Estes Park
Estes Park is the city just outside the east entrances to the national park. It is beyond convenient to have a bustling town nearby. It makes meals and hydration easier to stay on top of— plus there’s plenty of shops nearby if you happen to forget anything. Our only word of warning would be that it can get busy around there… like drive-around-for-30-minutes-trying-to-find-parking busy. There’s some awesome local breweries and restaurants tucked in there, but the local Safeway also makes for a close and easy spot if you’re hungry and need food NOW.
Day 1
The first day in the park can be a lot if you’re arriving from lower elevation. Everyone adapts to the changes in elevation differently, but regardless, it’s never a bad idea to make sure you’re drinking lots of water and paying attention to any symptoms you might be feeling.
The name of the game today is alpine lakes! First stop? Park at the Glacier Gorge Trailhead to hike out to see Alberta Falls & Mills Lake. The falls are just before you hit 1 mile, so it’s a nice way to enjoy beautiful views along the way.
Distance: 5.5 miles round trip
Elevation: 825 feet
Difficulty: Moderate
Up next? The Bear Lake Loop! This short loop makes for a nice easy jaunt with a beautiful view. The ease of the hike makes it popular for visitors of all ages. If you’re feeling a bit nervous about being active at elevation, you could always starts with this nice warm-up before embarking on the Mills Lake loop.
Distance: 0.5 miles round trip
Elevation: 40 feet
Difficulty: easy
You can choose or or you can go see them all! The trail to Nymph Lake, Dream Lake, and Emerald Lake splits off right from the Bear Lake Loop trail, so this makes for an easy add on, if you still feel like you have some hiking left. The milage and elevation progressively increase the farther you go, with Emerald Lake being the farthest down the trail. Beautiful lakes— plus you get to pull away from the crowds on the Bear Lake Loop.
Distance: 1, 2.2, 3.6 miles round trip
Elevation: 225, 425, 605 feet
Difficulty: Easy to moderate
Day 2
Now that you’ve got your feet under you, get ready for an early wake up that will take you for an amazing ride. Parking at the Long’s Peaks trailhead, get ready to tackle the beautiful hike to Chasm Lake. We visited in late May (over memorial day weekend), and we were rathered humbled by the snow still on the trail. Even being prepared with trekking poles and yak trax, the snow just inherently makes things a bit slower going. Even at a slow pace, it was an amazing hike with waterfalls, sweeping vistas, and amazing alpine views.
Picture below is the junction overlooking Peacock Pond, just under a mile out from Chasm Lake. The combination of thick snow and sheer ledge in the remaining portion of the hike had us hesitant to finish the last leg, but it would be such a no brainer in late summer or early fall.
Distance: 8 miles round trip
Elevation: 2,550 feet
Difficulty: hard
If you’re feeling a little tuckered out after a longer hike, the game plan for the rest of the day is far more relaxing. Trail Ridge Road connects the east side of Rocky Mountain National Park to the west, with breathtaking sweeping views and a staggering elevation of over 12,000 feet. If you feel like you still have a little something left in the tank, you can tackle the short (0.6 miles) Alpine Ridge Hike at the Alpine Visitor Center. If you make it all the way to the end of the road, you can also explore Grand Lake!
Day 3
How frisky are you feeling today? A real choose-your-own-adventure situation awaits. If you’re a big time hiker and can crush big hike days back to back, the Sky Pond hike is a must-do. You’ll want to start early, parking at either the Bear Lake or Glacier Gorge Trailhead and get on your way. This is actually more than a hike as there’s a bit of scrambling required towards the end.
Distance: 8.5 miles round trip (from the Glacier Gorge Trailhead)
Elevation: 1,700 feet
Difficulty: Hard
If your legs aren’t quite up for another long hike, but still want to saunter around, the Beaver Mountain Loop will be perfect. This hike explores and overlooks the Fall River area of the park. There’s a couple lookout points that take small detours from the trail and are so worth popping off for. Beautiful vistas from a new vantage point!
Distance: 4.2 miles round trip
Elevation: 850 feet
Difficulty: Moderate
The Sprague Lake Loop really is a hike for anyone with its handicap accessibility and gorgeous sweeping views. Even if your legs are feeling a bit tuckered out from a morning adventure, this easy and relaxing hike is largely paved making it the perfect spot for an evening walk.
Distance: 1 miles round trip
Elevation: 40 feet
Difficulty: easy
Rocky Mountain National Park is an amazing destination for anyone looking to spend some time immersed in nature. It has the unique ability to enthrall the casual visitor, while providing all the thrill adventure-seekers may be looking for. We hope you have an amazing time exploring this gem. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Out in the Gulf of Mexico, with nothing in sight for miles, sits Dry Tortugas National Park. This sparkling 100-square mile park is predominantly open water, with seven small islands included in the protected ecosystem. Boasting amazing snorkeling, unique birdwatching, and a little slice of history, this isolated park is worth the effort! Having been a couple times, we can fill you in on everything you need to know about the remote Dry Tortugas National Park.
Dry Tortugas National Park was one of the first national parks we visited, and we went in a most unusual fashion! Growing up in Florida afforded us the opportunity to learn all kinds of water sports, and sailing was one such sport! Every summer the organization we sailed with would plan a sailing trip from our hometown in Fort Myers down to the Dry Tortugas, and we would spend a week down there before heading back.
The natural beauty here really is amazingly untouched. When we went down, we would live on the sailboat for the duration of our adventure— an adventure girl’s overwater bungalow if you will. It was amazing to peer down into the crystal clear water and see nurse sharks, massive goliath grouper, barracuda, and all kinds of fish just swimming by… every single day. Not only is the water clear, but it’s the most beautiful shade of blue. It’s so peaceful to stare off into the horizon and not be able to distinguish where the sky ends and the water begins.
Fast Facts About Dry Tortugas National Park
Size: 100 square miles
Visitors: 83,817 visitors annually (data from 2021)
Distance from Key West: 68 miles
National Park Initiation: became Fort Jefferson National Monument in January 1935 and graduated to Dry Tortugas National Park on October 26th, 1992
All About Location
Where is this secluded park hiding?? About 70 miles west of Key West you’ll find Garden Key which houses the park headquarters, a visitor center, and a campground… plus some great snorkeling areas! Below we have detailed everything you need to know about getting to the park, things to do once you’re there, and everything that makes this coastal national park unique.
Fort Jefferson
A military fort? On an island in the middle of the Gulf? Yup, you read that right… or at least it was for a while. Fort Jefferson stands as a tremendous but unfinished fortress, making it the largest brick masonry configuration in America, with over 16 million bricks utilized to bring it to life.
Originally scouted as a potential lookout site to suppress piracy in the Caribbean, the fort is located along a busy ship traffic route, so the port served as a harbor for United States ships needing to resupply, refit, or seek refuge during a storm. While the fort was never finished (under construction from 1846-1875) or fully armed, it served as a symbol of protection, for at the time, was a young nation.
The fort was briefly used as a prison for Union deserters during its construction— most notably housing Dr. Samuel Mudd, the physician accused of conspiring with John Wilkes Booth (he was eventually pardoned by President Andrew Johnson in 1869).
Dry Tortugas National Park was established in October 1992 to protect the islands and underwater ecosystems of the Dry Tortugas, to preserve both Fort Jefferson as well as submerged cultural resources nearby (i.e. shipwrecks), and to allow for public access in an organized manner.
Things to pack
Reef safe sunscreen — don’t just pack any old sunscreen… if you plan on doing any snorkeling, be sure to pack a reef safe sunscreen (our favorite reef safe face sunscreens). It’s sometimes a little strange to think of a coral reef as a compilation of living, growing organisms, but the chemicals in some screens can be damaging to the reef systems.
Hat — man oh man can the sun get hot out there, and the sun is strong!! You will never regret packing a sun hat or a baseball cap to protect your head and give you a little extra shade
Water bottle — while water may be provided to you, it’s never a bad idea to bring a water bottle along for the ride. Florida is known for its year-round warm temperatures and its position close to the equator means you might have to be a little more intentional about hydration than you’re used to… even in November!
Change of clothes — not necessary for everyone, but if you’re visiting in the summer you might get a little sweaty and salty after wandering around and snorkeling. Sometimes it’s nice to have a clean, dry outfit to change into for your journey home!
the shady spots are few and far between!!
How to Get There
With the park being accessible exclusively by boat or seaplane, you have to put in a bit of planning to get to Dry Tortugas National Park. With the nearest drive-able location being Key West (check out our Key West blog post here), you’ll get to enjoy the south Florida archipelago before embarking upon the sparkling blues of the national park. Each option has its pros and cons, and the size of the group you’re going with as well as the direction of your overall interests (day trip, camping, etc) will largely dictate what will be best for you.
The best part about a remote part is that you are privy to a two-for-one experience. Not only is this a means of transportation but the ferry ride also takes you on a gorgeous ride through the Gulf of Mexico. Holding 250 people, the ferry isn’t a ‘small group’ experience, but it’s nowhere near as hectic as a cruise ship at port. It’s nice to have a large boat to wander around while you’re cruising. She gets up to a top speed of 30 knots!
Everyone on board receives a complimentary breakfast and lunch, so it’s nice to not have to worry about packing a lunch before your 7am check-in time. The good times keep rolling once you arrive. The cost of the tour includes your admission into the park as well as a fully narrated 45 minute tour of Fort Jefferson. Also super convenient, snorkeling equipment is provided… one less thing to pack is always music to my ears!
Timeline for the day:
Snorkel gear is available to Yankee Freedom sailors upon arrival at Ft Jefferson, and I cannot recommend highly enough how much you MUST give this a try during your day of exploration. Since the Dry Tortugas are protected waters, the marine life is amazing. We’re talking swimming with the biggest lobster you’ve ever seen, colorful coral arrays, and hundreds of curious fishes.
The ferry allows for 5 hours of exploration around the fort and snorkeling. Which is more than enough to get the essence of the Dry Tortugas. The fort sits on a small, 14 acre island, so there is only so much overground exploration to be had on the island itself. If you consider yourself a casual to moderate purveyor of U.S. national parks, this will likely be more than enough time to make you feel you can robustly check Dry Tortugas off your park bucket list.
One Day Isn’t Enough!
For those potentially looking to do a bit more kayaking or camping, the ferry is still an awesome option for you (likely your best option), but you’re going to need to make your plans in advance. The Yankee Freedom transports no more than 10 campers per day to Ft. Jefferson (for a max stay of 3 nights). Interested parties must decide in advance how long they plan to stay, to ensure both their outbound and inbound trips are scheduled. Even more exclusive, no more than three kayaks or small canoes may be transported on any trip, so these spots go fast…. like booking 6 months in advance still might not get you a kayak spot.
If you plan to go camping via the Yankee Freedom, you don’t necessarily have to pack light, but it won’t be a free-for-all. Each camper must be able to contain their gear, food, water, and ice into one storage bin (max capacity 27 gallons), one bag (a < 75L backpack or duffel) and one cooler per person. The combined weight of the storage bin and bag cannot exceed 60 pounds. There is no weight limit for water and ice, but campers must be able to carry and lift their own coolers. It goes without saying, but you must supply your own containers. You can get the full scoop on Yankee Freedom camping information here.
Camping Notes
A packing note: per US Coast guard regulation, no compressed gas (i.e. propane bottles) or liquid fuel are allowed, so you must use self-starting charcoal or Sterno gel if you want to get a flame going. Per Yankee Freedom safety guidelines, no weapons are allowed on board, so any knife blades cannot be more than 2.4 in. length or .5 in. width.
An important cash-money note: for those just visiting for the day, you do NOT need to bring cash for your admission to the park as this is included in the cost of your ferry ticket. However, for those camping, you DO need to bring cash to pay for your campsite ($15 or $30/night) — this goes to the NPS and is not included in your ferry transportation costs as everyone’s length of stay is different.
The primitive campground is just a short walk form the public dock, and it offers 8 individual campsites. Reservations are not required, as campsites are available on a first come, first serve basis. If there happens to be more campers than campsites, there is an overflow camping area. Once a camper arrives, they will be guaranteed a place to camp. If you have any other questions about camping, check out the NPS page here.
the Price is Right
This is the current pricing for adults (age 17-61), but they do offer various discounts for students, seniors, military personnel, and those that already have an annual parks pass. You can see the full rates list here.
$200 pp
$220 pp for campers
$240 pp for camping with kayak (the extra fee includes transportation of a kayak, not the provision of a kayak)
The two-for-one special with a zippy flight to Fort Jefferson is that you get to enjoy a flight-seeing, birds eye view of the park as you make your way there… and then you further get to explore all that Garden Key has to offer! The perk of flying is that it cuts your transportation time in thirds, only taking 40 minutes each way.
If you hear seaplane transportation calling your name, you have a couple options: visiting either a half-day or a full day. Half day options will have either a morning or afternoon departure, while full day excursions only leave in the morning.
The cost of your admission into the park is NOT included in your seaplane adventure experience, so be sure to either pack cash or your national parks annual pass card.
What to know
Besides getting you to Fort Jefferson, with arguably the best view, they also provide bottled water and soft drinks to quench your thirst as well as snorkel gear to help facilitate your island exploration (you are certainly allowed to bring your own snorkel gear if you so chose). For adventurers embarking on a full-day tour they do not provide lunch, but they will have coolers to ensure any lunch you pack will still be tasty by meal time. Be sure to arrive with enough sustenance packed to last through your trip duration.
They cannot and will not carry dive tanks, weights, knives, underwater scooters, flammable liquids, gas stoves, large coolers (or styrofoam coolers), pets of any kind, beach chairs, shade umbrellas, or drones. So be sure to leave all these items behind! Besides, who needs a drone when you’ll be the one up in the sky getting a bird’s eye view?!
The Key West Seaplane Adventures contract with the NPS is only for half day or full-day round trip tours. As such they cannot leave passengers on the island overnight and are not a viable option for adventurers looking to go camping.
Option #3: Private Charter
A private charter is the perfect option for someone that’s looking to do a little bit more and get there according to your own schedule. The 12-hour day trip gives you a full day to explore, meaning you can go fishing, see the fort, hit up a couple snorkeling spots, and still make it back by the end of the day. While there’s a few options to choose from, Good Times Key West and Hillbilly Hookers are both well rated, with similar price points. This option is going to be the spendiest, but it will also provide the most flexibility to create your perfect itinerary.
Things to Do
Self Guided Tour
While there’s no ranger-led tours of the fort, they do have a nice self-guided tour of Fort Jefferson available. It’s super easy to follow the signage, and you can always inquire at the visitor center if there’s anything additional you’re curious about.
Snorkeling
Over 99% of Dry Tortugas National Park is under water, which means you’ve gotta get that snorkel mask on to really appreciate its beauty. The park sits at the southwestern corner of the Florida Keys reef, and the snorkeling here is exactly as amazing as you would expect in an area of protected waters. It’s illegal to spear-fish, lobster, and collect coral or shells within the park, so the marine wildlife are thriving.
The secluded nature of the park, in conjunction with an easterly flowing gulf current means there’s not only a greater plethora of the varied marine life, but the animals themselves tend to be bigger than their counterparts elsewhere in the keys. Even though it’s been years since we’ve been, I recall seeing the largest lobster, just living his life unbothered. It’s beyond special to experience nature in such a personal way.
Visit Loggerhead Lighthouse
Loggerhead Key is about three miles west of Garden Key, and is home to a quaint lighthouse as well as some excellent snorkeling. Day trip adventurers arriving by boat or seaplane are unlikely to have time to visit this dive site, but it is totally doable for those planning to camp (and bring a kayak) or any group planning on a private charter.
The lighthouse has been standing since the mid-1800’s and is certainly fun to go seek out, but the crown jewel of Loggerhead key is the Windjammer wreck. This popular snorkel and dive spot found its resting place on the ocean floor in 1901 and has been integrating itself ito the coastal ecosystem ever since. Before you start paddling out to the wreck, be sure to grab a laminated underwater map from the visitor center to help guide your explorations!
Bird-Watching
Dry Tortugas National Park is a renowned birding destination— especially during the spring migration season. Almost 300 hundred different species of birds have been spotted down in the Dry Tortugas… with the elusive magnificent frigate bird and sooty tern nesting exclusively in the park… you won’t find them nesting anywhere else in the continental United States! Bird watching can be a pretty niched hobby, but park visitors of all interests are likely to be delighted by these little feathered national treasures.
Fishing
The abundant marine life in the Dry Tortugas makes for some gooood fishing. That being said, you have to make sure you’ve crossed your t’s and dotting your i’s before you start casting.
As mentioned above, spearfishing and lobstering are not allowed in the park, so leave your best spears at home. Fishing in the Natural Resource Area is also prohibited. You will want to ensure you have a Florida saltwater fishing license and some “circle” hook (“j” hooks are not permitted). Be sure to pack any gear you might need before you head out, because there is, unsurprisingly, not a bait and tackle shop on Garden Key.
If you still need clarification, you can check out the current rules and regulations here. Sometimes you gotta know when to hold ’em and when to fold ’em… or in this case when to release them back. You can find more catch and release information can be found on the here.
This tends to be an awesome area to catch some tasty snapper and grouper! Best of luck fishing… here’s to hoping the biggest fish you see isn’t the one that got away!
Dry Tortugas National Park holds so many special memories to us, and we hope you have a lovely time taking in all there is to see, do, and learn in this beautiful, remote park. Happy adventuring!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
All aboard! Virgin Voyages’ Fire & Sunset Soirées cruise is a five day, four night Caribbean nautical adventure— the perfect length of time to relax into the luxury, adult-only ambiance and take in the sparkling blues of the ocean. From bar crawling in Key West to spa days on the boat to snorkeling in Bimini, your perfect, dreamy beach vacation awaits.
Growing up in Florida, all five of us sisters learned how to sail in the Caloosahatchee River… much less glamorous than the Caribbean Sea! Over the summer, we’d put our skills to the test, taking a sailing trip from our hometown in Fort Myers down to Dry Tortugas National Park— 70 miles west of Key West (read more about Dry Tortugas National Park here). As such, we’re used to days on the open ocean and life on the boat, but man oh man is the Scarlet Lady an upgrade from SeaQuest (the boat we used to sail down, pictured below).
Whether you’re planning your first cruise or your tenth, we’ll break down the itinerary, the stops, activities to explore on the boat, and most importantly, the scoop on the Beach Club at Bimini.
We’re not always big cruise or multi-day organized tour people as it can sometimes feel limiting to our independent exploration; however, with relaxation high on the priority list, we took a chance on the cruise life and LOVED it! Four nights was the perfect amount of time to enjoy the luxuriousness of the boat without getting cabin fever— the time spent exploring Key West and unwinding at the Beach Club certainly helped!
Living the Good Life
Curious what all is included while you’re cruising around? More than you might think! While cruises can feel like a hefty up-front cost, it’s your accommodations, food, activities, and transportation cost all rolled into one! When you hand over the big bucks, you’re getting your room PLUS:
Food, food, and more food— you read that right, all the delicious culinary options on the boat are available to you at no additional cost… you already paid for it! You can check out all of your 20+ dining options here.
Gratuities! Even though this seems small, this is a cost we usually factor into our trip budget as we always want to make sure to alot and/or pull out cash to tip everyone properly. Virgin Voyages pays everyone on board a livable wage, so they don’t rely on sailor tips. There’s no expectation for gratuities here.
Wifi is complimentary. In this day and age, it would honestly be more surprising if wifi wasn’t available! If you want to unplug on vacation, you certainly can, but if you’re keen to talk or post, you’ll have all the access!
Activities!! From on-board bar crawls and pajama parties to sunrise yoga and outdoor boxing, there’s complementaries activities and events for everyone. While there’s certainly additional services you can purchase (can anyone say massage please), the complimentary activity itinerary stays packed to the gills, so you can stay as involved as you like.
They’ve got you covered for all you can drink “essentials”. This includes drip-coffee, sparkling water, tea, soda, non-pressed juices, etc. While fancier drinks and cocktails may cost ya, they’ve got the basics covered free of charge. Can’t have you getting dehydrated on the beach in the Bahamas!!
A child-free atmosphere— Virgin Voyages operates all their cruises as adult-only, meaning your inner child is welcome to come out to play, but everyone’s favorite tykes will be at home. Virgin Voyages cultivates a rather fun and flirty energy aboard their cruises, so it’s not really a child appropriate atmosphere. A perfect place to cut loose and have fun though!!
Bottoms Up
If alcohol isn’t included, how does that work? This really depends. When you’re signing up for your cruise initially, the may be an option to add a bar package for a “deal” – i.e. $200 for a $300 bar package. Or perhaps if Virgin is running a special, they may offer a $300 bar tab for “free” to incentivize prospective sailors. As such, whenever you order a drink, your bracelet gets scanned. If you have a pre-paid tab, the cost of the drink is subtracted from your tab; if not, the cost of the drink gets charged to your room. The cost of the drink is the same regardless of which payment option you utilize.
Room with a View
Or should I say a room with a Sea Terrace? We rather enjoyed our room, but the best part by far was the lovely terrace and the cozy hammock. Nothing beats peacefully swinging as you watch the ocean float by. While cruise-rooms are notoriously conservative on space, we felt we had enough room and found the rain-shower to be lovely! We would definitely stay in this room again.
The Itinerary
Five days and four nights of sunset soirées and fiery fun. What does that look like? What’s a gal to do? Well, each day has a vague plan made for you, and you get to customize it to your liking from there. We have some suggestions of things we like as well as things we would potentially do differently!
Day 1: Miami
Even though the superyacht departs at 6:00pm, boarding begins at 4:00pm, so everyone can be in prime relaxation mode by the time your sea voyage begins. We found both the embarking and disembarking processes to be very smooth, both as we were departing and returning. As soon as you arrive at the Virgin “Terminal V” someone is taking care of you and ushering you to your next step. There’s a place to drop your bags off, (they will get brought to your room within a few hours), ample space to relax while you wait for your boarding time, and so many friendly faces around to answer any question you might have.
As you make your way on board, someone will graciously direct you where to go, while a DJ mixes some fun and funky tunes to make sure the vibes are right. While there are more than enough complimentary activities to keep you entertained, if you want to book any spa services or anything you couldn’t book/didn’t think to book in advance, you’ll want to do that pretty soon after you get your things sorted, so we recommend either going to do that in person or getting the Virgin Voyages app downloaded to sign up that way.
To get the vacation mood going, a pool party starts right around 5pm, so that everyone is well on their way to a good time by 6pm when the cruise leaves port. Once the sun starts to set, a pajama party ensues, but we will warn you, the saucy vibe Virgin Voyages is known for is very evident in some of their night time programming.
Day 2: Key West
What’s on the agenda for today? Key West, baby! With practically a whole day (8:00am- 5:00pm) set aside to explore, there’s so much to see! Having been to Key West before, we have a whole blog post of our own recommendations for some fun spots to grab a bite, great cocktail spots, and fun things to do for the day! Getting a picture at the southernmost point is a must!
Key West is known for being a colorful place where people come to have a good time, and it certainly delivers. If your ideal vacation involves zero planning on your behalf, Virgin does have various tour options you can be a part of (click here for a complete list of paid shore excursions for Key West).
The friends we were with really wanted to do the Bar Crawl through Virgin, which was fun enough, but if you have a bit of adventurous spirit and don’t mind making a bit of a plan yourself, we recommend striking out on your own to explore some of the nooks and crannies of this small island. Just make sure you make it back to the boat before 5pm!
Just a note: People often mistake Key West for being an open container city, but it is not, so make sure you don’t get too cavalier with your sidewalk sippin’!
Day 3: Sailing at Sea
The third day of the cruise is all about exploring the boat and taking advantage of everything there is to do, because this is the “at sea” day. We woke up and spent the morning in the spa, which I highly recommend! The massages are spendy but sooooo worth it if you’re looking to splurge. Plus, if you purchase any spa treatment, you have access to the thermal spa for a few hours afterwards, and it was beyond relaxing to just bask in the Himalayan sea salt rom.
From there it’s really a choose your own adventure dealio. Still kinda needing some R&R to recover from last night? Take a nap in a hammock. Feeling like you need to move your body? Explore the impressive gym on board or take a fitness class? Looking to make some new friends and keep the party going? Grab a lounger and hang out poolside.
The options continue as the sun sets, because the Scarlet Lady boasts a wide variety of entertainment options. From an arcade room to a casino to an interactive theater experience to an organized bar crawl ending at a nightclub, each sailor really does get to tailor their cruise experience to fit their personality and expectations. We enjoyed their dinner and a multi-act show. It’s really rather interesting to wander around the ship and see all the nuance they’ve put into making different spaces unique!
As it happens, Key West & Bimini aren’t very far apart, so you might look out into the horizon and notice you’re not moving along very quickly. Welp, you won’t be moving at all for a majority of the day. To create the illusion of a “day at sea”, you actually stayed posted up about 100 miles off the coast of Miami, just enjoying the endless blue ocean, before eventually heading to Bimini to dock for the next day.
Favorite Restaurants on Board
The Wake— the spot to go for amazing steak and seafood options
Pink Agave— serves both tasty Mexican cuisine as well as a perfect Mezcal pairing
Test Kitchen— a unique part-cooking-school, part-eatery that makes dining an interactive experience
The Dock House— refreshing, casual-yet-specialty Mediterranean plates
Lick Me Til Ice Cream— when does homemade ice cream ever not hit the spot???
Day 4: Beach Club at Bimini
The fourth day of the cruising adventure, and arguably the most exciting because today is all about Bimini— or more specifically the Beach Club at Bimini! From 8am to 7pm, the club is available exclusively to the Scarlet Lady sailors. There are endless beach chairs and loungers set up, so there’s more than enough room for everyone aboard to spread out and feel comfortable.
Beach games are set out for people to enjoy, a DJ stays spinning, keeping everyone hype, and every 20 minutes or so dancers will perform to keep the party momentum alive. Ordering drinks works exactly the same at the Beach Club as it does on the boat, so just keep scanning that bracelet and having yourself a time.
We were more than content to nap on the shoreline and stare off into the gorgeous hues of blue, but if you are one that has a hard time sitting still, there’s loads of opportunities to explore. If we were to do it all again, we just might go take a jet ski tour, snorkel with stingrays, or perhaps even scuba dive with hammerhead sharks. If you’re feeling intrigued, you can find a complete list of Bimini’s shore excursions here.
Day 5: Miami
All too soon, the final day arrives. The Scarlet Lady will arrive back in Miami by 6:30am, and everyone is transitioned off the boat by 10am. While the crew definitely promotes the having of a good time, the push for a partying vibe in notably less the last night, in an effort to help groggy, partied-out travelers make it off the boat in time.
Final Thoughts
We’ve flow Virgin Atlantic, but we’d never sailed with Virgin Voyages, so we were curious how the nautical expedition would go. We must say Virgin Voyages puts on a pretty comprehensive cruising experience!
Our gripes are few and far between. The countertop space is a bit lacking in the bathroom, but this is easily remedied with a hanging toiletry bag. We also generally felt that the food sat a little heavy, but this is honestly more due to “eating out” for every meal as opposed to a refection of the preparation, because all our meals were truly very tasty!
Would we book another Virgin Voyages Cruise? Definitely! The rooms, dining options, drinks, shows, activities, and Beach Club at Bimini were all amazing! Cheers to your next maritime adventure!
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FGCU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
The largest in the Hawaiian archipelago, the Island of Hawai’i is fondly referred to as Big Island. The moniker is certainly well suited as the breadth of landscape here is unmatched. From snow-covered mountains to black sand beaches to active volcanos to luscious green valleys, there is truly no end to the adventures that await on Big Island. Our perfect four day itinerary includes everything you must see and do to maximize your time.
Each Hawaiian island has its own ambiance or draw. Big Island is unmatched in its sprawling landscape and diverse microbiome. It’s also one of the best places in the world to snorkel with manta rays, which is a surreal experience. Big Island is a perfect destination for anyone looking for both the beautiful coastal scenery Hawaii is known for, as well as endless breathtaking hikes, catching a peek at some molten lava, and watching the sunset from an almost 14,000-foot snowy mountain top.
If you’re headed to Hawaii, it’s common to combine two or three island visits into one trip. With Big Island being as large as it is, we recommend at least four days to sample the island’s robust variety. While you might not see everythinggg, you’ll definitely get to hit the highlights and capture the essence of Big Island.
While you may think of Hawaii as a beachy keen relaxation destination, you will assuredly miss out if you spend your entire trip at the beach… or even worse, the pool. Below we have detailed the perfect itinerary for anyone looking to make the most of their days adventuring around on Big Island.
The Nitty Gitty Before Paradise City
When you’re only spending a few days on Big island, you’ll want to pick one city to base yourself out of. Kona and Hilo are the two biggest cities on the island, but we recommend bunking down in Kona. It’s on the west side of the island and tends to have a sunnier, drier climate.
Remember, Big Island is just that…. rather big, which means in order to see everything, you will want a rental car. In order to hit all the highlights, you will be putting in some time in the car driving around, but all your drives come with breath-taking views, so it won’t feel like a hardship.
DAY ONE
Pololu Valley
On the first day of adventures you’re heading north to explore Pololu Valley. The drive from Kona should take less than an hour and a half, but it will be your first sampling of just how amazing it is to get a little lost in the countryside of Hawaii. As you drive, keep an eye out into the ocean (or perhaps just have your passengers stay on the lookout), because it’s possible to see whales breaching from the road as they migrate to Hawaii’s warm waters from December to March.
The farthest north of the seven valleys etched into the northern coastline, Pololu Valley is immediately gorgeous. Upon arrival, you are greeted with magnificent views of the valley from the lookout point. From there, the trail leads down to a gorgeous black sand beach.
The black sand beach and peaceful creek make this a nice area to relax. The Awini trail previously continued to a lookout over the Honokane Nui Valley, but in the years since our last visit, this trail has closed down. This serves as an important reminder to be a respectful visitor… if the land isn’t preserved and respected, opportunities (and unique hikes) will disappear!
Pro tip: if you’re adverse to a nature-pee, make sure you stop at a gas station or grocery store before you reach Pololu because there are no facilities there. No bathrooms, no place to fill your water bottle… nothing. On a busier day, a business savvy local may be found perched near the lookout with a chest full of ice cold waters, juices, and hard seltzers for sale. That being said, he’s not guaranteed to be there, so I recommend arriving prepared.
Post-Hike Delights
All that hiking works up an appetite, so we suggest making your way to Big Island Brewhaus. Lunch is delicious… we can personally attest to the fish bites, burrito, and BLT being perfect post-hike sustenance. Even if you’re not hungry, their craft beers alone were worth stopping by for!
Tickets to the Alien Ballet
You can’t have a full day of adventures without including some evening exploration! Kona is one of a handful of places in the world where you have the opportunity to observe manta rays as they feed. The experience itself is rather wild. Manta rays feed on plankton, which are attracted to sunlight, or at night, the LED light boards put in the water.
As a front row observer, you are a stationary snorkeler, holding onto a board, watching as the mantas astound. They will perform endless barrel rolls and skim along the board— they might even accidentally bump into you once or twice. It’s truly so unlike anything either you may have seen or experienced before. We highly recommend Hawaiian Adventures– we rather enjoyed being part of a small-group tour. Be sure to pack your GoPro or underwater camera!
Sometimes weather can affect tour safety, so booking an activity earlier in your trip, may help ensure you actually get to go. If something happens day 1, you can always re-organize your days to make another evening work!
As a note, manta rays are not social creatures, so observing them in their natural habitat is not inherently harmful to them. If you’re interested in manta ray conservation, you can check this out.
DAY TWO
The name of the game today is exploring as much of theHawai’i Volcano National Park (HVNP) as you can… because how often in life does one have the opportunity to see a volcano? Departing from Kona, HVNP is an hour and 45 minutes southeast. The drive follows the southern angle of the island, allowing you to play peek-a-boo with the coastline the whole time.
When you arrive, the visitor center should be your first stop. It functions as an excellent starting point to make a game plan, empty your bladder, and lather on the sunscreen. There are interactive maps and park rangers available to help direct you wherever you need to head.
Crater Rim Drive
Next up? Continue along Crater Rim Drive and park near the Kīlauea Iki trail or the Thurston lava tube. These areas are close to one another and easily walkable, so snag a parking spot wherever you can. The lava tube isn’t anything too crazy, but it’s worth checking out just to experience how dark it gets down there— plus it’s wild to think lava once rush through the underground tube you’re standing in.
Across the road from the lava tube is the beginning of the Kīlauea Iki trail, which will lead you down to the floor of the Kīlauea Iki Crater. It doesn’t take long to wind your way down to the crater floor, and from there, the trail is marked with cairns, or small stone piles, to keep visitors on track.
Just putting your walking shoes to work, your next stop will be driving to the Crater Rim Drive trailhead and wandering out to the Keanakākoʻi Overlook. Not only does this perch provide a glimpse at the Keanakākoʻi Crater, but it affords a spectacular view of Kīlauea. Kīlauea is an active volcano that intermittently erupts, most recently in September 2024. While this view would be interesting any time, walking out to this viewpoint is a MUST when Kīlauea is erupting. How many erupting volcanoes are you going to see in one lifetime?!
Chain of Craters Road
In what seems like a world away, the 20 mile drive out to the southern sea cliffs is beyond scenic as the landscape changes drastically before your very eyes. From the jungle-esque tropics near the visitor’s center, to the endless span of volcanic rock, to the stunning blue of the ocean crashing into a wide swath southern coastline, the drive out to the Hōlei Sea Arch is its own delight.
Once you’re there, a short walk will take you to the Hōlei Sea Arch, serving as an example of both the ocean’s power and nature’s sculpting. The dynamic surf makes for a hypnotic view as the crashing waves slowly erode the southern coastline. Being rather set apart from the more popular areas of the park, it’s easy to consider skipping a visit to the Hōlei Sea Arch, but you have to remember the drive itself is as amazing as the coastline views themselves.
The Southern Loop
When you’ve had your fill of HVNP, it’s time to begin the drive back to Kona, but the return visit will be filled with a couple pit-stops.
First up, cruise to Punalu’u Black Sand Beach. The sand is an inky black, a plentiful byproduct of the lava rock’s erosion. Keep your eyes peeled for sea turtles as they’re popular here!
If you’re a thrill seeker, looking for an adrenaline rush, be sure to stop by South Point. Not only is this the southernmost point in the United States, but it’s a known spot for cliff diving— with an approximately 40 to 60-foot drop down into the ocean below. The water there is usually 20-30 ft deep, and there’s a ladder hanging down to aid adrenaline junkies in their climb back up. Definitely not for everyone, but certainly a unique opportunity. Begs the age old question…. if your friends decided to jump off a cliff, would you jump too?
It goes without saying, but cliff jumping is always performed at your own risk, and should only be considered when conditions are safe. Not only is there the jump itself to consider but one also must be able to climb back up out of the water. Never do anything you’re not comfortable with, and always trust your gut!
If you’re still kickin’ and feeling a bit groovy after all that adventure, Gertrude’s Jazz Bar, back in Kona, makes for a sensational end to the day. With amazing craft cocktails and effervescent live music, this is the Hawaiian night cap (or two!) you’ll miss once you’re back home.
DAY THREE
Snorkel Exploration
A little south of Kona, you’ll find Two Step Beach– right next to Pu’uhonua O Honaunau National Historic Park (also worth checking out if you have time!). You don’t have to pay to get into the park to access Two Step, but if you’re interested in the park, it could function as an easy multi-purpose parking spot. If you just want to snorkel, there’s a $5 parking lot available, directly across the street from the beach.
Two Step is called a beach, but it lacks a sandy shoreline. Instead the lava rock meets the ocean, with a natural two-level shelf that allows snorkelers to enter and exit the bay area with ease. The water is crystal clear, with a colorful assortment of fish. The sea urchins are also plentiful, but as long as you’re aware of your surroundings, it’s more than safe.
Kealakekua Bay is another notoriously good snorkeling spot nearby. Kealakekua Bay is reachable via neighborhood parking and a short walk OR, if you’re looking to take the road less traveled, a 4-mile round trip hike. That being said, this hike lacks shade and is rather gravelly, so we recommend saving your hiking energy for Mauna Kea later in the day.
Mauna Kea
The afternoon is all about Mauna Kea. Who goes to Hawai’i and expects to find a snowy mountain? Despite being a little out of place in a tropical paradise, watching the sunset from the top of this mountain is a must for any Big Island traveler.
It takes about an hour and a half to get from Kona to the Mauna Kea Visitor Center (VIS), but before you leave, pack yourself a tasty lunch— or at the very least some hearty snacks. You won’t find a food court on Mauna Kea. You’ll also want to pack an extra bottle of water or two as well… you’d always rather have too much as opposed to not enough! The suggested amount is 500 ml (about two cups) per person per hour.
Once you arrive at the VIS, take a minute to stretch your legs and walk through the center. It’s interesting to learn a bit about the mountain and talk to the rangers. This stop is not only a nice break, but it’s even more important than that. It’s highly recommended to spend 30 minutes at the VIS acclimating to the altitude. Mauna Kea is unique in its environment– there’s not many places in the world that allow you to go from beachside (elevation = 0 ft) to almost 14,000 ft. elevation in 2 hours. As such, it’s important to take some time to ensure your body can handle it. Altitude sickness is no joke!
If you’re feeling good, there’s a less than 1 mile unnamed hike that begins across the road from the VIS. Not only did it provide a beautiful vantage point to take in neighboring Mauna Loa, but it makes for a nice litmus test to assess how you’d do hiking at elevation.
The Summit
From the VIS, the summit is only 8 miles, but due to the grade and unpaved road, it will take another 30 minutes to reach the summit. We recommend leaving the VIS to head up at least an hour before sunset, so you can walk around a bit and snag yourself a good spot to watch the sunset.
If you’re an avid hiker and the elevation doesn’t scare you, leave 2 hours before sunset to make time for a detour. On your way up, stop at the third gravel parking lot, just past mile marker 7 to find Lake Waiau. This isn’t what you’d call a popular or frequently traveled trail, but there should be a visible path to follow.
The hike is about 1.5 miles round trip, but if you’re not used to hiking at elevation, you may find this short hike a bit more challenging than expected. Lake Waiau is considered a sacred space, so taking the effort to see this unique natural phenomenon is special. For more information on Lake Waiau or hiking around, check out our Mauna Kea blog post)
Once you’re at the summit, break out your jacket and find a good spot to watch the sun go down. Watching the sun set above the clouds at 13,796 feet is a breath-taking way to end the day. Once the sun is gone, make your way back down to the VIS. Believe it or not, the star-gazing is actually better at the lower elevation. Keep your eyes peeled… you might see a shooting star or two!
Important notes:
You NEED a car with four wheel drive (4WD) or all wheel drive with low range, with 4WD being the preferred option. Between the unpaved road and the steep grade, this is important not only on the way up, but to safely get down from the mountain as well. You do NOT want any brake overheating or failure.
Another car tip, be sure to leave Kona with a full tank. You must have at least half a tank of gas before you begin your ascent to the summit from the VIS.
Do not plan to summit Mauna Kea if you have been scuba diving in the past 24 hours. The extent of pressure changes in that amount of time and the excess nitrogen accumulated can cause decompression sickness.
Pro-trip: if you plan on stargazing at the visitor’s center, park in the spots facing AWAY from the visitor’s center. Car headlights are rather disruptive to people trying to stargaze and star-gazing enthusiasts will get feisty with you.
Between the five of us, we’ve driven up a handful of times, so it’s nothing to be scared of, you just definitely want to make sure you are prepared when you’re planning your trip! If navigating the car situation sounds too intimidating for you, there’s various commercial tour services available to choose from. Most will provide you with a ride as well as a nice warm jacket, so you don’t have to worry about packing that!
Cheers To You
Rolling back into Kona, make a beeline straight for Ola Brew to enjoy ice-cold beer and some hard-earned dinner. Going to a craft brewery, you expect delicious beers (and they deliver), but we were SO impressed with all the food there as well. Guaranteed to leave you wanting more, the Kalbi Meatballs shared plate is *chefs kiss* fantastic, and the A’A was Salvador’s favorite beer.
DAY FOUR
After spending the last few days zooming around the island, your last day should be spent relaxing by the beach. Kauna’oa Beach is arguably the best beach on the island, making it the obvious choice for your sandy leisure-time.
Kauna’oa Beach, like all beaches in Hawaii, is a public beach, but it’s located within The Mauna Kea Beach Hotel. While this may seem a bit confusing, you do not have to be a guest of the hotel to enjoy access to the beach. As a matter of fact, it’s a great way to relax on a gorgeous beach, with access to restrooms, showers, amazing food (and drink) options, and beach equipment rentals. Kids and adults alike can enjoy snorkeling here, but there’s no lifeguard on duty.
The Mauna Kea Beach Hotel averages around $800/night, which is definitely a splurge. As a visitor for the day, parking will cost $21, which may seem a little spendy, but it’s ultimately worth it for the nearby amenities. The public parking lot only holds about 30 cars, so if this sounds like your ideal beach hang, you’ll want to make sure you arrive early to lock down a parking spot. The only downside? This sweet getaway is about 45 minutes north of Kona, but compared to some of you other days of driving, that’s nothing!
What do ya know?
Big Island holds a special place in our hearts because McKenna (2021) and Dana (2022) each spent 4 months living here while working with the Christian ministry group: Youth With A Mission (YWAM). They spent all their free time exploring and adventuring around, which made them the best hosts for visiting sisters and friends— hence the perfectly crafted itinerary. We hope you have the most amazing time visiting Hawaii and all she has to share!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Whitefish has become a name synonymous with outdoor adventure and wilderness exploration. With visitors flocking to this four-season destination, Whitefish is no longer the sleepy town it once was. While there’s fun to be had year round, winter is a unique time to experience all this pocket of Montana has to offer. On the edge of Glacier National Park, the potential for outdoor exploration is truly endless. From skiing to snowmobiling and everything in between, you won’t regret escaping to Whitefish and crushing the ultimate bucket list of winter activities.
The snow starts rolling in throughout late fall, and Whitefish can expect to receive upwards of 200 inches of snow throughout the winter season. As such, the opening day of ski season is usually late November or early December. While winter can sometimes feel like hibernation season, it’s so much better to get out and enjoy all that winter sports have to offer– and what better place to do it than in Whitefish?
This guide will highlight all of the must-do winter activities in Whitefish and the surrounding area, to make the most of your snowy winter adventure.
SKIING & SNOWBOARDING
Whitefish Mountain Resort is the place to be if you’re ready to shred the gnar. They opened their doors to thrill seeking outdoor enthusiasts in December of 1947, and the good times have only grown since then. Whitefish Mountain Resort can be found on Big Mountain, offering 113 named trails, spanning 3,000 acres. If you’re looking for a little extra excitement, they have four terrain parks as well as a ski cross/boardercross course.
The summit of the mountain stands tall at 6,817 feet elevation, so you’ll find 11 chair lifts, in addition to a t-bar and magic carpet conveyor for newbie skiers not looking to climb too high. Fun fact: the ski resort is partially located on the Flathead National Forest— however this accounts for a very small portion of the forest as this park covers 2.4 million acres.
The Glacier Nordic Club maintains three cross-country skiing areas– two in Whitefish and a third in nearby Columbia Falls. They offer a little something for everyone, to accommodate all ages and skill levels. Unsure what the trail conditions may be? They post regular grooming reports here, so you can always be in the know. If you’re new to cross country (x-c) skiing or perhaps don’t feel like packing all your gear, the Glacier Nordic Shop offers half-day and full day rentals, as well as day ski passes as necessary.
Whitefish Lake Golf Club
Whitefish Lake offers 12 kilometers of beautifully groomed trails for classic and skate skiing. Nothing like putting that golf course to work year-round! A day pass or season membership is required to ski the course, but they are easily purchased at the Glacier Nordic Shop. In order to create the optimal skiing environment, dogs, snowshoes, and fat tire bikes are not invited on these trails.
Big Mountain Trails
Big Mountain Trials boasts 25 kilometers of trails available for exploration. The trail system offers varying levels of difficulty to keep athletes of all experience backgrounds on their toes. This trail system does not have any fees associated with it; however, if you would like to make a donation to trail grooming costs, there are donation boxes at railheads. Dogs and snowshoes are permitted on these trails. Fat tire bikes however are only permitted on some trails as the ruts they leave can become hazardous to x-c skiers.
Meadow Lake Golf Course
Meadow Lake is another golf course that becomes repurposed in the winter months, with 9 kilometers of trails. This is a perfect place to head if you or your adventure buddy are newer to x-c skiing as all the trails are fairly easy in their maneuverability and difficulty level. Similar to the Whitefish Lake Golf Club, a day pass or season membership is required to use the trails, and no dogs, snowshoes, or bikes are permitted.
DOG SLEDDING
If you’ve never been dog sledding, it is guaranteed to be a once-in-a-lifetime memory!! Dog Sled Adventures is home to 113 dogs that share the joy of winter mushing. You can join your wolf-pack on a 12 mile exploration through the foothills of the Whitefish Range, nestled in the Stillwater State Forest. Dog Sled Adventures offers tours every day at 10:00am, 1:00pm, and 3:30pm, from the beginning of December through the end of March, as snow conditions allow.
SNOWMOBILING
Do you ever feel the need for speed?? It might just be time to take a snow machine for a wintery ride with Swan Mountain Snowmobile. If you’ve never ridden a snow machine, think ATV combined with a jet-ski-– your adrenaline rush awaits, but it’s truly an incredible way to experience the gorgeous scenery of the backcountry. A snowmobile can climb, navigate, and maneuver in ways that will give you a whole new perspective. Pack your adventure pants and get ready to fly across the snowy trails!
FAT TIRE BIKING
Are you a cyclist that’s keen to keep pedaling outdoors all winter long? Or perhaps you’re looking to embark on a new winter sport. It might be time to give fat tire biking a try! Not only will your usual road bike or mountain bike have trouble fitting in your luggage, but the tires will be too thin to ride through the snow with. The fat tires create an increased surface area for the weight of the bike and its rider to be distributed across, allowing the pair to stay atop the packed snow.
Looking for a place to snag a bike? Glacier Cyclery and Whitefish Bike Retreat both will have what you’re looking for. As a bonus, Whitefish Bike Retreat has about 6 miles of trails to explore, which connect to the larger The Whitefish Trail system. You could easily spend your whole day cruising around!
written by Salvador
While he isn’t an original member of the Wherry girl squad, he recently married Hannah, and is now fondly considered the-brother-we’ve-never-had by the rest of the sisters. Whenever Salvador travels, assessing the local craft beer scene is a top priority. His favorite foreign beer to date is an unattainable Belgium Brugse Zot he has been unable to find in the States the last few years. Salvador currently speaks two languages, English and Spanish, but every time he goes to Italy, his Italian gets a little better! To pass the time between thrilling excursions, Salvador is a professor of exercise physiology at UWL.
Whether you’re looking for a fall getaway, in town for a wedding, or just keen on a fun-filled day trip, this action-packed highlight reel is the perfect way to make the most of your day in Durham. Bull City has a unique ensemble of jaunts and haunts that are fun for visitors of all ages to explore.
Durham’s nickname, Bull City, has nothing to do with rodeos or livestock and everything to do with its Tobacco roots. Beginning in the 1850s, Blackwell Tobacco Company sold “Bull” Durham Tobacco, and the icon name just stuck! You can find a sentimental nod to this enduring nickname in the Central Carolina Bank Plaza of downtown Durham in the form of a bronze, 10-foot tall bronze bull, named Major.
We’ll walk you through a day full of different sights and adventures. From gorgeous natural beauty to tasty treats, the day will fly by!
Kicking the Day Off At: Guglhupf
Kick the day off with a strong start at Guglhupf— an amazing German bakery and cafe! Not only is the food uh-mazing, but the ambiance is warm and inviting, with fun lighting and a lovely patio. You can’t go wrong with anything on the menu, but make sure you save room for dessert from the bakery!
A word to the wise, Guglhupf will fill up, so it’s a good spot for an earlier breakfast… if you’re planning to go for a Sunday brunch, you might end up waiting a bit for a table.
Up Next: Sarah P. Duke Gardens
The Sarah P Duke Gardens is a beautiful area that visitors of any age can enjoy. With four different areas to wander through, it’s almost too easy to spend the morning appreciating the scenery. There are ample benches if resting your feet and savoring the sights and smells of the garden is your speed. On a warm day, The Terrace Cafe in the gardens is an appreciated stop. They offer all kinds of treats, including yummy popsicle flavors to help a gal cool off. If you have extra time, the Duke Chapel and Nasher Museum of Art are other popular spots on campus to check out.
Keep Cruising To: FullSteam Brewery
If walking around had you read for an ice cold beverage, it’s time to head to FullSteam Brewery. Vibe check? Immaculate! Not only is FullSteam home to the best craft beers in the city, but the food is amazing and the ambiance of the brewery itself is fun, a little funky, and upbeat. Honestly, even if you don’t care for beer, it’s worth stopping by just to taste the chicken-on-a-stick!
Make Your Way To: Durham Bulls Athletic Park & American Tobacco District
When you’re ready to head back outside, start making your way to Durham Bulls Athletic Park to get loud for some minor league baseball. Games are played frequently throughout the spring, so tickets are usually pretty reasonable. Not only is the stadium nice, but the whole area surrounding the park is fun to walk around and checkout.
Durham Bulls Athletic Park is actually located in the American Tobacco Campus, making it easy to wander around. This district of Durham is both old and new as it was part of the once integral tobacco industry, and has since been rejuvenated. This up-and-coming area is home to shopping, dining, entertainment, markets, and more!
Grab A Sweet Treat At: The Parlor
Dessert first anyone?? The Parlor is a perfect spot if you’re looking for a sweet treat! As you might expect, they have a delicious array of handmade ice cream flavors to choose from, but they also have a tasty assortment of baked goods as well. I CAN confirm cookies and cream ice cream with a chocolate chip cookie is a winning combo. As a plus, they have a few vegan options, so everyone can enjoy a treat!
Wander Through: 21C Museum Hotel
The 21C Museum Hotel, is a hotel with a contemporary art museum on its lower levels. With nine different locations across the country, the Durham museum is currently featuring a This We Believe installment. The exhibit is unique and thought-provoking to walk through, featuring dozens of carefully crafted and diverse works of art to appreciate. Even the bathrooms are part of the exhibit! This ambulatory artistic experience is open to anyone— you do not have to be guests of the hotel or adjoined restaurant to enjoy this free museum.
Finish The Day At: The Counting House
The Counting House makes for a tasty meal as well as a fun place to grab a cocktail. The ethos of the menu is “familiar, yet unexpected”, so you’ll find bold takes and elevated culinary experiences. They also boast some fun signature cocktails. Our experience was fab just telling the bartender what we were in the mood for and enjoying something new. It goes without saying the food was to-die-for as well. A little spendy but worth it!
A day in Durham goes by fast, but there’s loads of fun to be had, food to be eaten, and tasty drinks to enjoy. Durham is also notorious for the array of murals found throughout the city, so even an afternoon stroll can bring you unexpected artistic beauty. Regardless of your length of stay, we hope you get out and explore something new!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
New York City is an epicenter of commerce, diversity, tourism, and culture. While two days isn’t nearly enough time to enjoy the big apple in full, sometimes you’ve got to make the best of the time you have! When you only have time for a forty eight hour trip, it’s a given the schedule will be action-packed.
Whether you’re in town for a bachelorette party, solo exploration, a concert, or a couples adventure, there’s so much to see! The vibe of this itinerary is very much a never-been-to-NYC-before-trying-to-see-as-much-as-I-can, as we attempt to tackle all of the must-see highlights.
In the last six months I took a solo trip by myself and then again just recently visited to celebrate McKenna’s 21st birthday. I had an amazing time both visits… NYC can definitely get touristy but in the best way! Below I have includes an action packed two-day itinerary, hitting all the classic, must-see spots in New York City— with a walking map included!
I’m not always a big museum person but the Museum of Natural History is certainly an exception. There’s an abundance of unique exhibitions that could truly keep you entertained all day. I was here a couple hours and only made it through the two dinosaur halls and the African mammals exhibit. I’m already eager to go back and explore the Hall of North American Forests!
Back to back museums? Not quite! The MET is a cornucopia of rich culture; however, because of time constraints, I was just keen to see it from the outside. Having watched Gossip Girl, I rather wanted to get a picture on the step. Not only is the building grandiose, but the area around the MET was rather lovely as well. A worthy pit stop, at the very least. If you are a connoisseur of art, this stop may warrant a more thorough review!
A walk in the park anyone? Not only is the park a refreshing contrast to the ambiance of the city but it makes for some fun sightseeing: yoga, picnics, and performers, but also some lovely foliage in the fall months. Whether you’re wandering around or giving your legs a little rest at one of the many benches, the park is worth stopping by– especially since it’s easy to wander through as you’re walking around.
While it might not be a main stop for most, we loved watching the Eloise at the Plaza movie growing up, so if you’re similarly inclined to have your own ~main character~ moment, the Plaza is right along the walking itinerary for the day and super easy to swing by.
Perhaps a more seasonal stop, but if you happen to be in New York around the holidays, the Rockefeller Center would be worth wandering through, just to see the oversized tree! Not necessarily worth stopping by any ‘ole day of the year, but absolutely magical around Christmas!
The intersection of consumerism, tourism, and entertainment glows at this epicenter of New York culture. Whether you’re keen to catch a broadway show or simply enchanted by the groundbreaking graphics, Times Square is about as NYC as it gets. Touristy? Yes, but you have to go at least once just to see it!
Just an FYI: there’s so much in the big city that might catch you by surprise. I was startled to learn a ‘Naked Cowgirl’ (a granny with nipple covers) is a regular fixture there. Don’t say I didn’t warn you!
Central Park isn’t the only charming park to rest your weary legs at! I snagged some freshly sliced mango from a street vendor (much better than the hot dog), and took a little break. The multitude of benches makes it easy to sit down, enjoy a snack, and relax for a moment. A fun fact: if you happen to visit in the winter months, the lawn at Bryant Park is transformed into NYC’s only free admission ice skating rink!
One Big Macy’s
Macy’s Herald Square store is the largest department store in the United States with 1.25 million square feet of retail space. It takes up an entire city block!! The flagship store blows the hometown Macy’s out of the water! I didn’t exactly have time to shop ‘til I dropped, but it was fun just wandering through such a seemingly endless store. A perfect shopping break if you find yourself early for you Empire State Building reservation.
Timing is everything for this outstanding stop, and making a reservation in advance is a must! I went at sunset, and loved seeing the sun set over the city. As a bonus, you can stay up there for a bit and watch as the sky turns dark and the lights of the skyline come to life. It costs a little extra to go all the way up to the 102nd floor observatory, but it’s worth every penny. At the 86th floor, the observation area is inside, but up on the 102nd the observation deck is outside. This alone makes the view so much more engaging!
If you’re hoping to make it up to the top by a certain time— perhaps sunset— make your reservation, 20-30 minutes earlier than you want to be up there. They will not let you in early, and it takes some time to work your way through the line to the elevators and get through security. Don’t let anything stand in the way of your perfect sunset view!
If you were to only do one touristy activity in New York City, this should be it—personally, it was my favorite part of the weekend!
Day One Road Map
Dust off your walking boots because it’s a full day! While 3.8 miles seems like it’s a ton of walking, remember it’s broken up into segments as you explore all the various stops along the way. Plus part the longest stretch of walking is either alongside or through Central Park, so at the very least, it would be a scenic walk!
Grand Central Station is a rather eye-catching transportation hub! This cathedral-esque terminal is a temple to the everyday commuter as it has become so much more than a subway stop. Grand Central maintains various shops and over 30 different dining options– in addition to a rotating events schedule as well. Don’t miss the zodiac ceiling, information booth clock, or whispering gallery. I took the subway out of Grand Central to Battery Park, so a stop by this historic mainstay of New York City transit was built right in!
This personification of American freedom and democracy stands as tall and proud today as it has every day for over 130 years. Whether you are intrigued by history, have ancestors that immigrated through Ellis Island, or just want to see an iconic statue in person, the Statue of Liberty awaits your arrival. Statue City Cruises is the only ferry company that operates tours out to Liberty Island and Ellis Island, in conjunction with the National Park Service. All reservations need to be made in advance online.
The Statue of Liberty and Ellis Island are incredibly sentimental landmarks to the roots of American immigration culture. As such, prior to boarding the boat, you must go through security to ensure the safety of other riders as well as the monuments themselves. The ferries leave as scheduled, so be sure to allot time for the security line!
I don’t consider myself a huge history buff, but between the two islands, I spent a few hours wandering, reading, and trying to absorb everything there was to see. On a quick weekend trip time is extra valuable, but I truly enjoyed making the most of this stop. Even as I left, I felt it was somewhere I’d want to return to again in the future.
Pro tip: Do the 9am tour! It’s the first tour of the day, so you beat the rush. It’s a bit more relaxing with less people around–plus it makes for better pictures! Speaking of pictures, as you are going out to the islands, don’t forget to turn around and appreciate the NYC skyline.
In the United States, September 11th has name recognition unmatched by almost any other day in the calendar year. While it’s a day of somber remembrance, I was too young at the time it occurred to really remember all the emotions and trauma. It was all too easy to spend a couple hours in the museum reading, listening, and contemplating on this pivotal day in American history. I found the 9/11 Museum to be a beautiful and meaningful tribute to the victims and heroes that died that day. A worthwhile stop!
Money in Your Pocket
New York can be expensive– especially when you’re trying to make the most of your time. Here’s a couple ways to save over a quick weekend adventure.
Public Transportation
Instead of paying for taxis or ubers, used public transportation! I flew into La Guardia, and took the LaGuardia Link (a free bus) to the subway station. Once I was in the subway station, I used the CityMapper app to help me navigate more efficiently. I took the Q70 and found it to be safe and fairly easy to navigate. A taxi from the airport to Times Square or Central Park will cost about $50, whereas a metro card will cost you around $3. Plus what’s more New York than taking the Subway?
New York Pass
I knew I would be trying to cram as much sightseeing into my two days as possible, so I bought the New York Pass. The cost of a two-day pass varies according to whatever promotions they’re running– I snagged mine for $160. It granted me admission into the American Museum of Natural History, Empire State Building, Statue of Liberty and Ellis Island, as well as the 9/11 Memorial and Museum. If you know you want to check out museums and more touristy haunches, it could certainly be worth the monies.
If you’re more keen to walk around Central Park and go shopping on 5th Avenue, it would be a waste. When we went with friends for McKenna’s birthday, we had a less action-packed sight-seeing itinerary, so we didn’t make any New York Pass purchases. It’s all about the vibe of what you want to fit into your two days!
Hotwire
Use Hotwire to save a little on your stay! I ended up at the Renwick Hotel, and loved how centrally located it was. The room ended up costing around $235, which was super reasonable for being close to both Central Park and Times Square. They have luggage storage if you arrive before your room is ready and don’t care to lug your bags around the city with you. Also worth mentioning, I was a female solo traveler, and I felt super safe at this hotel.
written by Dana
CEO of being stubbornly independent, Dana lives to speak her mind as her feisty personality lends itself to her outspoken nature. Dana epitomizes the concept of “spending money on experiences, not things” as she is constantly complaining that she has nothing to wear, but ALWAYS has her next trip on the docket. Dana recently graduated from FSU, and has joining us big kids in the adult workforce. She works with our dad at Wherry Truck Lines, keeping all the good ‘ole boys in line.
The Kenai Fjords National Park maintains a unique topography with its frigid water and flourishing forest, interwoven around millennia old ice and snow. The crown jewel of the park is the Harding Icefield, with over 30 glaciers stemming from this remnant ice sheet. These historic glaciers carved out fjords, leaving behind the deep, narrow inlets the park is named for. Here the ice age lingers at the intersection of cautious exploration and intentional preservation. With such diversity, there are many ways to gain an appreciation for the pristine, immense wilderness, so we detailed everything you need to know about the Kenai Fjords, to help make the most of your time.
Alaska is home to eight national parks, and the Kenai Fjords is arguably the most accessible park in the state, only two and a half hours away from Anchorage— Alaska’s largest city. Not only does the park itself have a worthy draw, but the Kenai Fjords are the beloved backyard of Seward, a popular fishing town on the Kenai Peninsula. Between the two, this pocket of Alaska is a must-visit for anyone keen to experience the beauty of pristine, immense wilderness!
Fast Facts About the kenai fjords National Park
Size: 607,805 acres
Visitors: 411,782 visitors (data from 2021)
Distance from Anchorage: 130 miles — 2.5 hour drive
Became a National Park: December 2nd, 1980
Most unique feature: the Harding Icefield — over 30 glaciers stem from this icefield!
While park stretches into a vast expanse, we did our best to explore as thoroughly as possible. From float planes to kayaks to good ole fashion boots, we set out to see everything there was to see. Below we have detailed your hike options, all of the various tours available in the area, and ways to ensure you catch a glimpse of the unique wildlife — as well as all the tips and tricks to ensure you have the best time.
Up, Up, and Away
Nothing like catching a bird’s eye view! Due to the expansive nature of the park as well as the hardiness of the topography, a plane tour can be a fantastic way to experience the lay of the land, from a bird’s eye view. We were headed to the Seward area via Moose’s Pass, so we stopped by Scenic Mountain Air for a float plane tour. The hour-long jaunt explored the south-central Kenai Peninsula. From our vantage point, we were able to see the Harding Icefield, Chugach Mountains, endless lakes and waterfalls, as well as a handful of wildlife sightings. My favorite spot to see was Bear Glacier Lagoon and the many icebergs it houses.
If you’re looking for a flightseeing option a bit closer to Seward, Seward Air Tours is a small plane experience with eight different tour options to choose from. If you’re keen to chopper through the skies, Seward Helicopter Tours offers not only a flight tour but they also have an option to go dog sledding over a glacier. While we didn’t do this in the park, we did something similar near Girdwood at Punchbowl Glacier and can attest that it is so beyond cool.
These Boots Were Made for Hiking
Having already appreciated the park from above during our float plane tour, we were excited to explore with our boots on the ground. The hiking options in the park are limited to the Exit Glacier Overlook Trail and the Harding Icefield Trail. Basically you get to choose between very easy or very challenging.
Trekking out to the Harding Icefield is a 9.2 mile out and back trail that tackles over 3,600 feet of elevation. During the summer months there can be ice and snow on the trail, so be sure to wear appropriate footwear. Even in later summer or early fall months, consider bringing spikes if you plan to walk on the icefield once you arrive. This rugged trail is prime real estate for all kinds of wildlife sightings, so be sure to keep your eyes peeled!
If you arrive at the park around 10am or 2pm, park rangers lead walking “tours” along the Exit Glacier Overlook trail. While the 2.2 miles of trail doesn’t take that long to hike, they provide additional commentary and insight regarding the park, evolution of the glacier, and local preservation. No advanced registration is needed, and there’s no cost associated with the walking educational opportunity.
For travelers that live by their own set of rules, the trail is easily navigated independently and the views are just as spectacular! As you walk out to the glacier overlook viewpoint, you will notice low-profile makers with years on them. These denote where the glacier extended to at various points throughout history. It’s one thing to hear how our glaciers are melting but another to see the receding line for yourself. Regardless of whether you go with a group or explore solo, the Exit Glacier is humbling to experience.
Whatever Floats Your Boat
Exploration by land, by air, and next up: by sea! We went adventuring with Major Marine Tours and loved it. Their Kenai Fjords Wildlife tours run for four hours, six hours, seven and a half hours, or eight and a half hours. We opted for a four hour tour (mainly because we were going as a family and our dad doesn’t always fare well on boats). While the longer tours will dive deeper into the park, we felt four hours was a perfect amount of time to see glaciers, fjords, and an outstanding breadth of wildlife. Our favorites were the puffins, humpback whales, seals, and mischievous otters. It was so thrilling to see these guys out in the wild.
What to expect? Upon entry on the boat, each group was assigned to a “home base” table, to store their things at and use as they pleased. In addition to the tables, there was ample space inside the boat as well as on the decks for people to observe as they pleased. And observe we did!! The captain was fabulous and any time we were near any sort of wildlife that may be of interest, he would linger (at an appropriate distance) to ensure everyone had an opportunity to see. They had snacks and drinks available for purchase, but you can also bring your own food and drink on board with you as well.
Paddle Powered
For a more immersive boating experience, hop in a kayak! If you’re not a big kayaker, it can certainly feel intimidating to be out in such a tiny boat; however, it is immensely serene to feel so small in the magnitude of nature’s magnitude. The interaction with nature is so much more intimate, with curious harbor seals popping their heads up a couple feet from your kayak– checking out what you’re up to.
We embarked on this adventure through Miller’s Landing, and wholeheartedly recommend them! Full disclosure, we suited up for a dusk kayaking trip to Bridal Veil Waterfall, so technically we stayed within the confines of Resurrection Bay and didn’t quite make it into the national park waters; however, this was more than enough adventure for us. They do offer all kinds of full day kayaking trips for more committed paddlers. Regardless of your paddling destination, it is humbling to experience the fjord environment and wildlife in this way.
The 30-Second Scoop on Seward
The Kenai Fjords National Park Visitor Center is actually located in the heart of Seward, making it very centrally located; however, not where you might expect to find it. Be sure to stop in and chat with a park ranger, stamp your national park passport, and collect any park mementos. While it’s not the true visitor center, the Exit Glacier Nature Center is a visitor center-like building near the trails in the park, so it’s not completely wilderness out there!
If you’re feeling a bit peckish, you have loads of restaurants to choose from. The Lone Chicharron Taqueria is going to have some fantastic tacos, while Gold Rush Bistro boasts an impressive bowl of clam chowder. Sweet Darlings has chocolates and gelato that are guaranteed to satisfy your sweet tooth. If you’re looking to crack open a cold one, Seward Brewing Company is an awesome local craft brewery.
Sampling different restaurants was easy because Seward is pretty compact. The main populus of the city stretches about a mile and a half long and is rather walkable. However, if you struggle with mobility impairments, Seward has a free shuttle to aid in transportation (and exploration!).
A majority of Alaska’s national parks are reachable only by bush plane and/or boat. Not only are the Kenai Fjords a breathtaking reflection of the wilderness Alaska is hailed for, but the accessibility of this park only adds to its charm. Any additional plane or boat trips taken once you arrive only add to the fullness of the experience.
If you’re eager to encounter more of Alaska’s astounding natural beauty, Denali National Park and Preserve is less than five hours outside of Anchorage, and boasts grandiose heights as the highest peak in North America. You won’t regret adding this mammoth park to your Alaskan bucket list. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Explore the boundary waters up at Voyageurs— Minnesota’s only national park! With over 218,000 acres, there are endless nooks and crannies in this forested wetland. The network of rivers, streams, and lakes account for approximately 40% of Voyageurs National Park, however, much of the remaining land is accessible only by water. The interconnected waterways create a mosaic for eager visitors to explore. Whether you’re keen for a day out on the water or intrigued by the Northern lights, here’s to making the most of your time at Voyageurs.
This is a perfect spot for a relaxing long weekend adventure, enjoying nature. From our favorite campsite to maximizing your chances of seeing the aurora borealis, we’ve got the scoop on this aquatic maze.
Enough Visitor Centers to Go Around
First stop? The visitor center! Voyageurs actually maintains three different visitor centers in distinct regions of the park. Rainy Lake is the farthest north and is the only visitor center open year-round. Kabetogama Lake and Ash River are both open seasonally, from May through September. Each center has its own boat launch, so the assorted locations help visitors access the various areas of the park with ease. Regardless which one you visit, be sure to get your national park passport stamped!
Whatever Floats Your Boat
Much of Voyageurs is either water or land only accessible by water. This means a boat is pretty essential to getting the full Voyageurs experience. From kayaks and canoes to pontoons and wakeboarding boats, you’ll see a variety of fun being had. We did a bit of a road trip adventure up to Voyageurs, and didn’t want to deal with a trailer when we were exploring some of the more touristy cities, so we just strapped a canoe to the roof of the car!
Perhaps you’d rather not deal with the hassle of bringing your boat along or maybe you’re keen to have someone else drive the boat– regardless, you have some options. If you’re interested in learning some fun facts while you float, the national park service offers a few different tours to help everyone explore. Otherwise, a comprehensive list of local guides and rentals can be found here.
Hiking
While Voyageurs isn’t hailed as a hiking destination, there’s a couple of hikes worth exploring. If you’re up near Rainy Lake, the Oberholtzer Trail is an easy, under two mile hike that will allow you to experience nature from a different perspective. Closer to the Ash River Visitor Center, you can wander through three miles of aquatic ecosystem views on the Blind Ash Bay Trail. These hiking trails are a great way to enjoy a bit of solitude as well as some potential birdwatching if you’re lucky! No doggos allowed on the trail though, so you’ll have to rock this walk by yourself or with some human pals.
Unique Sights
Each pocket of the park has its own little adventure that awaits. Just north of the Rainy Lake Visitor Center, you’ll find Little American Island. You can take a self-guided tour and see mentos of an old mining era. About five miles north of the Kabetogama Lake Visitor Center and only accessible by water, you will find the Ellsworth Rock Gardens. Originally created by Jack Ellsworth, the garden is a collection of unique rock sculptures and formations, surrounded by thousands of colorful blossoms.
Most easily accessible by the Ash River Visitor Center, Kettle Falls is just a hop, skip, and a jump from the Canadian border. This part of the park is home to a historic hotel. Their motto is “Tough place to get to….. But well worth it once you get there!”
Camping
Voyageurs is pretty unique in that all campsites are accessible exclusively by watercraft. You can make your camping reservation online, which is not only convenient but also a fab way to scope out all the various sites. Voyageurs doesn’t have a campground so much as it has loads of unique individual campsites. We stayed at Sphunge Island West, which is a little over a mile and a half from Kabetogama Lake Visitor Center.
If you don’t have a motorized boat and plan on canoeing, this is a perfect site as it’s a very reasonable distance to traverse with all of your camping stuff on board. There was only one other campsite on the island, and with no overland path to reach them, you really do feel like you have a little lake island to yourself. Most importantly, our campsite’s beach faced north, so we had a perfect view of the northern lights in the evening. Not all campsites are so ideally located, so be sure to investigate your campsite thoroughly before making any final decisions. As a bonus, pets were permitted at this campsite, so we were able to bring our dog!
As a note: While canoe voyages greater than 1.5 miles are beyond feasible, it’s worth noting, there are other motorized boats out tubing and zooming around. When we were in the ‘open bay area’ if you will, it made me grateful we picked something as close as we did. It would have been doable, but I would have been a bit nervous to embark on a much longer canoe trip, with all our backpacks and camping stuff in the boat.
Northern Lights
Voyageurs is certainly home to serene, natural beauty; however, if you have spent any amount of time adventuring around on lakes before, you might be looking for the extra-special-something to make this experience unique. While it’s impossible to guarantee, visiting Voyageurs when there’s a high likelihood of the aurora borealis making an appearance will take your usual lake-life experience to an ethereal level.
The University of Alaska in Fairbanks has an aurora forecast website that monitors geomagnetic activity to provide predictions of when the northern lights are most likely to make their appearance. We found this to be rather beneficial as we were planning our trip. When we arrived, we stopped at the visitor center and spoke with the park ranger, and she recommended the My Aurora Forecast app as a way to more closely monitor your likelihood of seeing the lights, in real time. It gives you a pretty accurate prediction for when you might get some magical dancing light action.
For us, watching the Northern lights dance across the sky was the ultimate highlight of the trip. While the lights tend to be more common to see in the winter months, we visited in early September and were treated to a wondrous light show. Happy travels and best of luck chasing down the magical aurora borealis!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Between budget airlines with expensive baggage fees and the headache of dealing with missing checked bags, there’s never been a greater need for the elusive perfect travel bag. While perfection is a moving target, we’ve found the ultimate travel backpack that’s going to be on the top of your must-have list. It’s carry-on compatible and the intuitive design has room for all your trip essentials.
Whether you’ve booked a last-minute weekend escape or you’re spending a couple weeks abroad, you will be impressed with the range and versatility afforded to you with this backpack. The closest thing to a perfect travel backpack we’ve discovered to date!
The Brand: Cotopaxi
You’ll notice the backpack might not fit a cohesive monochromatic aesthetic, but the color chaos is so meaningful. Integral to Cotopaxi’s mission is the creation of sustainably designed outdoor gear. Almost 95% of their products contain repurposed or recycled materials to produce truly eco-friendly bags. Their ‘Del Día’ collection uses remnant fabric, left over from other companies’ larger production runs to create each bag– hence the multi-hue ensemble. Each bag is unique, created with unused, high-quality nylon that would have otherwise ended up in a landfill. Through Cotopaxi, these ‘scraps’ are reassembled and given new life!
Features on Features
This travel bag has 42L or 2,563 cubic inches of space for all of your stuff and things. The bag itself is designed with maximal space economy to ensure you will be able to fit everything you need. Whether you want to wear it as a backpack, an over-the-shoulder duffel, or carry it briefcase style, you have an array of transportation options. You’ll also notice that all of the zippers have an anti-theft feature that makes it difficult for someone to snag something out of your pack on the fly.
A Suitcase Backpack
While I love all of the thoughtful features in this pack, the suitcase-style opening and interior sectioned zipper pockets are my favorite features. Not only does it make it easier to ensure all the nooks and crannies of the backpack are filled, but it’s like packing cubes are built right into the bag. You can sort it however you like, but it seems to be a perfect space separation for clothes, shoes, and toiletries to all have their own spot!
The Front Pocket Pouch
While all of your trip essentials are stored away inside, the top zipper pocket is the perfect place to store everything you’ll want to access during your flight. This compartment is larger than it looks as it has space to hold all your snacks, hand sanitizer, a book, your wallet, headphones, and more. Plus, if you’re leaving home, the little clip sewn into the bag makes for the perfect spot to attach your keys so they don’t get lost along the way.
A Strong Strap Game
Lots to break down here on the back of the bag! First and foremost, a 42L bag packed to the gills can feel heavy, so the adjustable hip-belt can come in handy big time if you’re planning to do a bunch of walking with your bag. If you’re not so keen on using this belt, it IS removable. Similarly, if you want to carry the bag by a duffle strap or handle, you can unclip the backpack straps and tuck them into the moisture-wicking lining. So much customization, so little time!
There’s two zipper pockets on the back-side of the bag— parallel to one another, on either side of the backpack straps. One zipper opens up to well-padded ipad and laptop sleeves, while the other serves as a short-cut access point to the large compartment in the bag. This can be super convenient if you want to grab a jacket without fully opening the main zipper.
But Wait, There’s More
A side pocket for your water? That’s a given, to keep you hydrated! There’s also carabiner lash points all over the bag, so if you run out of room inside, there’s ample space to clip miscellaneous items on. Perhaps the most groovy of all, the bag comes with a rain cover to keep your goods protected from the elements. What more could you possibly need?
See It for Yourself: The 85-Second Scoop
A Confident Purchase
Cost: $210
This is a bag you can purchase with confidence, because if anything happens to it, Cotopaxi has an awesome customer service policy that ensures your bag will be repaired or replaced, if it’s defective. As a bonus, if you’ve had your bag (or any of their gear) for a while and want to trade it in for a store credit, that is an option as well. Cotopaxi is all about sustainable solutions, so they go above and beyond to maximize the life cycle of their products and reduce their overall environmental impact. You can read more about their Guaranteed for Good policy here.
The biggest problem with this backpack? It sells out! You can find it on the Cotopaxi website and REI, but if it’s out of stock, the 35L bag is designed extremely similarly and doesn’t seem to sell out quite as quickly.
Disclaimer: All product photos used in this post were taken directly from the Cotopaxi or REI website, in which the bag is linked. None of these product photographs are our own.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Denali National Park and Preserve is home to not only the highest peak in North America but abundant wildlife as well. If you visit in the summer, the nearly endless daylight provides ample opportunity to maximize your exploration time. When you’re heading to a park as massive as Denali, it can be daunting to plan your trip. Whether you’re staying for a day or a week, we’ve compiled a list of unique adventures to have, to make the most of your time in Denali National Park.
While the national park system certainly caters to the outdoorsy, adventurers of any tenacity can enjoy the beauty of the park. From breath-taking hikes to picturesque plane rides and all the sled dogs in between, you won’t regret visiting this humbling reflection of nature’s boundless might.
Fast Facts About Denali National Park
Size: 6.1 million acres
Visitors: 427,562 (data from 2022)
Distance from Anchorage: 240 miles — 4 hour drive
Became a National Park: February 26th, 1917
Most unique feature: Mount Denali reaches up 20,310 ft, making it the highest peak in North America!
As with any national park, nature’s beauty shows off in a surreal way. Below we have detailed eight unique activities to allow you a robust Denali experience. Denali National Park is a perfect embodiment of the stark, Final Frontier allure Alaska is known for. Here’s to happy adventures!
1. Hike Horseshoe Lake Trail
Depending on where you’re departing from, getting to Denali can be a way. If you’ve spent a couple hours in the car, and are looking for a nice hike to stretch your legs out, the Horseshoe Lake Trail is a perfect option. It’s an awesome hike for everyone in the family to get out and enjoy nature.
Two miles goes by quickly, with all of the sweeping views. On this particular hike, we crossed paths with another group that saw three moose traipsing through. While we missed seeing them on our Hourseshoe jaunt, we ended up seeing at least one moose every day we were in the park and the surrounding Healy area!
2. Conquer the Mount Healy Overlook
The Mount Healy Overlook Trail is a perfect hike to start the day with– the early bird gets the worm, and the early risers get an empty trail! We were after it by 7am, and didn’t see anyone else out on the trail until we were heading back down the mountain! The 7 miles and over 2,700 feet of elevation was an energizing kick in the pants. Once we made it to the top, it was hard to want to head back. Looking out at the horizon was as beautiful as it was peaceful.
While any hiker could certainly crush this route, the elevation and length kept some of the less outdoorsy members of our family away. Not a terribly technical hike but just lengthy… and the elevation a little cumbersome if you’re from the flatlands of Florida!
3. Grab a Bite at Morino Grill
When you’ve tuckered yourself out and need a bite, be sure to stop by the Morino Grill. It’s the only restaurant in the park, so they run the monopoly on sustenance for hungry hikers. The menu has all the hearty staples, so there’s bound to be something to hit the spot– especially since they maintain gluten free and vegan options.
It’s conveniently located next door to the Visitor Center, so it’s easy to get your national park passport stamped and snag any park mentos. Alaska’s tourism runs year-round, but the large majority of visitors arrive over the summer, so the Morino Grill is closed through the winter season.
4. Explore Denali from a Bird’s Eye View
Denali National Park and preserve stretches out to cover over six million acres. With such a vast magnitude, it’s impossible to see everything by foot. To expand your exploratory reach, a flightseeing tour can take you to new heights! This kind of aviation adventure was a humbling way to observe the magnitude of the Alaskan mountain range, see Denali up close, and appreciate the complete isolation of the Alaskan wilderness. While it’s guaranteed to be a breathtaking view regardless of what plane or helicopter you’re in, we explored with Talkeetna Air and could not recommend them more!
We actually landed on a glacier and were able to appreciate the immense landscape from the ground up. It is beyond humbling to realize how truly isolated one can be in the snowy Alaskan range– even in summer.
5. Visit the Denali Sled Dogs
Denali National Park remains steeped in its traditional roots and has maintained their pack of sled dogs since 1922. The temperature of the winter can make machinery unreliable, but the dogs thrive in the cold. They have the intuition a snowmobile lacks, which becomes life-saving in a white out or when avoiding dangerous ice. You can meet these hard working boys and girls at the kennels, just under two miles from the Visitor’s Center. Not only are there puppies to meet, but in the summer, you can pretend to drive a sled and learn more about the dog sledding culture.
6. Mush in the Park
While the park dogs will take your for a ride in the summer, they’re busy working in the winter time, so if you want a mushing experience, tracking down Denali Dogsled Expeditions is a must! They’re the only company that currently is permitted to offer dogsledding tours inside the park premises.
As we visited in the summer, this wasn’t an option, but we did have the opportunity to dogsled elsewhere. We can attest that it’s big cool to be pulled through the snow by eight very eager dogs.
7. Spend a Night Under the Stars
Looking for a fully immersive experience? Go camping! Denali doesn’t house a lodge with sleeping accommodations for guests, so if you’re looking to spend the night in the park, you better pack a tent!
There’s six campgrounds to choose from, with a whole world of backcountry camping available as well. The Riley Creek Campground is the closest to the entrance of the park and houses a shower and laundry facility— which can be rather nice at the end of a long day. As an additional bonus, the Riley Creek Mercantile is right next to the campground. It maintains a supply of items such as water bottles, bear spray, sunscreen, and such. They also sell sandwiches and some pre-packaged food if you’re in a pinch.
Some campsites can be booked in advance while others are first come, first serve only. You can find out more information about each campground here, to ensure you arrive prepared.
8. Bus or Bust!
Intra-Park Transit
There’s only one road through Denali National Park, so in order to mitigate traffic and parking snafus, there are free busses that transport visitors about 15 miles into the park, with their final stop at Savage River. If you’re keen to explore a bit further into the park, there’s an alternate bus options that will take you the rest of the 92 miles along Denali Park Road. This bus system has a nominal fee, depending on how far you plan to go. Both of these options are non-narrated bus rides, existing exclusively for transportation needs. As such, riders are free to disembark and re-board different buses as they please.
Narrated Tours
There’s a bus ride for everyone! For anyone less keen on transportation to a remote hike and more interested in a cultural history lesson, there’s a trained naturalist waiting for you. These tours run anywhere from 4 hours to 13 hours, depending on how deep into the park you’re looking to adventure. These bus options can be thought of as more of a paid tour— i.e. it will not stop at campgrounds and is not designed to ridden in a hop on/hop off style.
The Denali Park Road is 92 miles long, but landscape anomalies can close the road down, so be sure to check conditions out before you go.
Denali National Park and Preserve boasts some outstanding feats of nature, and we had such fun exploring the little slice we did. We stayed in this region for two nights and felt it was a perfect amount of time to explore the park and surrounding area. Our stop in Denali was part of a two-week road trip, exploring a beautiful sliver of the gargantuan state of Alaska. Check out the full itinerary here. Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Alaska is so immense it can be intimidating to even begin to plan a trip. With so much to see, where do you even begin? With endless mountain ranges and more coastline than the rest of the country combined, the views are unparalleled. Our two-week itinerary begins in Anchorage and explores up into Denali as well as down into the Kenai Peninsula. Whether it’s your first time visiting or your tenth, this action-packed adventure is guaranteed to delight. From North America’s highest mountain top to dog sledding to salmon fishing, and everything in between, our two week roadtrip through Alaska is a once in a lifetime experience.
We’ll walk you through our full itinerary. Not only did we love all our adventures, but we snacked hard and ate often throughout our trip too, so we have endless curated recommendations to share. We’ve compiled the perfect, robust trip to make the most of your time in Alaska!
Day 1
Touchdown in Anchorage
If you’re visiting in the summer, regardless of what time you land, you are almost guaranteed to have daylight to burn! We arrived mid-afternoon, so we picked up our Turo, checked into our rooms at the Holiday Inn Express, and headed downtown. 49th State Brewery has some lovely rooftop seating, so we put our name down on a waiting list and wandered through the downtown area as we waited for our table. We totally recommend this as the rooftop seating was well worth the wait, and a little exploration was a fun way to acquaint ourselves with a new area. The brewery’s beer and appetizers were all delicious, so you can’t go wrong.
Best Pizza Around
This actually kicked off our evening of eating as we picked the rest of the family up from the airport and took the hungry travelers to Moose’s Tooth. Not only was the pizza fantastic, but the desserts were quite memorable as well. As we bounced to different towns along our journey, we were rather surprised at how notorious this tasty pizzeria was. Once everyone’s belly was full, we headed to the hotel and turned in for the night.
Day 2
So It Begins
Getting a reasonable start to the day, we swung by the Walmart to get some snacks before we hit the road. While this doesn’t seem like anything special, a Walmart or a Safeway can be a hot commodity in some of the remote regions of the state, so we made sure to stock up on snacks before we left. From Anchorage, the drive up to Denali takes about 4 hours– potentially more, depending on construction traffic.
With food options along the way being limited, we just stopped at Subway, right off the highway, for some fast sandwiches. Once we arrived, we unloaded our bags at the Aurora Denali Lodge, and put our hiking shoes on. Inside Denali National Park and Preserve, we found the Horseshoe Lake Trail. With everyone in our large family group having varying levels of hiking endurance, this was a perfect hike for the whole family.
Gas Prices Too High
After working up an appetite, we headed back to endeavor on a unique dining experience. In an ode to a bygone era, we loaded up in a covered wagon for a dinner and a drive. Having never traveled by horse and buggy before, it was certainly a different experience. The covered wagon tour included so many family-style courses, everyone left stuffed to the gills.
While riding in a horse covered wagon was certainly a fun, different experience, it was a far less historic tour than we were expecting. The ideal clientele for this tour would be someone that’s particularly interested in horses. For our family, this was one of the only activities from our trip that we agreed that we probably wouldn’t sign up for again. Nothing bad happened, just not really worth the price of admission.
Fast & Furious
What to do instead? The same public trails the horses use for the covered wagon rides are also utilized by Denali ATV Adventures. If cruising on an ATV is more your speed, this makes for an awesome way to explore the area. The ATVs get where the covered wagons can’t and take you to some gorgeous overlooks and rushing riverbeds. Regardless of which adventure you choose, be sure to keep an eye out for moose! We saw quite a few when we were up in the Denali area! Due to the long daylight hours, tours tend to run later than they might elsewhere, so by the time the tour had concluded, we were zonked and ready for bed.
Day 3
Denali National Park & Preserve
The early bird gets the worm, and the early risers get an empty trail! On our third day, we aimed for an early start to the day to conquer the Mount Healy Overlook hike. The 7 miles with over 2,700 feet of elevation was an energizing kick in the pants. Being from Florida, one of the most amazing sights was how the mountains just seemed to stretch forever. This felt especially true from our elevated perch. Once we made it to the top, it was hard to leave.
Once we made our descent, we headed straight for the Morino Grill. As the only restaurant in the park, they run the monopoly on sustenance for hungry hikers. The menu has all the hearty staples, so there’s bound to be something to hit the spot– especially since they maintain gluten free and vegan options.
After lunch, we headed over to meet the Denali sled dogs. Alaska maintains steeped in its traditional roots, and sled dogs are an essential part of that culture. The temperature of the winter can make machinery unreliable, but the dogs thrive in the cold. They also have the intuition a snowmobile lacks, which becomes life-saving in a white out or when avoiding dangerous ice. It’s an honor to meet the eager working dogs that make the park what it is.
Rafting Around
Once we’d had our fill of mountainous hikes and sled dog snuggles, we headed down to Denali Raft Adventures for some white water rafting. Even in the summer everyone suits up in drysuits. Despite the warm temperatures during the day, the Nenana River stays a chilly 38 degrees. While things do heat up in the summer months, this causes the glacier and snow to melt, and the subsequent runoff is just as icy as you’d imagine.
Our family certainly welcomes a reasonable adventure, but we also aren’t a wiley group of adrenaline junkies, so the portion of the river we rafted was mostly class II and III rapids. It was perfect!! We had such fun paddling together and riding through the rapids. This is due in large part to our guide Kyle– he was truly outstanding!! Best rafting guide I’ve ever had. If you want to try white water rafting, but are a bit hesitant, this is a perfect group and river to try it on. It’s so engaging, with abundant, gorgeous views from the river.
Dinner Please
Afterwards, we found ourselves at Prospector’s Pizza for dinner. Parched from our day’s adventures, our server was rather impressed (or overwhelmed) with our abundant water consumption, so he brought out a carafe of water for each of us. Tasty pizza and excellent service from Frankie!!
Day 4
On the Road Again
Before we departed Denali, we swung by Black Bear Coffee House and discovered this hustling coffeehouse just might be the hub of this sleepy mining town! Not only do they serve a reliably good coffee, but they also offer a heavenly selection of gluten free and dairy free breakfast treats. An excellent morning pick-me-up!
The drive down to Talkeetna takes a couple hours, but drives seem to go by quickly with alluring scenery stretching out in front of you. Talkeetna is small, but it has a quaint collection of restaurants and shops spread out over a few blocks. We had some time, so we walked around a bit. The soups at Denali Brewpub were above-averagely delicious, as were the salmon burgers at the food truck next door.
Flying High
We made it to our appointment at Talkeetna Air Taxi just in time. Air taxi seems like an understatement… passage to a mystical mountain feels a bit more appropriate. Oh my goodness, your eyes won’t leave the window pane. Due to Denali’s elevation of over 20,000 feet, cloud coverage can disrupt the magnificent views from afar. When you’re in a plane, you’re afforded a more personal glimpse of this giant beauty. Not only is the mountain beyond immense, it is humbling to see hikers at base camp looking like small, colorful sprinkles on the expanse of white snow below.
After flying around for a bit, we actually landed on the glacier. That’s right, landed on a glacier. We were lucky enough to experience a myriad of amazing experiences during our trip, but this one easily makes the top five. It is truly amazing to have small moments to take in nature’s magnitude, and standing on an ancient glacier in the middle of the Alaska Range is certainly one of them. Guaranteed to be an experience you don’t regret and always remember. Depending on the pilot, one lucky rider gets to ride in the co-pilot seat, so be sure to speak up if you’re interested!
Pro tip: Even if you don’t usually get nauseous on plane rides, it’s not a bad idea to take some non-drowsy Dramamine before hand. We were rather surprised when half of us experienced vary degrees of nausea. This had nothing to go with the pilot’s flying— it was just an unexpected observation.
Back in Anchorage
The second leg of driving is another couple hours to make it back down to Anchorage. Making it back just in time for dinner, we snagged a table at Spenard Roadhouse. They recently revamped their menu, and we only have good tidings and empty plates to report back. After everyone was full, we headed to the Four Points by Sheraton and blissfully drifted off for the night.
Day 5
The Alaska Railroad
Riding on the Alaska Railroad is not only an amazing way to enjoy sightseeing, but it also carries a most charming nostalgic touch. With an array of destinations to choose from, we enjoyed coastal views on our way down to Seward. Leaving from Anchorage, our departure time was 6:45am, but they ask you to arrive about an hour early to ensure everyone has enough time to collect their tickets. The train ride lasted about four and a half hours, putting out arrival time in Seward right around 11:15 am.
We splurged a bit to be in the “gold star” section of the train, which provided access to an awesome open air viewing platform on the second floor of the train. The train ride would have been awesome regardless, but being able to experience the wind in your hair, one step closer to nature made this an unforgettable experience. Gold star perks also included two complimentary alcoholic drinks as well as breakfast in the reserved gold-star-only dining car. It was a truly lovely, nostalgic way to travel.
The Seward Sights
Once you’re in Seward, you have a few options. Due to its proximity to the Kenai Fjords National Park, you’re going to find a plethora of different tour options. Major Marine offers a 4-hour wildlife cruise that works perfectly with the train schedule. It departs at 12:30pm and returns at 4:30pm.
We actually looped back to Seward at the end of our trip, so we saved the cruise and headed down to the Alaska Sealife Center. This multifaceted hub is home to a research clinic as well as an aquarium of sorts. Not only is it fun to see arctic aquatic life up close and personal, but they also have a two-finger-touch tank to allow kids and adults alike an up-close experience with nature.
Good Eats
If you’re feeling a bit peckish, you have loads of restaurants to choose from. The Lone Chicharron Taqueria is going to have some fantastic tacos, while Gold Rush Bistro boasts an impressive bowl of clam chowder. Sweet Darlings has chocolates and gelato that are guaranteed to satisfy your sweet tooth. If you’re looking to crack open a cold one, Seward Brewing Company is an awesome local craft brewery.
Sampling different restaurants was easy because Seward is pretty compact. The main populus of the city stretches about a mile and a half long and is rather walkable. However, if you struggle with mobility impairments, Seward has a free shuttle to aid in transportation (and exploration!).
Historic Roots
The Iditarod is a nationally recognized race that has been taking place in Alaska for almost a century. Prior to being a race, the National Iditarod Historic Trail was used to transport mail and supplies from steamships into more interior communities. You can find the old Mile Marker 0 near the sealife center, with Resurrection Bay in the backdrop. If you’re interested in the roots of the iconic race, there’s a handful of statues and placards to read.
Before we left, we stopped by the Seward Museum (located in the community library), to learn more about the local history. An excellent stop any time, but especially if you’re looking for something to do on a rainier day. Departure time back to Anchorage was at 6pm, and the return trip is just a little shorter, with arrival back in Anchorage at 10:15pm. If you’re looking to get back a little faster, there’s also an option to take a coach bus back. Our dad is a train aficionado, so we knew he would love the train rides, but the Alaska Railroad was actually a top five favorite adventure from the trip for all of us. We highly recommend it!
A few notes
If you’re doing a shorter trip and looking to avoid renting a car, the train is an excellent alternate mode of transportation. They are able to transport luggage.
Additionally, since we were planning to drive around most of the Kenai Peninsula, the destination of the train ride was less important than the qualitative aspects of the train ride itself. If you’re thinking you want to ride the train to a city not on the itinerary, you could always take the train to Whittier. Alternatively, you could take the train up to Denali and back and rent a car for Kenai exploration once you return. The options are many— you can see a full list of depot locations here.
Day 6
After waking up rather early the day before, we enjoyed a nice restful morning, packed our bags, and hit the road. It didn’t take long to make it to Portage Lake, where we hopped on a Portage Glacier boat tour. The tour lasts about an hour and is narrated throughout. While we were out there, we watched a huge piece of the glacier calve off into the water below. They also had a chunk of glacier ice aboard the boat, so anyone interested in taste-testing a glacier could give it a try!
Reindeer, Bison, and Bears— Oh My!
We headed to the Alaskan Wildlife Conservation Center next, which is best described as Fantastic Beasts and Where to Find Them meets Alaskan wilderness. Alaska is home to such unique wildlife. While you will certainly encounter some wild animals as you explore, it’s a pretty awesome experience to see such large animals up close. There are bison, coyotes, reindeer, lynx, musk ox, black bears, brown bears, and elk… just to name a few!
A looped path leads you to the various enclosures, but most of the animals can be seen from a gravel road. This allows mobility impaired visitors to enjoy the animals as well. While it’s impossible to replicate an animal’s home environment, the conservatory does an excellent job providing large enclosures, with acres and acres of space for animals to roam. We stood less than three feet away from a brown bear (with a fence between us), and it was beyond thrilling. Definitely worth your time to stop and check it out.
Dinner with a View
Upon arrival in Girdwood, we unloaded at the Carriage House, changed, and headed off in search of food. The Seven Glacier Restaurant at the Alyeska Resort isn’t just dinner, it’s fine dining! Perched at the top of Mount Alyeska, this culinary experience is a reflection of the luxury the Alyeska Resort is known for. If you’re interested in eating here, it’s ideal to make your reservation in advance, because the tram ride up to the restaurant is complimentary this way ($38/person otherwise).
The namesake of the restaurant are the seven glaciers visible from its vantage point, but you will also love taking in the Turnagain Arm and the endless peaks of the Chugach mountains. Not only was the food and service impeccable, but the views were amazing as well.
Day 7
Dog Sledding
Our time in Alaska was filled with so many incredible adventures, but our jaunt with Alpine Air Alaska might just have been my favorite. We all loaded up into helicopters, and headed out to Punchbowl Glacier. Having never ridden in a helicopter before, it was a bit of a surreal experience. It’s wild to just be lifted straight up into the air! The ride to the glacier was short, but exceptionally beautiful. When we landed we were immediately greeted by eager little puppies. We got to walk around and meet all the puppies before we loaded up and took off on our mushing adventure.
The mushing dogs were a bit smaller than expected but they were so excited to get out after it. These dogs are used in the Iditarod Race, so they train to run at an endurance pace of 8-10mph. This past year, they ran for Gerhardt Thiart. Before the helicopter came to fetch us, we had a chance to talk to him about his experience running the Iditarod. This in and of itself was an amazing opportunity. All in all, it is truly a once in a lifetime experience to ride on a sled in the middle of a glacier, only accessible by helicopter, pulled by eight energetic puppies.
The Girdwood Scoop
The Bake Shop makes for a tasty lunch. A perfect stop if you have a hankering for soups, sandwiches or cinnamon rolls! Once you’re full of sustenance, there’s a handful of local hikes to explore. The Virgin Creek Falls hike is super short to a lovely waterfall, while the Winner Creek hike is a bit longer stretch to enjoy nature. If you’re looking to crack open a cold one after your hike, Girdwood Brewing Company is the spot of choice.
Our abode at the Carriage House was rather convenient for a few reasons. It’s certainly nice to eat out and have someone else do the cooking and cleaning up, but sometimes it’s nice to just make a meal at home. The full kitchen set-up gave us the space and tools to make meals with ease. The location was also rather convenient to go on a nice post-dinner walk. You can’t beat the scenery in Alaska!
Day 8
On our eighth morning, we packed our things and hit the road… Homer or bust! As is any given drive in Alaska, it was rather scenic, and we pulled off whenever anything struck our fancy to stop and look. With small bladders and endlessly hungry stomachs, we found the Safeway in Soldotna to be an excellent spot for a bathroom and snack break along the way.
The Scoop on ‘The Spit‘
Homer is a charming seaside town, and the most endearing part of the town was the Homer Spit. The spit is a long, thin peninsula of land that stretches out into the Kachemak Bay. Our hotel in Homer was the Land’s End Resort, at the very end of the Spit. We felt it was perfectly located to walk up and wander around all of the shops about a half mile away. And wander we did!
We had a tapas-style lunch, sharing entrees at various restaurants to sample the wide variety of options. Make no mistake, this is definitely a touristy area, but the shops had high quality locally goods and wares, as opposed to some of the usual cheap knick-knacks found in tourist shops. Of all the places we wandered through, Carmen’s Gelato was the family favorite. We found ourselves stopping by at least once (if not twice) every day we were in Homer!
We finished the day with dinner at the Fresh Catch Cafe, and boy was the food delicious. Kayla maintains a gluten-free and vegan diet, so often it was difficult to find non-salad or french fry meals for her, but they had an amazing curry that fit her dietary needs. Not only was her curry delicious, but they served one of the best fish and chip meals we ate all trip (and we sampled a bunch). The restaurant is on the smaller side, so if you have a big group, it’s not a bad idea to call ahead.
Day 9
Halibut Fishing
Homer is known to be an excellent spot for Halibut fishing, so if you enjoy the thrill of a day spent out on the boat reeling ‘em in, you’re going to want to find a fishing charter. Salvador and Kate spent the day out with Bob’s Trophy Charter, and this was Kate’s favorite adventure of the trip. With two guides and four other chartered fish-persons, there was a nice camaraderie to the group, without feeling overcrowded. Everyone bagged out for halibut and rockfish, taking home as much fish as possible!
Out & About
For those that didn’t go fishing, it was a day of exploration. The spit stretches on for a couple miles, so it made for a lovely morning walk route. The Homer Farmer’s Market is more centrally located, but we wandered up there and sampled some tasty coffee, cookies, popcorn, and Indian food. Kayla happened upon a honey stand that actually led us to our next stop.
Stoked Honey is a small, local honey farm that offers fun interactive tours of their property. After we were all honeyed out, we drove up to Homer Overlook Point to take in the Kachemak Bay from an elevated vantage point. I don’t think it would ever get old, looking out and seeing the stretches of water with the mountains on the horizon.
There’s a few spots on the Spit that will cook your catch for you, but Captain Pattie’s was an easy choice. They will cook your fish however you request and everyone gets their choice of side as well. Dinner is served family style, so everyone can pick and choose what they want. We had some outstanding seafood during our trip, but nothing compared to our freshly caught dinner. So delicious!!
Day 10
The Kenai River Fest was in Soldotna when we were passing through, so we stopped by to check it out for an hour or so. We also highly, highly recommend stopping by the Safeway for groceries while you are in Soldotna. “Real” grocery stores are few and far between in more rural parts of the Kenai, so be sure to have all your essentials before you head out into a food desert.
Cooper’s Landing is a great spot in the heart of salmon fishing season. Repeat, this is a great spot for people interested in doing some salmon fishing. If you’re all in on fishing, then Cooper’s Landing and more specifically, the Salmon Run Lodge is a great fisherman’s stay. The rustic log cabin was basic but roomy, and it had a full kitchen as well as a grill to make cooking a breeze. Additionally, they can help secure your fishing licenses and set up a salmon fishing excursion. As a bonus, the closest thing this town has to a grocery store is steps away!
For a small town, the Cooper’s Landing Brewing doesn’t mess around. Not only are their beers good, but they also have a nice outdoor seating area. Getting hungry? The Rod and Reel restaurant at the Kenai Princess Wilderness Lodge is just down the road and will have some tasty options for dinner, with views of the Kenai River in the backdrop. If you’re looking for a nice post-dinner walk, there’s walking trails near the lodge, waiting to be explored.
Day 11
Five Fab Fisherwomen
Rise and shine for an earlyyy morning on the river. The early bird may get the worm, but you have to be a really early riser to snag prime real estate for fishing. Our fishing guides came to pick us up at 4:45am, so we could be launching our boats by 5am. While the sun is certainly shining this early, that does not guarantee warmth! Salmon fishing is usually done in the water, and our fly-fishing was no exception.
We were a mixed bag of fishing experiences, but all of us loved the exciting thrill of catching a fish and reeling it in. There’s something about standing knee-deep in the river, fly-fishing your heart out, that makes you think “oh man, this is the Alaska fishing experience”. To make it even more surreal, we had a black bear come wander over to the waters edge to assess our fish situation. So crazy to see a wild bear— only in Alaska!
You may not think of packing your wool socks for a summertime trip, but your feet will get cold after a couple hours in the river!
Half Day vs Full Day
Due to the early morning start, a full day of fishing runs from 5am to 1pm, whereas a half day only goes to 9am. If you are a dedicated fisherman, you will want the whole day. We were moderately dedicated, and did a full day of fishing. We actually split the day into two experiences. In the morning, we learned how to salmon fish, and in the afternoon, we learned how to fish for trout!
If you’re thinking you want to give fishing a try for the heck of it, but are worried about your little piggies getting cold, the half day will be perfect for you! If you are stoked to get out and catch as many fish as you’re allotted, the full day will feel like it went by too fast. Regardless of how long you plan to be out on the water, remember to bring snacks!
Fresh Caught Dinner
When our “full day” of fishing finished around 1pm, we were all ready for an afternoon nap. Once our stomachs started getting hungry, we grilled up some of the salmon we caught! It was a perfect meal to share after all of our hard work. A gravel sidewalk across the street from our lodge made for a scenic evening walk to end the day.
Day 12
Flight-Seeing
On the twelfth day of our Alaskan adventure, we headed over to Moose’s Pass for a float plane tour with Scenic Mountain Air. Due to the size of the planes, we went up in two separate groups, and we were surprised at some of the different things we saw. The hour-long jaunt explored the south-central Kenai Peninsula. From our vantage point, we were able to see the Harding Icefield, Bear Glacier Lagoon, the Chugach Mountains, endless lakes and waterfalls, as well as a handful of wildlife sightings. Pictures cannot even begin to capture the beauty of this pristine, immense wilderness!
On the Hunt for Views
In the afternoon, we headed out for a bit of a wilderness adventure. Not far from Cooper’s Landing, the Skilak Lake Road Wilderness Drive is an 18-mile-long loop gravel road, known to be a good locale for spotting wildlife. Along the road, there’s a couple different places to pull off and hike. We took the Hidden Creek Trail to Skilak Lake, and were rather relieved that we didn’t run into any large wild animals while we were hiking. Late afternoon was a perfect time to go hiking, but if you wanted to see wildlife along the looped path, you would be better off going early in the morning, before the day’s traffic has started up.
While we didn’t see any wildlife on the drive, on our way back, we saw bears playing in the river along the side of the road. It was so worth making the effort to get out and enjoy nature. Seeing the bears playing the river together was one of the most simply amazing moments from our trip. A quintessential example of the nature Alaska is known for.
Day 13
Whatever Floats Your Boat
Heading out to the final city on our road-trip town, we hit the road for Seward. The drive went smoothly, and our luck continued when we were able to check into our hotel early and drop our bags off.
We had just enough time before our boat tour to swing by Safeway for some snacks and sandwiches. We moseyed on over to the dock, and made it to our Kenai Fjords Wildlife Cruise with time to spare. The setup on the boat was relaxing as each group was assigned to a “home base” table that they could store their things at and use as they pleased. In addition to the tables, there was ample space inside and on the decks for people to observe as they pleased.
We enjoyed a four hour tour from 12:30pm-4:30pm. We felt this was the perfect amount of time to see glaciers, fjords, and an outstanding breadth of wildlife. Our favorites were the puffins, humpback whales, seals, and mischievous otters.
Kayaking Queens
You can’t spend all day on the water if you don’t stay out into the evening! We suited up for a dusk kayaking trip to Bridal Veil Waterfall. Initially, it was almost intimidating to be out in the bay in such a tiny boat, but it was immensely serene to feel so small in the magnitude of nature’s magnitude. The interaction with nature is so much more intimate, with curious harbor seals popping their heads up a couple feet from our kayaks, checking out what we were up to.
We got to cruising and made it to our hiking spot in good time. The “hike” itself was more of a short, rugged walk to a pretty waterfall. It was nice to stretch our legs and reach a spot available only to supreme adventurers! Since we had already established our rhythm, we were a well oiled machine on our way back. The tour ran from 7pm to 10:30pm, so we were beyond pooped by bedtime!
A few notes
We didn’t have much guidance regarding attire for the kayaking trip, so we want to give you a leg up. You will not receive a drysuit for this aquatic adventure, so we recommend bringing your rain jacket and most waterproof pair of pants along.
While you won’t get soaked, the rain jacket keeps the water dripping off your paddle from progressively water-logging your sleeves (even in the summer, you will likely still want long sleeves on). You will have a kayak skirt on to keep a majority of the water out, but waterproof-ish pants will keep you comfy if some water infiltrates your skirt. Make sure you cinch that skirt up as high on your torso as you can!!
Day 14
Kenai Fjords National Park
Kenai Fjords National Park is the beloved backyard of Seward. Having already appreciated the park from above during our float plane tour, we were excited to explore with our boots on the ground. The hiking options in the park are limited to the Exit Glacier Overlook Trail and the Harding IceField Trail
Basically your hiking options are very easy or very challenging. We went hiking as a family, and decided on the two mile hike to Exit Glacier.
If you arrive at the park around 10am or 2pm, park rangers lead walking “tours” along the Glacier Overlook trail. While the 2.2 miles of trail doesn’t take that long to hike, they provide additional commentary and insight regarding the park, evolution of the glacier, and local preservation.
No advanced registration is needed, and there’s no cost associated with the walking educational opportunity.
The Kenai Fjords Visitors Center won’t be found on the park premises, but within the city of Seward itself. We stayed right across the street at the Gateway Hotel, which was beyond convenient to get our national park passports stamped and snag any park stickers we wanted. I also enjoyed chatting with a park ranger before we went to the park, to ensure I had a reasonable game plan before we left.
Shop ‘Til You Drop
While all of the hikes and activities are delightful, sometimes it’s nice to have some down time to wander and explore. Seward has a myriad of shops to meander through. While many of these places are certainly geared towards tourists, they offer a wide variety of goods from local small businesses and vendors. It’s always preferable when tourism money can be kept local! With Resurrection Bay as the backdrop, it’s easy to spend a couple hours walking through the city.
For being a small town, Seward has quite the collection of restaurants to choose from. We landed at the HighLiner Restaurant for dinner, and actually celebrated an early Father’s Day for our dad. With all of us living in different places, it was nice to share one final, delicious dinner all together.
Day 15
Departure day always seems to arrive too quickly. Depending on what time your flight is, you might have time for a bit more adventure. Since construction traffic can be unpredictable, it’s best to head back up towards Anchorage sooner rather than later. The drive felt like it went by pretty quickly— the silver lining to any drive in Alaska is that the scenery is guaranteed to be beautiful.
Once you’re back in Anchorage, you have some options for final explorations. The Anchorage Trolley Tour was far more interesting and informative than we originally expected. It was a cheeky, fun way to both see and experience Alaska’s biggest city. We ran out of time to visit the Anchorage Museum, but this would be an especially worthwhile stop for anyone interested in the ancestral heritage aspects of Alaskan culture.
The day goes by all too quickly, and before you know it, it’s time to head to the airport!
Things to Know Before You Go
Logistics
If you’re planning on doing a bunch of driving, an app like GasBuddy can be helpful to maximize your economy on gas prices. When we were leaving Homer we almost just filled up before we left, but Salvador found a gas station 20 minutes up the road that saved us 50¢ per gallon! We were driving two cars (one of which was a truck), so it was nice to not have wasted money unnecessarily!
Due to the long season of darkness and winter weather, the summer months are for getting construction work done. While we didn’t run into any schedule-ruining traffic, they are common in the summertime– especially as more and more tourists begin to fill the roads. We always left earlier than was necessary to account for the potential back-ups.
There’s a running joke that the mosquito is the state bird of Alaska. You won’t regret packing some bug spray or some light layers to keep your skin bite-free.
It may sound a little silly, but keep an eye on the clock for dinner! With long daylight hours and an action packed schedule, it’s easy for the day to get away from you. If you have a hankering for dinner at 9:15pm on a Tuesday night, your options will start whittling down quickly!
While we are all about supporting local small businesses and grocery stores, some towns in Alaska just don’t have them. It’s not like the Kenai Peninsula is a wilderness frontier, but stores like Walmart or Safeway aren’t as abundant as you may be used to. If you are a notorious snacker, be sure to stock up on your favorite treats whenever you’re in a “bigger” area.
Getting Your Catch Home
Don’t pay an arm and a leg to ship your fish home!! If you go fishing in Alaska and want to take your catch back with you, it may be more feasible than you think. Whatever city you’re fishing in has a processing company that will clean, filet, package, and flash-freeze your fish. When you pick it up, it will be packaged in a cardboard box with enough gel packs to keep your fish secure and frozen. This box is a perfect size to be a checked bag on your flight home.
If you are fishing at the end of your trip, you can just pick the fish up from the processing company right before you leave town. If you arrive at the airport early there’s a “valet” service at the airport that lets you keep your fish cold if you want to spend one last afternoon bopping around.
When you plan to fish at multiple towns throughout your trip, you just need to call ahead to your subsequent accommodations to ensure they have freezer space available for your catch. There may be a nominal cost to keep your fish frozen but this is a worthy investment! Sending about 50lbs of fish home will run you at least $450, if you do it through a company such as this one. There’s nothing wrong with that, and sometimes the convenience is certainly worth it! Inversely, we only paid about $100 per box to send our fish back home. Just a nifty “hack” to know about!
the wildest, wildest West
If you fancy time spent in the outdoors, nature’s magnitude, and an environment completely contrary to the norm, Alaska should be at the very top of your bucket list. It was amazing to enjoy a small part of this incredibly beautiful state.
Alaska is so huge, it can sometimes be difficult to decide where to visit. If you’re thinking you’re more keen to explore the Fairbanks to Valdez route, check out our 7-Day Camping Road Trip in Alaska.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Arches National Park is home to over 2,000 arches as well as a myriad of other astounding feats of nature. Conveniently placed near Moab, outdoor enthusiasts of all backgrounds find themselves drawn to explore the curious rock formations. Whether you’re planning an Arches-only trip or hitting up all the parks in Utah, you won’t regret adventuring to Moab and discovering the wild west that Arches showcases with such grandeur.
Not only are the various arrays of arches just incredible to see and stand under, but the views from the park, with the La Sal mountains in the backdrop, are astounding as well. Arches National Park is an incredible testament to the power and simple beauty of nature.
Fast Facts About Arches National Park
Size: 76,519 acres
Visitors: 1,806,865 (data from 2021)
Highest elevation: 5,653 feet at Elephant Butte
Distance from Moab: 13 miles — 20 minutes
Distance from Salt Lake City Airport: 240 miles — 4 hour drive
National Park Initiation: November 12th, 1971
While you could totally spend a week in Moab, between Arches, Canyonlands, and all the other fun Moab is known for, one or two days planned specifically for Arches National Park is enough to hit the highlights and feel like you robustly experienced the park. We tend to enjoy an action packed day, so the ideal itinerary might vary from person to person. Fitness level, time of year, and one’s desired Arches bucket list are all going to be factors that dictate just how long you should allot for this astounding and fantastic park. Below we have detailed how to ensure you are allowed into the park, our favorite hikes, the best spots to stargaze, and the scoop on camping in the park— as well as a handful of tips and tricks to ensure you have the best time.
Securing Your Timed Entry
Where to start? Let’s make sure you make it in the door! From 2009 to 2019, visitation to Arches grew over 66 percent, with most people arriving during the same peak hours each day. Due to this influx, the park has integrated an initiative to spread arrivals out (from 7am to 4pm) from April 1st – October 31st. The aim of the timed entry program is not to reduce the quantity of individuals visiting the park but to more evenly disperse their arrival throughout the day.
What exactly does timed entry mean? Prospective park visitors can reserve a 1 hour slot in which they will enter the park. These openings range from 7am-8am to 4pm-5pm. It is important to arrive at the park within your window otherwise your entry may be denied. Taking a last minute trip and worried you won’t be able to get in? Additional tickets are made available at 6pm MDT the calendar day prior. If you are having technical difficulties and are unable to secure any timed entry tickets, your other option would be arriving at the park before 6am or after 5pm.
Hike It Out
We actually almost skipped the Delicate Arch Hike because we thought it would be overcrowded, and I am so grateful we didn’t. While the park is home to a myriad of arches, Delicate Arch just might be the most iconic. Not only is Delicate Arch massively impressive, but the La Sal Mountains in the backdrop make it a beyond picturesque view. My favorite moment in the park was standing under Delicate Arch, looking out at the mountains. If you only have time for one hike, this should be it!
The Devil’s Garden Hike is quite the catch-all trail as it leads to an array of different arches. We utilized this trail to go all the way down to the Double O Arch, stopping at the Dark Arch, Landscape Arch, and Navajo Arch along the way. The viewpoints were certainly beautiful, but this hike was worth doing just for the views of the horizon. We also found some of the climbing and scrambling to be fun and adventurous.
It cannot be said enough, be sure you pack yourself enough water. Due to the long, unshaded nature of this trail, going earlier in the day is especially advisable, but if you are hiking in the afternoon, ensure you are prepared.
Campgrounds
Devils Garden Campground is the only campground available at Arches National Park. As such, its busy season is quite busy, and the 51 campsites go like hotcakes. Campsites can be reserved up to six month in advance between March 1 and October 31. In the low season, campsites are available on a first-come, first-serve basis. Campground facilities include drinking water, picnic tables, grills, and everyone’s favorite… flush toilets!
Hankering for a Snack
There is no lodge or restaurant in Arches, so be sure to bring along all the snacks and meals you might need. Arches’ close proximity to Moab makes tracking down sustenance daily easy. Grocery stores like City Market are the perfect way to make sure you have everything you need before embarking on your adventure. When you’re done exploring, nothing hits the spot like a cold treat on a hot day. There’s a handful of tasty-looking shops, but we can confirm that Moab Frozen Yogurt is a delightful little dessert desert oasis.
Starry Eyed
On a clear night, you can see the stars almost anywhere in the park. Areas off the main road prevent the headlights or people coming and going affecting your night vision and photographs. The farther north you drive into the park, the darker the sky will be. We initially drove to the Petrified Dunes Viewpoint but found the light pollution from Moab to be disruptive, so we hopped in the car and drove a bit farther to the Balance Rock picnic area.
While these points aren’t terribly far from one another, it made a huge difference in visibility. The best spots to stargaze are at Balance Rock, just past Balance Rock at either the Windows section or the Garden of Eden, and at Panorama Point.
If you have a flashlight or headlamp with a red light setting, bring it along! White lights can be harmful to your night vision, but the red lights are much more gentle. This is also respectful to any photographers out trying to capture pictures of the stars. Due to the long exposure necessary to photograph the stars, extraneous white light can be disruptive. If you have any star identification apps, they may be able to help you find constellations as well as the Milky Way.
As a note, Canyonlands National Park is about 45 minutes away from Moab, and therefore the light pollution of Moab. If you are a night owl with the evening flexibility, the stars will be even more amazing at its gold-tier International Dark Sky status.
How are Arches Made?
To be considered one of the park’s 2,000+ official stone arches, an opening of at least three feet must exist. This hole can stretch in any one direction, and there’s no requirement for width. For this reason, many of the arches in the park are so narrow, you might walk right past them as though it’s just a small hole in a stone.
The rock that makes up much of Arches is different layers of sandstone. Water takes advantage of cracks in rock surfaces and wears the sandstone down into fins. The park only receives 8-10 inches of precipitation per year. This doesn’t sound like much, but if the park were to receive too much more rain, the sandstone would potentially erode so quickly that the arches wouldn’t be able to form. The rain and snow that fall at Arches is a perfect quantity to erode the underlying rock at a sustainable pace to create the gorgeous sandstone arches.
The picture below are from the Arches Visitor Guide, which provides a more thorough explanation. If you have any additional questions about arches or any other geological features, be sure to ask a park ranger. We happened upon one whilst out on the Devils Garden trail, and found she was a wealth of information regarding various questions we had accumulated along our hike.
Pets
Everyone loves their furry friend, but pets can be quite disruptive upon entry into a new ecosystem. For this reason, pets must be on a leash 6 feet or less, and owners are responsible for picking up after their pet all areas in the park. The only places pets are welcome is on established roads or in parking areas as well as in the campgrounds and picnic areas. They are not allowed on any other trails, overlooks, wilderness areas, or in public buildings in Arches. (Service animals are the exception to these location restrictions.)
If you are going to be out hiking for any length of time, you should ensure you have packed sufficient water. Doing a longer trail? It’s never a bad idea to pack a snack or two to ensure you can keep up your stamina. If you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly on an empty stomach.
Get out early to avoid the heat of the day and the crowds. If you are an early bird, the earlier the better to afford you a bit more tranquility in the park and perhaps a stunning sunrise view. For any and all that do their best work in the afternoon, heading to the park around 3pm or 4pm will allow you to miss both the strongest UV rays of the day as well as all the morning park-goers.
Come Prepared
Pack your sunscreen… and perhaps a hat as well. Even if you are getting after it before the sun has reached its peak, the rays are strong, and sustained exposure will leave you burned!
Layers, layers, layers!! Despite the scorching hot temperatures during the day, the early mornings and evenings can still be quite chilly– plus the temperature can vary by elevation or lack of sun exposure (i.e. deep in a canyon). Even when visiting the summer, be sure to pack a few warmer layers!
A walking stick or trekking poles are never a bad idea. These are beneficial for any hike, but I was especially grateful to have mine when hiking Devil’s Garden!
While all national parks are home to outstanding feats of nature, Arches is perhaps the most uniquely mysterious. While science has a perfectly logical explanation as to how arches are formed, it still feels like nothing short of a miracle to stand under Delicate Arch, looking up. We hope you have a chance to make it out west and enjoy Arches in all its glory.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Zion was Utah’s first national park, and its luster has endured as it continues to be the most visited park in Utah as well as one of the most visited parks in the national parks system, with over 5 million visits each year. This 148,016 acre park has range, with abounding hikes for all difficulty levels as well as canyoneering, rafting, and rock climbing. Whether you’re planning a Zion-only trip or hitting up all the parks in Utah, you won’t regret spending two unforgettable days exploring the diverse topography and wilderness that make this vast park the crown jewel of Utah’s illustrious parks department.
Not only is the canyon astounding, but there are so many adventures to be had! There’s not many guarantees in life, but Zion Canyon is almost assuredly guaranteed to knock your socks off and leave you saying “WOAH“. How long do you need to take it all in? It depends on how full you want your days! Two days is enough to explore the park and leave feeling like you have an appreciation for the diverse wonders of Zion. Those will be two full days though!!!
Fast Facts About Zion National Park
Size: 232 square miles
Visitors: 5,039,835 visitors annually (data from 2021)
Distance from St. George Airport: 45 miles — 1 hour drive
Distance from Las Vegas Airport: 170 miles — 3 hour drive
National Park Initiation: November 19th, 1919 by President Woodrow Wilson
Zion is truly one of our favorite national parks. You can see pictures and have some appreciation for the magnitude, but there’s nothing quite like going and experiencing it for yourself. While all land protected by the National Park Service is important and beautiful in its own way, some parks are just most engaging to visit than others. Sometimes spending just an afternoon wandering around is enough to wet your beak and feel as though you saw the gist. That will not be enough at Zion!!!
Below we have detailed all of our favorite hikes, where to grab a bite, how-to’s for navigating transportation, where to bunk down, and beautiful drives— as well as all the tips and tricks that will ensure you have the best time.
When to Visit
Best time to visit is approximately from the end of May through June and September into early November. The weather gets so hot in July and August, it becomes hard to maximize your outside time. If you visit too early into the spring, you might not be able to do one of the most amazing hikes, the Narrows, as melting snow increases the flow rate through the canyon making it unsafe for visitors. There’s certainly beauty to visiting in the dead of winter, it just makes for a completely different experience!
We visited Zion at the end of May and felt it was the perfect time of year to visit! All the hikes were open and weather was as perfect as it could be!
Packing Essentials
water bottle — make sure you fill it before every hike!!
snacks — if you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly. it’s never a bad idea to have a little extra sustenance… plus who doesn’t enjoy a little treat as they take in the views??
hiking backpack — an 8-15L hiking backpack is usually pretty lightweight and it’s a nice not to worry about carrying your water bottle, phone, and snacks
trekking poles — a walking stick or trekking poles are never a bad idea. These are beneficial for a multitude of hikes, especially if you would consider yourself a little on the de-trained side. even for fit individuals, some of the elevation climbs can be a kick in the pants!
hat — some of the trails have very minimal shade, so it’s never a bad idea to bring a little of your own
Layers, layers, layers — despite hot temperatures during the day, the early mornings and evenings can still be quite chilly– plus the temperature can vary by elevation or lack of sun exposure (i.e. deep in a canyon)
waterproof backpack (optional) — if you own one, bring it! one of the must-do hikes is pretty water immersive, so having a waterproof backpack is nice. alternatively, you could always put anything you don’t want soaked in a ziplock or drybag
canyoneering boots (optional) — these are recommended for one of the planned hikes. there’s options to rent a pair if you don’t own them. alternatively you can get your hiking boots or trail runners soaked— you will just want to ensure you’re able to have them dry by the next day!
The Shuttle Scuttle
To minimize traffic through the park in busy months a free shuttle services run from March to November both in the park itself and in the adjacent town of Springdale. Both shuttles have nine stops. The shuttle in the park takes visitors to various areas in the park itself, while the Springdale shuttle transports people staying or parking in town up to the park entrance.
The Springdale shuttle service is more necessary than one might think due to parking in Zion typically being full by 8-9am. In the months the shuttles are running, Zion Canyon Scenic Drive is closed to private vehicles, so using the shuttle system is the fastest way to maneuver through the park– unless you’re keen to rent a bike! There are a plethora of shuttles running, so one is never waiting too long for their ride. No tickets are issued. People simply fill the buses on a first come first serve basis.
Staying hydrated throughout the day is incredibly important. Water-bottle refilling stations can be found at Zion Canyon Line shuttle stops 1,2,5,6, and 9.
Catching Some Zzzzzzs
There are loads of accommodation options when you’re visiting Zion because Springdale is close enough that it makes for a convenient base camp. The only thing more convenient? Staying in the park! In-park accommodations tend to either be very economical (camping) or a little on the spendier side (lodge living). Either way you have lots of options to choose from— you can explore them all below. It’s worth noting, both camping and the lodges will fill up quickly. If you know this is where you want to stay, book sooner rather than later!
Watchman Campground
Watchman Campground is only a ¼ mile away from the South Entrance of the park. While tent and electric campsites are available year-round, group campsites are only available from March to November. Due to Zion’s illustrious draw, campsites fill up quickly and this campground requires reservations year-round. Mark your calendar if you’re keen to camp here because campsites become available six months in advance… and they will go fast!
South Campground
South Campground is similarly convenient in location, only a ½ mile from the South Entrance of the park. Available March through October, tent, dry RV, and group campsites are available by reservation. Making a reservation is important as this campground is routinely full. Taking a more spontaneous trip? These campsites become available for reservation 14 days in advance, so even if the Watchman campground is full months out, it’s possible to snag a gorgeous, centrally located campsite.
Both of these campgrounds are alongside the Virgin River. Be sure to stop by the Visitor Center upon arrival to check the water quality as bacteria blooms can be toxic.
Zion Lodge
The Zion Lodge is located in the middle of the park, placing guests in the heart of the excitement. The longstanding lodge can be found on the National Register of Historic Places as it was built in the 1920s and has withstood the test of time… and fire! Abounding in historical character, the Zion Lodge offers 76 rooms, six suites, and 40 cabins for visitors to choose from. We loved the historic character of our little cabin abode.
A huge perk of staying at the Zion Lodge is that you are permitted to drive on Zion Canyon Scenic Drive up to the Lodge (a restricted area to all other park visitors late spring through fall). This access is allotted via a code, which must be provided for gate entry. Why does this matter? If your Lodge reservation check-in is Monday at 4pm, but you wanted to arrive at the park and hike before your check-in time, you are able to park your car (for free) at the Lodge for that entire day. It is also super convenient to be able to come and go from the park as you please without reliance on the shuttle!
◁ DAY 1 ▷
If you’re going to Zion, crushing a few hikes is a must. The sandstone cliffs are as exhilarating to hike as they are gorgeous to observe. With over 90 miles of trails available to explore, the opportunities for exploration are endless. The first day will primarily be focused on hikes, so pack your good hiking socks and get excited!
Angels Landing
Starting your day on a high note… literally! While views abound throughout the park, there are a few hikes Zion is renowned for. The first of which is Angel’s Landing. This steep hike was once thought to be inaccessible to humans, hence its name. In the time since, it has become a well worn path, with chains for anxious hikers to hold onto as they make their accent.
Before you make it to the chains, you have to get through the wiggles— a series of switchbacks not toooo far before the viewpoint you hit before you make the climb up the chains.
Due to this trail’s popularity, crowding started to become an issue, so the park launched a lottery permit system for interested visitors to throw their hat in the ring. If you’re planning your trip in advance, this is something you will want to look into because the lottery system operates on windows. For example, if you plan to visit between March 1st – May 31st, the lottery is open January 1st – January 20th.
If you are one of the lucky ones in the lottery, try to snag one of the early morning time slots. Clocking in at a little under 2,000 ft of elevation, with varying amounts of exposure, this is not a hike I would be keen to start at 1pm.
For those that don’t win it big in the lottery, hiking to the Scout Lookout via West Rim Trail provides a pretty comparable view. If you are hiking all the way up to Angel’s Landing, you must start the hike in your given time window. For those hiking to Scout’s Lookout, we recommend getting an early start— especially if you are visiting in the summer months.
Lodge Lunch
The lodge is centrally located in the park at shuttle stop 5, but it’s also a pretty easy walk from the Angel’s Landing trailhead. The Red Rock Grill can be found within the lodge, and it makes for a perfect spot to rest your weary legs while you chow down, with a variety of delicious plate options. We both devoured 1/2 pound burgers after hiking Angel’s Landing, and I can honestly say a burger has never tasted better!
As another option, the Castle Dome Cafe serves coffee and light breakfast bites in the morning as well as burgers and hot dogs and french fries throughout the afternoon. Some local microbrews can be found in the beer cart on the cafe’s patio. It’s a breezy spot to hang out, or you can grab food to go and eat it out on the green in front of the lodge.
Watchman Trail
After a little rest and recovery, it’s time for another hike! Easy to access from the Visitor Center, the Watchman Trail is an excellent afternoon hike. The overlook at the top boasts 360 degree views, including Temples and Towers, the lower Zion Canyon, and Watchman Peak. The proximity to the Visitor Center is convenient to ensure bladders are empty and water bottles are full before departing. This trail has zero shade, which makes it a perfect choice for a late afternoon hike. As an alternative, the sweeping views of the canyon, make The Watchman an awesome sunset spot as well.
Zion Canyon Village
Just outside the entrance to the park, you will find the Zion Canyon Village. The Zion Canyon Brew Pub has both a restaurant as well as a beer garden area for weary hikers to rest their bones. This makes for a perfect spot to go grab a beer and rest a bit after a day full of hiking!
Just around the corner, Happy Camper Market is a small scale grocery store. They also have a wide array of sports drinks if you need a little post-hike hydration. We do recommend swinging by to grab a couple pre-made sandwiches— only if your have a way to keep them cold! The hike for day 2 stretches on 8-10 miles, so it’s recommended to pack a lunch. Grabbing it the night before just makes it even easier to get out early and hit the ground running in the morning!
◁ Day 2 ▷
Just when you think the views can’t get more astounding, it’s time to embark on a whole new round of jaw-dropping canyon views. Today’s highlights take you a bit deeper into the park, so get ready for some outdoor fun!
The Narrows
Arguably Zion’s most unique and iconic hike, the Narrows is an adventurous trek through the most narrow section of Zion Canyon. It feels surreal to hike through the gorge, with sandstone walls stretching up thousands of feet, but what makes this hike even more one-of-a-kind is that over half the trek is spent walking– or rather wading– through the Virgin River. In the spring, the melting snow can make the water flowing through the canyon too dangerous for hikers to endeavor, so be sure to check the flow rate to get an idea of the feasibility of going. The Narrows closes down if the river’s flow rate exceeds 150 cubic feet per second (CFS).
OOTD
Even when the conditions are right, you want to be dressed to impress. Depending on the time of year you might be able to get away with wearing your hiking boots or trail running in the river, but canyoneering boots are the shoe of choice for extra stability. Equipment rentals, such as Zion Outfitter, will provide canyoneering boots, neoprene socks, a wooden walking stick, and dry pants (as necessary). If you are considering doing any substantial portion of the water-trek, we highly recommend either packing or renting this gear as it can make or break your experience.
Zion Outfitter is in the Canyon Village area, just outside the park. They are pretty flexible and will let you pick up your equipment rental the evening before if you’re hoping to get out early the day of your hike!
Hike it Out
Most park visitors hike the Narrows bottom-up, and this does not require a permit. Hiking from the bottom up means starting at Temple of Sinawava (shuttle stop #9) and hiking as far as Big Spring. The beauty of the bottom-up hike is that there is no specific viewpoint you are hiking to, because hiking through the canyon itself is the view. This means you could spend an hour hiking or you could spend all day! A true choose-you-own-adventure kind of hike.
An early start to the day is advisable. Due to the popularity of this hike, it will get crowded. The silver lining is that even in the middle of the day, the farther you hike into the canyon, the less people you will see.
map via www.zionguru.com
We made it to right around where Wall Street end before we decided to turn around. On our way back, we detoured down towards Veiled Falls. We definitely got wet, but it was such an awesome day of trekking, exploring, and climbing around.
Be sure to check the weather before you go hiking– especially if you plan to hike a slot canyon, like the Narrows. Even little rain can be dangerous because water levels rise exponentially faster, making flash flooding a real risk. The National Weather Service monitors ten park areas in southern Utah for likelihood of flash flooding and issues each one a flash flood potential rating. Checking for likelihood of flooding as well as keeping an eye on imminent weather is super easy to do, and just might save your life!
Taking It Low & Slow
Time to give your legs a break! Many of Zion’s most popular hikes can be found along Zion Canyon Scenic Drive; however, this section of the park only makes up a portion of the national park. Directly after crossing over the Canyon Junction Bridge a left turn will lead to the limited access scenic drive; however, if you continue straight, the road becomes Zion Park Boulevard also known as the Mount Carmel Highway. This winding road leads to some absolutely breathtaking views of the canyon.
After a long (but fun!!) morning and afternoon hiking adventure, the slower pace of a beautiful drive is a most relaxing way to finish the day.
As an alternate option, the Lodge also offers narrated tram ride tours late spring through fall. These tours traverse Zion Canyon Scenic Drive, showcasing keystone areas of the park with a colorful commentary throughout. As a note, this tram ride differs from the free shuttle rides.
If you’re legs are still feeling strong and you’re more interested in pedaling around, bikes are available to rent mid-March through November. Safety first, safety always! When you rent a bike, it will also include a helmet, safety vest, and bike lock. Additionally, all bikes are conveniently equipped with a front basket, safety lights, and a bell, so you will be prepared for all situations!
Sunset & Stargazing
The Zion Human History Museum is just north of the Visitor Center, and its patio provides great sunset views overlooking Bridge Mountain and the East Temple. Once the sun has set, the patio continues to serve looks, with expansive night sky stretched out above you. If you’d rather take a stroll as you take in the heavens, the Pa’rus Trail is an excellent option for both sunset and star gazers. Canyon Junction Bridge was once a lovely spot to watch the sun set, but it now has signs up prohibiting pedestrian loitering (park rangers will patrol the area around sunset to make people move).
Despite all the rush of snagging a top notch sunset spot, Zion’s grandiose topography prevents visitors from actually watching the sun settle into the horizon. The sunset hour still affords enviable views as the cotton candy colored clouds and watercolor sky make for a gorgeous backdrop to the tangerine canyons as the sunlight fades.
Zion goes to lengths to preserve the dark night sky that makes for excellent stargazing. Due to this dedication, there is very minimal outdoor lighting to illuminate your path, after the sun sets. If you’re planning to be out after sunset, be sure to bring a flashlight with you.
views a long the Pa’rus Trail
They say a picture’s worth a thousand words, but no picture truly captures how immense Zion Canyon is. The national parks system protects some of the most beautiful niches of the country, and Zion is a crown jewel in this collection. Let us know what you think of this immense testament to nature’s grandeur.
Zion is one of five national parks in Utah. Be sure to check out Bryce Canyon, Arches, Capitol Reef, and Canyonlands as well, to truly appreciate all of the Utah national park topography!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Canyonlands National Park, a nearly 337,600 acre desert in southeastern Utah, is known for its rugged landscape carved by the Colorado and Green Rivers. As the largest national park in Utah, it boasts four distinct regions of the park, each with its own exceptional topography. With panoramic overlooks, towering spires, and a plethora of remote canyons scattered throughout, Canyonlands has range. Whether you’re planning a Canyonlands-only trip or hitting up all the national parks in Utah, you won’t regret exploring the unique landscape in this diverse desert wilderness: from mesas to mazes and everything in between.
Below we will detail the three districts of the park, the best hikes, beautiful drives, and some excellent camping options— plus some of our best tips and tricks for making the most of your time at Canyonlands!
Fast Facts About Canyonlands National Park
Size: 337,570 acres
Visitors: 733,996 visitors annually (data from 2019)
Highest elevation: 7,180 feet — Big Pocket in the Needles District
Distance from Moab: 30 miles — 35 minute drive
Distance from Salt Lake City: 250 miles — 4 hour drive
National Park Initiation: September 12, 1964 by President Lyndon B. Johnson
The Districts
Canyonlands has three separate districts that combine to form a truly diverse park— in addition to the two rivers that create the boundaries of each district (these rivers are considered a fourth district). Whether you’re excited to explore renown hikes or keen on a slice of remote silence, you’re sure to find adventure in this primitive desert ecosystem.
Island in the Sky
The ‘Island in the Sky’ district is aptly named as the mesa rests on a sandstone pedestal. Sheer cliffs elevate this district over 1,000 feet above the surrounding landscape. Island in the Sky is the most popularly visited district, largely due to its proximity to Moab.
Hikes & Sights
Whether you’re planning on spending a few hours here or a few days, there’s a myriad of overlooks and hikes to explore. The Mesa Arch Trail is a short, easy hike to a unique arch with a picturesque background. It also makes for a great spot to watch the sun rise! The Grand View Point Trail is an awe-inspiring hike with constant views for the entire nearly 2-mile hike. Similar in length and oftentimes less crowded, the White Rim Overlook Trail showcases a panorama of canyons with the La Sal mountains as a backdrop.
If you’re keen on mountain biking, the White Rim Road is an illustrious path for any biker up to the challenge. While the road can get rather steep and strenuous in some places, you will be afforded spectacular views in spades. The harder you work for it, the more rewarding it is!
For those with mobility-impairments that make long walks challenging, the Green River Overlook provides stunning perspective, without any wear and tear on the joints. Or perhaps take it all in from your car. Grand View Road stretches about 19 miles and makes for a meandering exploration of Canyonlands, coasting past many popular viewpoints!
Camping Out
There is no lodge in the park, so if you want to stay in the park, plan on camping. The Island in the Sky campground, Willow Flat, is open year-round and offers 12 sites, on a first-come, first-serve basis. Looking to get a room with a view? The gorgeous Green River Overlook is adjacent to the campsite. The nightly camping fee is a very reasonable $15 per site, and sites fill quickly in the spring, summer, and fall seasons. Campground amenities include toilets, picnic tables, and fire rings in the campground. While there is no water at the campground, drinking water can be found outside the visitor center.
The Needles
Exploration station
Needles makes up the southeast corner of Canyonlands. It is named for the colorful spires that proliferate this region of the park. This part of the park is best suited for visitors with a bit more time on their hands as it’s a bit further of a drive from Moab than Island in the Sky— farther, but worth the drive! The extensive trail system in this district offers abundant opportunities for day hikes and overnight trips. Driving up to the Big Spring Canyon Overlook is an easy way to check out the northern part of the district, while hiking the Chesler Park Viewpoint Trail is a breathtaking way to explore the more southern region.
Camping Out
The Needles Campground is open year-round and has 26 individual sites as well as 3 additional group sites. The nightly camping fee for an individual site is $20. Spring through fall, visitors can reserve individual sites and group sites, but the remainder of the year, these sites are first-come, first-served. This campground has toilets, picnic tables, and fire rings in the campground to facilitate your camping experience.
The Maze
You won’t find a Visitor Center in the Maze as this part of the park is remote and all roads are unpaved. A four-wheel-drive vehicle is a must if you want to come exploring out here. Bring your patience and best boy-scout skills, because being self-sufficient in the outdoors is important to staying safe in this region of the park. This is no joke– the Maze is where Aron Ralston was stuck and his determined survival inspired the movie 127 Hours!
The most historically remarkable hiking in the Maze is to Horseshoe Canyon, renown for its historic yet beautiful American Indian rock art. Hikers make the seven mile trek to the ‘The Great Gallery’ to observe the intricately drawn, life-sized figures that act as a living memory to a bygone civilization. While we weren’t quite hardy enough to make the trip, it seems like a surreal experience to take in this slice of history.
The Rivers
The Colorado and Green rivers wind through Canyonlands, slicing through centuries of sandstone to separate the park into its three distinct districts. These rivers are generally calm, flowing south until they intersect at The Confluence. Both the Colorado and Green rivers are ideal for a canoeing or kayaking adventure— before they meet at the Confluence. Once combined, their subsequent flow through Cataract Canyon creates a world-class stretch of white water rapids. The rapids range from class II to V, giving adrenaline junkies quite the rush with its powerful speed. Unless you are very confident rafting, it’s always best to explore white water rapids with a guide!
Star Light, Star Bright
Staying in Moab and hoping to catch a glimpse of the starts? Canyonlands will provide the best views in the Moab area. While it is a bit more of a drive than nearby Arches, this extra distance means even less light pollution from near-by Moab. The starry night skies are actually so pristine, the park received a Gold-Tier International Dark Sky Park designation.
Pets
Pet-companion trailblazing is limited at Canyonlands due to the sensitive desert ecosystem and extreme temperatures. Pets must be on a leash at all times when outside a vehicle, for everyone’s safety. Pets are welcomed at the developed campgrounds in Island in the Sky and The Needles districts and along paved roads. It is not permitted to bring your pet with you on any of the hiking trails or to the overlooks. While the backcountry does tend to be less populated, pets are also unwelcome on the backcountry rivers and roads.
Plan Smarter, Not Harder
The Elements
If you are going to be out hiking for any length of time, you should ensure you have packed sufficient water. Doing a longer trail? It’s never a bad idea to pack a snack or two to ensure you can keep up your stamina. If you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly on an empty stomach.
Get out early to avoid the heat of the day and the crowds. If you are an early bird, the earlier the better to afford you a bit more tranquility in the park and perhaps a stunning sunrise view. For any and all that do their best work in the afternoon, heading to the park around 3pm or 4pm will allow you to miss both the strongest UV rays of the day as well as all the morning park-goers.
Pack your sunscreen… and perhaps a hat as well. Even if you are getting after it before the sun has reached its peak, the rays are strong. Sustained exposure will leave you burned!
If you’re keen on a bit more information, but don’t want to sift through the National Park Service Website, the Visitor Guide is an awesome resource with everything you need to know about Canyonlands in one place.
Canyonlands provides a cornucopia of opportunity for outdoor exploration. Whether you’re into hiking, rock climbing, back country camping, rafting, or biking, outdoor recreation abounds. What adventure are you most intrigued to pursue out in this desert wilderness escape?
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Capitol Reef National Park is the youngest of Utah’s five national parks, with its inception in 1971. The south-central desert park is home to an impressive, nearly 100-mile Waterpocket Fold. This wrinkle in the earth’s crust breathes life into high desert ecosystems and some enduring historic orchards. Whether you’re planning a Capitol Reef-only trip or hitting up all the parks in Utah, you won’t regret exploring the immense sandstone canyons and savoring breathtaking panoramic views that make this desert oasis unique. With so much to explore in this expansive yet underrated park, making the most of your time is a priority!
Not only does this area boast unique geography, but it’s also steeped in rich history. From historic farming practices to trails named after infamous outlaws, Capitol Reef remains intriguing.
Fast Facts About Capitol Reef National Park
Size: 243,921 acres
Visitors: 1,226,511 visitors annually (data from 2019)
Highest elevation: 8960 ft — in upper Deep Creek drainage near Billings Pass
Distance from Salt Lake City Airport: 220 miles — 3.5 hour drive
National Park Initiation: December 18th, 1971 by President Richard Nixon
Below we have detailed our favorite hikes, beautiful drives, stargazing walks, where to bunk down, and an unexpected spot to grab a snack— as well as all the tips and tricks that will ensure you have the best time.Where to begin? Start by getting your boots dusty! There’s nothing like a hike to take in the sights and put yourself in the heart of nature.
Top Hikes
What’s a visit to a national park without a hike? Capitol Reef has dozens of hikes to choose from in the various regions of the park. We have highlighted a couple we loved and thought maximized hiking time— plus one on our list to tackle next time we visit.
The Cassidy Arch Trail is a nice afternoon challenge, with an elevation gain just shy of 700 feet. It offers gorgeous views of not only the Cassidy Arch but of the waterpocket fold as well. Hiking to a viewpoint is always rewarding, but this hike showcases dramatic views the whole time! A few spots along the trail can be a little hard to follow, but the cairns placed throughout ensure no one wanders too far from the trail.
The Grand Wash Trail is an easy flat trail, with virtually no hiking to be done. With minimal elevation change, this long walk, is probably about as kid-friendly as it gets here. Easy to find, it starts from the same parking lot as the Cassidy Arch Trail. The Grand Wash Trail has been likened to the Narrow hike in Zion… without the water. It will make travelers of any size feel tiny in comparison to the staggering canyon walls.
The Navajo Knobs Trail is one of the more strenuous hikes in the park, clocking in at a little over nine miles round trip and over 2,100 feet of elevation. While we didn’t have time to explore this stretch, the trek appears to more than worth it— delivering spades of top-of-the-world feels.
Scenic drive
If you’re less inclined to hike, perhaps a scenic road trip is more your speed. Capitol Reef offers a virtual “guide” of sorts, available on their website. This 8 mile drive takes about an hour and a half and takes visitors through some of the park’s highlights. Be sure to pull the webpage up before you leave (service can get spotty), so you can read a little background information and history on various spots along your drive.
Perhaps you don’t have time for the full scenic drive but want to sneak in one last view before you leave? Two miles west of the Visitor Center, Panorama Point and Gooseneck Point stand 800 feet above the Sulphur River. These viewpoints showcase the millions of years of erosion it took to carve out the canyon.
If you are going for an evening drive, you have certainly picked the correct place. Capitol Reef is a designated International Dark Sky Park due to the opportunity to experience near-pristine night skies. Visitors can snag night sky charts from the visitor center, to aid in stargazing. No gatekeeping the best stargazing spots— a list, organized by district, can be found here.
Camping
Capitol Reef National Park does not have a lodge or restaurant, so if you want to eat, pack a lunch, and if you want to sleep, bring a tent! There are three campgrounds in the park: one developed and two primitive. The campgrounds are each found in a different district of the park.
Fruita Campground
The Fruita Campground is located in the Fruita Historic district, and it is open year-round. It is the only developed campground in Capitol Reef National Park. This campground might just feel like a slice of heaven, surrounded by historic orchards, with the Fremont River running nearby.
In this campground, there are 71 sites. Each site has a picnic table and either a fire pit or above ground grill (a handful have both), but no individual water, sewage, or electrical hookups. There are restrooms with running water and flush toilets; however, there are no showers. Campers visiting from March 1st to October 31st must make a reservation— up to 6 months in advance to ensure availability. For the remainder of the year, all campsites are available on a first come, first serve basis.
Cathedral Valley Campground
The Cathedral Valley Campground is exactly where one might imagine it, in the Cathedral Valley District— at the northwestern-most point of the park. This campground has six sites, each with their own picnic table and fire grate. There is a pit toilet, but no water available. As this is a primitive campground, there is no cost or need for reservations. Campsites are available year-round on a first-come, first-serve basis. It’s important to note, access to this campground requires a high clearance four-wheel drive vehicle, and is occasionally inaccessible due to recent weather. Be sure to stop by the visitor’s center to ensure you don’t encounter any undue surprises.
Cedar Mesa Campground
The Cedar Mesa Campground is found in the Southern Waterpocket district, about 25 miles south of the Visitor Center. Up at a cool 5,500 feet elevation, this campground has five sites, each with their own picnic table and fire-grate. There is a pit toilet, but no water available. As this is a primitive campground, there is no cost or need for reservations. Campsites are available year-round on a first-come, first-serve basis. Usually two–wheeled vehicles are able to access the Cedar Mesa Campground, it too will occasionally become inaccessible due to weather. Be sure to stop by the visitor’s center to ensure you don’t encounter any undue surprises.
Special Programs
Capitol Reef National Park offers a handful of programs to facilitate visitors’ exploration. Program availability fluctuates given time of year and current staffing. Check out the visitor center or campground bulletin boards for more details upon your arrival.
Kids and adults alike can learn more about the geologic story of Capitol Reef in a 30 minute Geology Talk from a park ranger. Guided hikes are less of a plan-in-advance adventure, and more of a see-if-it-works-out option. Hour and a half long hikes are led to various locations in the park, but be sure to stop by the visitor center for schedules and meeting points.
Hoping to catch a glimpse of the Milky Way? Its International Dark Sky Park designation makes this a world class spot for stargazing. These tours usually run about thirty minute and are typically offered near the new moon, to maximize the dark sky. As the moon waxes back to its full muster, Full Moon guided walks are offered. These tend to be a little longer, running about an hour and a half.
Orchards
Capitol Reef is home to a few gorgeous orchards, bearing cherries, apricots, peaches, pears, and apples. Trees in bloom are always beautiful but in the middle of the desert, these fruit trees feel like an oasis.
In the late 1800s, Latter-Day Saints planted thousands of trees in the fertile Fremont River Valley. The remaining trees are remnants of this pioneer community in Fruita, making these historic orchards the bearers of heirloom fruits. These orchards remain ignorant of current farming practices as they are maintained year-round with historic cultural irrigation practices, pruning, pest management, mowing, planting, mapping, and grafting. Prioritizing the robust preservation of these orchards remains an important goal for Capitol Reef National Park, as Fruita has been fondly nicknamed “Eden of Wayne County”.
Snack Time
When the trees are bearing fruit, park visitors are allowed and encouraged to pick the fruit. You will know an orchard has ripe fruit, ready for harvest when you see a “U-Pick Fruit” sign.
Fruit pick from the orchard must be paid for, but this done with ease with a self-pay station, scale, and fruit price list located near the entrance of the orchard. Caring for these orchards with historic farming practices is a time intensive job, so all proceeds of fruit picked is invested back to support the preservation of these historic orchards.
Respect Mother Nature
A couple tree-care kindness reminders: do not climb the fruit trees or hang hammocks between them. While the unattainable apple at the top of the tree always looks the most delicious, you do not have to climb the tree to reach it. Ladder and pickers are available to help with the just-out-of-reach sweet treats. Additionally, an orchard sounds like the perfect place to string up a hammock and take a nap, but this is not permitted as fruit trees are easily damaged. If you are interested in learning more about these beautiful, historic orchards, you can do so here.
The 411 on Four-Legged Friends
In Capitol Reef, pets are permitted, but they are only allowed in the developed areas of the park, and must always be on a leash. Wonder what is included in this list of developed areas? More than you might think! Pet are permitted on the trail from the visitor center to the Fruita Campground, on the Fremont River Trail, in unfenced or unlocked orchards, in the Chestnut and Doc Inglesby picnic areas, in campgrounds, within 50 feet of roads (paved and dirt) open to public vehicle travel, and in parking areas open to public vehicle travel. Pets are not welcomed on other hiking trails, in public buildings, or in the backcountry.
Plan Smarter, Not Harder
The Elements
If you are going to be out hiking for any length of time, you should ensure you have packed sufficient water. Doing a longer trail? It’s never a bad idea to pack a snack or two to ensure you can keep up your stamina. If you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly on an empty stomach.
Get out early to avoid the heat of the day and the crowds. If you are an early bird, the earlier the better to afford you a bit more tranquility in the park and perhaps a stunning sunrise view. For any and all that do their best work in the afternoon, heading to the park around 3pm or 4pm will allow you to miss both the strongest UV rays of the day as well as all the morning park-goers.
Pack your sunscreen… and perhaps a hat as well. Even if you are getting after it before the sun has reached its peak, the rays are strong and sustained exposure will leave you burned!
Ridin‘ Dirty
If you are going down to Utah for a national parks tour, you won’t be disappointed to have rented a higher clearance car. We were able to get by with a sedan, but if we were to do it again, we would have a higher clearance car— especially for this park! Of the five parks in Utah, we found Capitol Reef to be the most rural.
Capitol Reef is visited less than some of Utah’s other illustrious parks, but that’s what makes it a perfect spot. With over 1 million people visiting annually, you will certainly see other visitors exploring , but the remote nature of Capitol Reef limits the crowds. Be sure to add this technicolor desert escape to your bucket list!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Bryce Canyon National Park is a striking landscape of towering red rock formations, known as hoodoos, that create a surreal and otherworldly setting. Located in southern Utah, the park offers visitors an array of hiking trails, scenic viewpoints, and unique geological wonders shaped by millions of years of erosion. Whether you’re catching an unforgettable sunrise or exploring the iconic Navajo Loop Trail, our perfect day in Bryce Canyon provides an unforgettable experience for nature lovers, photographers, and outdoor enthusiasts seeking adventure amidst its vibrant, rugged terrain.
How many days should you plan to spend in Bryce Canyon? If you’re really keen to do a bunch of hiking, you could spend a few days here, but one day in Bryce Canyon is enough to leave feeling like you’ve really experienced the park. Even if you’re not typically an early riser, you won’t regret peeling yourself out of bed to catch the sunrise over the amphitheater. It might just be the most breathtaking way to see the park!
Fast Facts About Bryce Canyon National Park
Size: 35,835 acres
Visitors: 2,354,660 visitors annually (data from 2022)
Highest elevation: 9,115ft at Rainbow Point and Yovimpa Point
Distance from Las Vegas Airport: 270 miles — 4 hour drive
Distance from Salt Lake City Airport: 275 miles — 4 hour drive
National Park Initiation: February 25th, 1928
Fun Fact: Bryce Canyon is home to the largest concentration of hoodoos on Earth!
The hoodoos and spires that abound throughout the canyon are almost miraculously formed by rain, snow, and ice. If you have questions about anything, be sure to ask a park ranger for a more in depth explanation! They are truly an awesome resource.
Below we have detailed all of our favorite hikes, all the best viewpoints, how-to’s for navigating transportation, and where to bunk down— as well as all the tips and tricks to ensure you have the best time.
Packing Essentials
water bottle — make sure you fill it before every hike!!
snacks — if you’re not used to heat and elevation changes, it can fatigue you even more quickly. (FYI: Bryce Canyon is up at over 8,000 feet of elevation) it’s never a bad idea to have a little extra sustenance… plus who doesn’t enjoy a little treat as they take in the views??
hiking backpack — an 8-15L hiking backpack is usually pretty lightweight and it’s a nice not to worry about carrying your water bottle, phone, and snacks
trekking poles — a walking stick or trekking poles are never a bad idea. These are beneficial for a multitude of hikes, especially if you would consider yourself a little on the de-trained side. even for fit individuals, some of the elevation climbs can be a kick in the pants!
hat — some of the trails have very minimal shade, so it’s never a bad idea to bring a little of your own
Layers, layers, layers — despite hot temperatures during the day, the early mornings and evenings can still be quite chilly– plus the temperature can vary by elevation or time of day (i.e sunrise can be pretty chilly, even in the summer)
A Good Night’s Rest
Perhaps the most important part of maximizing your time in a busy day? Getting a good night’s sleep! There are certainly accommodations nearby when you are visiting Bryce Canyon, but what’s more convenient than staying in the park?? In-park accommodations tend to either be very economical (camping) or a little on the spendy side (lodge living). Either way you have great options to choose from. It’s worth noting, both camping and the lodge will fill up quickly. If you know this is where you want to stay, book sooner rather than later!
Campgrounds
There are two campgrounds found in the Bryce Canyon National Park. In addition to these two areas, rugged backpackers are able to go backcountry camping along the Riggs Spring Loop and Under the Rim Trail. Camping along the trail requires attaining a first come, first serve permit, up to 48 hours in advance.
The North Campground
The North Campground can be found right across the street from the Visitor’s Center, so it’s hard to miss! This campground has 100 sites that are spread out over 4 loops. If you are planning to go camping May 27th through October 1st, you must make a reservation, up to six months in advance. If you are planning to visit October 2nd through May 26th, campsites are available on a first-come, first-served basis.
Campflare is an awesome website/app resource that can help you snag a campsite in a full online reservation-based campground, if you’re planning a last-minute trip.
The sunset campground
The Sunset Campground can be found not far from Sunset Point. This campground boasts 99 sites, divided into 3 loops– one of which is primarily for RVs, the other two, tent-camping only. This campground is available on a first come first serve basis April 15th through October 31st, and is closed throughout winter (i.e. the rest of the year)
The Lodge
If your idea of rustic accommodations are less tent and more log cabin, the Bryce Canyon Lodge is the place for you. The lodge and cabins were built in 1925, and the exterior of the buildings has undergone minimal change in the time since they were built. These historic accommodations are available to visitors mid-spring through late fall. Due to its convenient location inside the park, rooms go quickly. Reservations can be made up to 13 months in advance.
photo via www.nps.gov
Free Shuttle Anyone?
Bryce Canyon operates a free shuttle around the Bryce Amphitheater, from April 5th to October 20th. No advance reservation required. The shuttle runs from 8am – 6pm with extended hours until 8pm from May 10th to September 22nd. If you want to plan your inter-amphitheater shuttling, you can track the shuttles here.
When the park gets crowded, this can be an awesome way to maneuver around without the classic fear of not being able to find a parking spot. This is also super helpful to any over-eager-turned-quickly-humbled hikers that might want a bit of a lift back to their car.
◁ One Action Packed Day ▷
Get ready for a little bit over everything at Bryce Canyon! An unforgettable sunrise, a couple memorable hikes, bird’s eye view overlooks, and a relaxing sunset to end the day. Bryce is home to the largest concentration of hoodoos anywhere in the world, so this truly is a one-of-a-kind park.
If you need help orienting yourself in the park or want a map you can save to your phone, you can find that here.
Sunrise
Catching sunrise in the summer months can be quite the endeavor as long days mean early sunrises. The sunrise in Bryce Canyon is worth pulling yourself out of bed for!! Inspiration Point affords an incredible view of the sun peaking over the mountains, illuminating the technicolor amphitheater. The Rim Trail connects Inspiration Point and Bryce Point, and makes for a beautiful Sunrise hike.
A portion of the hike is perfect for an early morning walk, but the trail stretches 11.0 miles. With only one day in the park, we recommend just going to Bryce Point and back, to save your legs for another awesome hike.
Don’t stress if you’re running a bit late for the sunrise. While the time for the sunrise is set according to when it rises over the horizon, the sun must rise a bit further to be visible over the mountains in the distance. This provides a nice cushion— especially if you’re trying to catch the sunrise over the summer.
Navajo loop
The Navajo Loop and Queen’s Garden Trail is the most popular trail in the park, but for good reason. The expansive scenery will leave you at a loss of words, while the towering canyon walls are staggeringly tall in a way that truly puts the magnitude of Bryce Canyon into perspective. The trail brings you down into the amphitheater, allowing you to experience the stacks of hoodoos up close! This trail is about 3 miles long… getting down to the hoodoos means there’s an ascent to return to the trailhead; however, it’s pretty manageable with an overall elevation of about 650 ft.
photo via nps.gov
Fairyland Loop
The Navajo loop is an awesome hike… the only downside it the popularity can make it a bit crowded. If you have the stamina for an 8 mile hike with a little over 1,500 ft of elevation gain, the Fairyland Loop is the hike for you!! You still get to be up close with the spectacular scenery and take in jaw-dropping views, but with a bit more solitude than you might find elsewhere.
photo via nps.gov
Grab a Bite
All that wandering around will work up an appetite! There’s a few different options when you’re looking to hunt down some sustenance in the park. Breakfast, lunch, and dinner are served in the The Bryce Canyon Lodge Restaurant (menus here) Right next door you’ll find the Valhalla Pizzeria and Coffee Shop, which is also open all day but they only serve pizza after 11:30am. The Bryce Canyon Lodge also houses The General Store, if you’re looking for some quick grab-n-go options or snacks!
Rainbow and Yovimpa Viewpoints
There are so many fantastic viewpoints that allow one to admire Bryce Canyon in its entirety. Rainbow Point and Yovimpa Point are at the very southern end of the park, giving way to the Grand Staircase and an array of truly remarkable cliffs, making it a delightful crow’s nest for observation. This actually the highest point in the park!
photo via nps.gov
Sunset
While there is both a Sunrise Point and a Sunset Point, only the sunrise is truly visible in the park. At sunset, the fading sun creates an ethereal watercolor painting in the sky, which is certainly beautiful in its own right, but the sun sinking into the horizon is not visible from Sunset Point. Regardless, it’s a beautiful and peaceful way to end the day.
While sunrise and sunset are generally known to be beautiful times of day, this is especially true at Bryce Canyon. The sunrise in particular, is outstanding… the way the sun reflects across the hoodoos and spires makes it beyond worth-it to go out of your way to witness this kaleidoscope of color. We hope this helps you plan your own perfect day in Bryce Canyon.
Zion is one of five national parks in Utah. Be sure to check out Zion, Arches, Capitol Reef, and Canyonlands as well, to truly appreciate all of the Utah national park topography! Happy travels!
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
Los Cabos, Mexico is the perfect location for stunning beaches, rich culture, amazing food, and memorable adventures. Whether you’re keen on the relaxing, upscale charm of San Jose or the luxe nightlife of San Lucas, there’s something for everyone at this lively tip of the Baja Peninsula. Look no further for your next enticing yet blissfully relaxing one week trip.
From landing to take off, we’ve got your itinerary all mapped out. You’ll find an array of culinary delights, enticing exploration, and dreamy relaxation on this peninsula paradise. The perfect backdrop to your next vacation beckons!
DAY ONE
With any luck, your flight will arrive with some daylight left to burn. There are a few options to get to your hotel from the airport. You can take a taxi, an uber, or a private driver. The latter came recommended, so that was the option we opted for.
It’s about a 45 minute drive from the Los Cabos Airport to Cabo San Lucas. We landed at our Airbnb, which we highly recommend! The location was amazing– downtown is close (but far enough away the party scene won’t keep you up at night), plus you can see The Arch from the balcony and a most amazing view of the sunset. After checking in, head to the downtown area to wander around the various shops and restaurants. We popped into the Cabo Coffee Company, which became a staple coffee fix throughout the trip.
On our way back to the Airbnb, we stopped by a grocery store as our rental had a full kitchen, which makes meals rather convenient. Upon our arrival we unloaded our grocery finds and went to lay by the pool for a bit. Opting for a simple dinner, we ate on the balcony and watched the sunset. It was the perfect end to our first day.
note: the two photographs of our San Juan Airbnb were sampled from their listing
DAY TWO
The main event on the schedule for today: a sailing excursion! The five hours we spent on the catamaran flew by in a breeze of breathtaking beauty. We sailed off the shores of Cabo San Lucas, where the Pacific Ocean meets the Sea of Cortez. Our excursion led us to the distinctive rock formations, colloquially dubbed Land’s End– the most illustrious being ‘El Arco’, which translates to ‘The Arch’.
We were granted glimpses of the migrating whales as well as a plethora of sea lions. For anyone on the boat feeling adventurous, paddle-boards and snorkel sets were available for aquatic exploration. If you’re less thrill-seeking and more keen on relaxation, the unlimited open bar and bevvy of hor’s d’ oeuvres (shrimp, chips & guac, ceviche, salad, pasta salad, etc) will guarantee you enjoy your time. We truly could not recommend Cabo Adventures more highly!
A massage is always a good idea, but a massage on vacation is somehow extra relaxing. The Airbnb host had a wealth of local knowledge and recommended a fantastic masseuse for in-home treatments. Feeling deliciously relaxed, our day ended with another delicious homemade dinner, shared together on the balcony as the sun set on another wonderful day in paradise.
DAY THREE
Nothing kicks the day off quite like catching a glimpse of some migrating humpback whales, from our balcony. Seeing these gentle giants had us ready to pack our bags and head to the coast. The primary agenda for day three? Big chillin’ on at Chileno Beach! This public access beach About 15 minutes outside Cabo San Lucas, and is impressive for a few reasons. First and foremost, there are bathrooms and showers available to beachgoers that aren’t grungy. Another plus? This beach is also known to be a good spot for snorkeling! It’s always fun to see the beautiful landscape under the sea in vibrant color!
While Chileno Beach isn’t in the heart of Cabo San Lucas, this itself can actually be a perk. You won’t find nearly as many vendors at this beach as you would at say Medano Beach. This isn’t always a make or break factor (and it’s hard to begrudge individuals trying to make a living), but in busier seasons the beach can be far less relaxing when you’re turning down sales pitches left and right with a kind “no gracias”.
We closed out the day with dinner at Pietro’s Restaurant and Pizza. This tasty Italian spot is not only a nice change of pace from some of the Mexican cuisine– it’s really quite delicious, with a fun ambiance.
DAY FOUR
After a day on the beach it’s time to tear it up in the desert! We went ATVing with Real Baja Tours and had the most exhilarating time!! Not having ridden ATVs much in the past, it was thrilling to fly across the desert.
Afterwards, we grabbed food at Outpost (honest opinion: not bad, but kinda underwhelmed) before heading back to our airbnb. After our late lunch, we hung out by the pool until sunset. There’s no bad sunsets in Cabo!
DAY FIVE
Our last day in San Lucas started at The Cabo Coffee Company for some top notch bean juice to get the day going. From there we bid our airbnb adieu and headed up to the Cabo Azul Resort in San Jose.
Upon arriving, we grabbed lunch at the restaurant by the pool, and let me just say… the views from a high rise are lovely, but hearing the waves crash as you enjoy lunch brings relaxation to a whole new level. After lunch, we went on a long walk down the beach, and felt so at peace taking in the gorgeous coastline.
For dinner, we tried to hunt down a slightly more authentic restaurant for dinner at El Toro Guero. There were far too many gringas for it to be considered a ‘local’ restaurant, but the food was excellent! Would recommend!
DAY SIX
The last full day in paradise means taking in as many ocean views as possible. The resort had various cabanas available to guests, and we managed to snag one on the beach. Oftentimes these more private reclining options have an additional cost associated with their use, but we were pleased to discover all cabanas— both beachside and poolside— were complimentary to guests. We spent the morning sunning along the shore, attempting to imprint the coastline in our memories.
Downtown Cabo San Juan was only a mile and a half walk from Cabo Azul, so after a morning of divine ocean views, we put on our sandals and made our way towards the plaza. The quaint area was certainly worth the walk with so many shops and restaurants to wander into. The aura of old-town charm is alluring any day of the week, but it’s especially worth exploring on a Thursday to take in all there is to see along the Art Walk. Perhaps a little touristy, but worth visiting nonetheless.
For dinner we popped across the street as there’s a wide array of restaurants to choose from. We found ourselves at Latino 8, and were beyond delighted. Everything was amazing… food, service, ambiance were all divine!
DAY SEVEN
Not wanting to stray too far from the resort, we spent our final morning by the pool– leaving only to take one last walk on the beach. A final virgin strawberry daiquiri from the swim-up bar was a must, followed by some tasty pool-side nachos. All too soon it was time to head back to the airport, so we begrudgingly packed up our bags and checked out. We used the same private driver to take us all back to the airport, and had another lovely experience.
PARTING THOUGHTS
Cabo offers the perfect vacation for everyone. We were pretty keen on having a low-key, relaxing vacation, so our beach and pool-side days with stunning views were exactly what we wanted. For those looking for more adventure, there’s enough desert, beach, and ocean to keep anyone entertained. If you want to cut loose and indulge in night life, there is abundant opportunity for that as well. Truly a vacation spot for any and all to enjoy!
While we always encourage anyone traveling to a forgein country to make an attempt to know some of the local language, Cabo is pretty touristy, so most people you converse with will be able to speak English.
Just a heads up, many snorkel spots in Mexico aren’t quite as vibrant as they once were, due to dying coral. Reef safe sunscreen is everywhere nowadays, so be sure to add that to your packing list before you go!
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FSU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
When traveling someplace new, the best way to get out and explore with freedom and flexibility is by renting a car. With travelers venturing back out into the world, there have been shortages in car rentals leading to a lack of vehicles and an influx in overpriced options. The solution? Turo!
What is Turo?
Turo is a peer-to-peer car sharing service. In the same way people use Airbnb in lieu of a hotel stay, Turo is an alternate option when you’re looking to rent a car. Prefer a specific make? Need all wheel drive? The easy to navigate website makes it simple to search for exactly what you need.
Cancellation Policy
All vehicles listed on Turo have free cancellation up to 24 hours before the start of your reservation. This is beyond convenient as it affords you the flexibility to lock in your best option, with the comfort of knowing you’re not going to lose money if your plans change.
Mileage
Mileage varies from host to host. Some cars will have unlimited mileage while others will have a cap. This is something to note before you make your reservation as there is usually a per mile charge if you go over your allotted mileage. In our experience, mileage limits are generally pretty reasonable and far exceed our planned trip mileage; however, it’s something to note before booking.
Pick-Up and Drop Off
If you’re not taking a shuttle to the car rental agency, how are you getting your car? This varies from host to host. All hosts have a pick-up location that it automatically select as this is likely most convenient for the host. For some Turo listings, this is the only option; however, for others they may be able to offer you additional flexibility. Convenience can cost ya… an airport pick-up/drop off may be complementary or it may cost you anywhere from $25-$100.
Extras
Extras are never guaranteed, but always worth checking out! An ‘extra’ is an item or service the host offers as an add-on to the car rental. When we were checking out options in Hawaii, it was common to see people offering beach chairs, snorkel gear, or beach towels for a nominal trip fee. When looking at options in Alaska, various rental’s ‘extra’ options included camping equipment, coolers, car seats, strollers, and more. If a host offers any fun extras, they will be noted in the description, with their associate price. If you decide to utilize an offered ‘extra’, they are easily added when you check-out.
Insurance & Liability
Since Turo is considered a peer-to-peer car sharing service, the rental car insurance provided by some credit card companies will not cover you in the event of an accident. What are your options for insurance? Turo provides the option to include coverage from Travelers when you’re checking out. This is offered at three different coverage levels or price points.
That being said, before you opt into the coverage, check with your car insurance agent. Between the five of us, we are on three different car insurance plans, and they all cover a Turo rental! When you’re booking your car for a trip, it’s certainly worth knowing if you’re already covered. It could save you hundreds of dollars!
Young Driver Fees
Renting a car can be quite the headache if you are under 25. When booking through Turo, you must be 18 or older to book a trip. Also, if you’re age 18-21, you can’t decline a protection plan or choose Premier protection. This hold true regardless of what your car insurance policy covers. You must choose either the Minimum or the Standard protection plans.
If you’re age 18-20, you’ll pay a minimum young driver fee of $50/day, and if you’re 21–25, you’ll pay a minimum fee of $30/day. A peculiar wrinkle, but renters must be 21 or older to book a car valued over $20k.
As a note, the age requirements are based on your age at the time of booking, not the age you’ll be when the trip takes place.
You can read more about the age requirements for drivers here.
When you rent a car, you have a general idea of what you might end up with, but you never really know until you arrive and someone hands you the keys. When you book through Turo, you know exactly what you’re getting. Additionally, the options for ‘extras’ may be a streamlined way to rent items you were struggling to figure out how to pack (i.e. camping supplies or beach chairs).
While this doesn’t necessarily benefit you specifically, when you rent through Turo, part of your money will always goes to Turo but the majority goes to the person or family you are renting your car from. As such, renting your car through Turo can be a unique way to support the local economy.
The cons? Turo does not guarantee you an alternate option if the vehicle you rented become unavailable last minute. For example, if the Turo you rented needs to be taken into the shop because the radiator broke, you may be out of luck or scrambling to find a last minute replacement. We usually aim to mitigate this by sticking to newer models of cars as they should theoretically have less wear and miles.
Overall Impressions
Turo is an awesome option for your next trip. Whether you’re planning on zipping through the city, car camping in the back of a truck, or yearning for breezy rides with the top down, Turo has a wide array of options to choose from.
Cheers to your next adventure! Let us know how your first Turo experience goes!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Sometimes you just need to get out of town. While longer vacations are certainly the best way to fully explore an area, it’s possible to explore someplace new without burning through all your PTO. Whether it’s a girls trip, solo exploration, or a weekend away with your honey, a long weekend can be the perfect excuse to explore someplace new. From action-packed to soothing relaxing, check out these twelve weekend getaways, and start planning your next escape!
Charleston, SC
Whether you’re a history buff, an outdoor enthusiast, or a discerning foodie, Charleston maintains an appeal for a wide breadth of visitors. A town big enough to have an enviable dining and drinking scene, but so quaint in its roots, it still maintains its idyllic beach charm. A perfect weekend destination to enjoy outdoor relaxation.
photos by Luke Higgs via www.charlestoncvb.com
San Antonio, TX
Everything is bigger in Texas! If you’ve never been to the rodeo, this is your chance… from bull-riding to mutton-bustin’, the rodeo is a wild time. If you’re looking for a more relaxing experience, the Riverwalk makes for a gorgeous meandering exploration– with endless options enticing restaurants and bars to stop in. If you visit during the holiday season, the Riverwalk is decorated with twinkle lights, making it rather dreamy as the sun goes down. Can’t forget, San Antonio is also home of The Alamo!
Minneapolis, MN
The best time to visit Minneapolis? The fall! Within an hour’s drive from the city, you can find a myriad of scenic drives to take in the gorgeous fall foliage as it transitions to a bold array of oranges, yellows, and reds. If you enjoy hiking, the options are plentiful here with beautiful bluffs overlooking the driftless region. Apple orchards also make for charming adventures. Nothing’s delicious like a freshly picked apple!
New Orleans
New Orleans is unique with its unexpected combination of bohemian charm and old-world architecture. As the crown jewel of New Orleans, the French quarter beckons with intrigue for visitors of all ages. Whether you’re keen on enjoying beignets or Bourbon Street, you won’t leave disappointed. For football fans, a fall visit means you may be able to catch a Saints game at the Superdome!
photo from www.mardigrasneworleans.com
San Francisco, CA
Home of the iconic Golden Gate Bridge, San Francisco has no shortage of explorations to fill a weekend. The ever-touristy but alluring Fisherman’s Wharf has something for everyone with amusement park-style rides, a chocolate lover’s paradise, and sunning sea lions. As you continue to wander, you may happen upon Chinatown and Little Italy… they’ll have you convinced you’re not in California any more.
Savannah, GA
Savannah is a delightful intersection of old-fashioned southern charm and modern, chic-yet- grassroots style. Rich in culture, this area is teeming with moving artwork and influential architecture. The cobblestone lined River Street and it’s array of vendors are iconic, but the delicious food and craft breweries continue to impress even as you wander away from the main drag. A long weekend is the perfect amount of time to take in this historic city.
Las Vegas, NV
While Las Vegas is known for its nightlife and gambling, there is so much more to do here than just drink the weekend away poolside (nothing wrong with that, if that’s the vibe you’re after though!). Hot air balloon tours over the desert are an almost surreal experience. Another nearby adventure, Zion National Park is just under three hours away, but this breathtaking show of nature is worth the drive. An escape to this pocket of the southwest will be far from boring, no matter what you are looking to do.
photo from www.lvcva.com
Nashville, TN
If live music feeds your soul, the pandemic must have been a rough drought. With live music at nearly every bar in Nashville, your heart will be happy once more. While Nashville is known for its music and bar scene, being located in ‘the south’ guarantees a wide array of options for good eats as well. If you’re looking to mix things up with a weekend of rock and roll, Nashville is just the spot.
Park City, UT
If you’re looking for a winter weekend adventure to make the most of winter sports, pack your warm layers and head to Park City, Utah. While you might expect downhill skiing and snowboarding, you can also give dog sledding, cross-country skiing, snowmobiling, and snowshoeing a try as well.
photo from www.visitparkcity.com
Ashville, NC
If Nashville doesn’t exactly sound like your idea for a relaxing weekend getaway, Asheville might be just what you’re looking for. A little more peace an quiet to take in nature’s scenery, with loads of hikes to explore. Some will even lead you to waterfalls… or perhaps a 60-foot natural waterslide. Looking to do some house hunting? Touring the Biltmore Estate will have you re-imaging your dream house. After a full day of exploration, the brewery and live music scene in Asheville will keep you feeling groovy all night. Asheville has some unique Airbnb and VRBO stays as well… check out all the fun tree-houses you could spend the night in!
photo from www.exploreasheville.com
Portland, OR
Do the outdoors make you feel alive? Visiting Portland for the weekend means you have the big city life available to you if you so desire, but practically every kind of outdoor adventure you could hope to find is within a two hour drive. The coast? An easy hour and a half drive west. Driving the same length to the east will bring you to Mt. Hood for endless winter fun. The Columbia River Gorge is less than an hour outside the city, and it’s a gorgeous place to go hiking. Portland is a perfect city to visit if you want to spend a weekend filled with new hikes.
Miami, FL
If your ideal mid-winter weekend escape is somewhere warm, head to Miami. With your toes in the sand, this beach city will have you forgetting all about the freezing temps at home. Not only does Miami deliver beach views in spades, but the cultural cornucopia guarantees a wide array of cuisines to satisfy your palette. It goes without saying there’s also loads of shopping to be done. A weekend in Miami is many things, but boring is never one of them.
A long weekend spent exploring is an invigorating way to get out of the usual bump and grind. Many of these alluring cities have moderate to large airports that help keep flight prices low. There’s someplace exciting to adventure any time of year!
All photographs contained in this blog post were taken by the sisters of Five Wandering Soles, unless otherwise noted.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
When visiting Kauai, there are endless options of places to stay. Planning to splurge for vacation? You will be hard-pressed to find a better resort than the Grand Hyatt Kauai. Immediately upon arrival, we were met with warm, genuine customer service and stellar views of both the resort and the coastline. Throughout our stay here, we savored everything they had to offer: from delicious food to poolside relaxation to refreshing spa treatments. The Grand Hyatt is a luxurious reflection of Kauai’s essence. Our detailed review will help you decide if this is the resort experience you’re looking for.
For some, planning a trip can be a headache, while for others it’s a delight to pour over all the options and craft the perfect itinerary. If you’re considering staying at the Grand Hyatt Kauai, we’ve comprehensively outlined all the amenities, facilities, and dining options, as well as things to consider before booking.
A Warm Welcome
The immediate bellhop service, a beautiful orchid lei, and outstanding customer service at check-in are all awaiting you upon arrival at the Grand Hyatt Kauai. Due to a change in flight, we ended up arriving a couple hours earlier than anticipated, so our room wasn’t quite ready yet. The front desk staff stored our bags, comped us each an appetizer and drink, and invited us to explore the property while we waited for our room. Once it was ready, a bottle of champagne and chilled glasses inside were a sweet surprise. All in all, a 10/10 first impression.
Complementary Resort Activities
The resort offers a handful of complementary activities. If you have even been intrigued by lei making, learning to play the ukulele, or secretly wanting to learn hula, all you have to do is reserve a spot through the concierge desk. If you’re more in the mood to experience rather than learn a new skill, you can participate in Koi fish feeding, a parrot talk, or wander with the hydroponic garden tour. Check out the schedule to see which activities are offered which days!
Concierge
Some people thrive on the excitement of planning their vacation and others just want someone else to handle the details. If you fall in the latter category, the concierge knows how to take care of you. Blue Hawaiian Activities can organize air tours, snorkeling, sunset cruises, surfing, fishing, and so more. The amenities of the resort can make it feel difficult to leave, but endless adventure beckon on Kauai. You are certain to miss out if you don’t go exploring.
Anara Spa
Looking to treat yourself at the Anara Spa? Your options are endless! They offer massages, facials, body polishes, and float therapy. There’s also a full service salon, offering manicures, pedicures, hair and makeup styling. Not only does your treatment include services rendered, but any 50 minute treatment also grants the recipient use of the Anara Spa facilities. This includes a lap pool, locker areas, showers, a sauna, and a steam room. They are the largest spa on the island, so you won’t find a better set-up anywhere else!
Fitness
The gym is located in the Anara Spa, and it’s open to guests 24/7. The two-room open set up features a room of cardio equipment (including two Peloton bikes) and a room of free weights, machines, and a squat rack. Additionally, daily fitness classes are offered, from Zumba to Pilates Yoga Fusion to Cardio Burn and so many more.
If you’re more interested in lifestyle fitness, from 6am to 7pm, bikes are available for guests to use for local exploration. For up to three hours, you can adventure around with the wind in your hair on one of their cool blue bikes.
If hiking is more your speed, the Maha’ulepu Heritage Trail starts right by the Grand Hyatt and is a relatively flat, easy 4-mile hike. Check it out for beautiful views of the coastline. Looking to stay on the paved, beaten path? Stop by the front desk at the Anara Spa, where they have maps of local running and walking paths.
Poipu Bay Golf
A complimentary shuttle will bring you to the prestigious Poipu Bay Golf Course. This 210 acre property stretches along a rugged coastline featuring 85 bunkers and five water hazards. Distractions abound with humpback whales breaching in the distance and countless tropical plants acting as an inspired backdrop. Due to its oceanfront location trade winds can vary suddenly, making this a most intriguing golfing experience.
Dining
The food you eat can make or break your vacation adventure as food is a unique way to appreciate a new culture. The dining options available are perfectly curated to maximize the guest’s experience. From casual poolside dining to a romantic, upscale dinner, the Grand Hyatt delivers.
Tidepools
The romantic thatched-roof bungalows stand above the lagoon, teeming with colorful koi fish. This dreamy date-night spot features a locally sourced menu, heavily influenced by modern Hawaiian cuisine. A local tour guide mentioned it was known for being an awesome dinner spot, even outside of resort guest clientele. Reservations are recommended to ensure you can snag a table here.
Stevenson’s Library
Whether you’re seated at the gorgeous koa wood bar or outside in the open-air lanai, the ambiance exudes an air of cultivated relaxation, with sweeping ocean views. The fresh sushi alone is worth going stopping by for. If you’re in the mood for a drink, dive into their chapter book of inventive martinis, tropical cocktails, and both classic and creative whiskey drinks. They also have sake, beer, and wine… something for everyone!
Just a heads up, if you know you want to check this spot out, make a reservation. If you make a last minute decision to head there for dinner, make sure you arrive early as it’s not uncommon for there to be a line 5-10 parties deep waiting for the doors to open.
Hale Nalu
Conveniently located poolside, this vintage surf shack has quite the selection: burgers, poke bowls, salads, and more. Anything you might want after frolicking around in the ocean or pool for hours! We were big fans of both the food and drink menu. Kalua Pork Nachos makes the perfect afternoon snack, and the Mango Green Dream cocktail will have you swearing there’s no way your health smoothie could possibly have rum in it!
Captain’s Bar
An outdoor, open air bar area, right next to the adult pool is the ideal spot to catch the football game, with a cold cocktail (or beer) in hand. From its perch on the upper deck, you have a prime view to take in all the pools and lagoons below as well as the sparkling ocean. Besides the beers on tap, the menu offered here is the same as that at Hale Nalu.
Ilima Terrace
We actually snagged breakfast at the Grand Club every morning, but we heard awesome things about the amazing, fresh breakfast options at Ilima Terrace. It also never hurts to start the day with spectacular views.
Seaview Terrace
The Seaview Terrace is open for breakfast as well as dinner, making it an easy spot to swing by at almost any point in the day. While the food is certainly tasty (the skewers were surprisingly small but quite delicious), the nightly live music is what sets this spot apart. They have a different group there every night, keeping it interesting for guests with a keen ear for groovy tunes.
Share the Stars
Celebrating something special? You can indulge in an exclusive five-course beachside dining experience under the starry Hawaiian sky. The waves will be your only company as the moon rises over the cliffs. This romantic candlelight dinner is guaranteed to be an unforgettable date.
Luau
The Grand Hyatt Kauai hosts luaus on Wednesday and Saturday from 5:30-8pm. The price of admission includes an all you can eat buffet, an open bar, and cultural entertainment. You can check out the full menu here (oh yeah, there’s Ahi poke Imu, Style Kalua Pig, and so much more). The show they put on tells the story of a fantastic journey through the rich cultural history of the Hawaiian people. What better way to discover the stories of Hawaii and its people than through ancestral music and dance. Are you sold yet? You can check it out more here.
Pool
From fun to relaxation, the pool deck shows out. A saltwater lagoon with its own sandy shoreline? It’s like relaxing in the ocean, without worrying about being swept away. Need a moment away from the kids? The adult pool on the upper deck is free of splashing cannon balls. Or perhaps you’re in the mood to float down the lazy river. The slide is fun for children and adults alike, winding an exciting 150 feet before shooting you into the lower deck pool. Taking an evening dip? There’s not one but two jacuzzis to relax in while you look up at the stars.
The ambiance is perfect for couples as well as families. Adults and kids alike had a blast on the slide, but anyone looking for a child-free zone could relax by the adults only pool. So much fun for families, but also quite enjoyable for a honeymooning couple.
Cabanas
A cozy slice of privacy along the pool or beach, there are six different cabana styles to choose from. Ranging from $150 to $1,000, these cabanas are perfect for anyone looking for a shaded home base for the day. If you’re interested in snagging one of these luxe cabanas, be sure to do so in advance to ensure availability. You can explore all six options here.
It’s worth noting while the cabanas are beyond lovely to have, there are loads of shaded lounge chairs, hammocks, and swings throughout the property, so a cabana is not your only option if you’re hoping to escape the sun a bit.
Departure Lounge
Included in the resort fee is use of the departure lounge. If you have a late morning or early afternoon check-out time, but an evening flight out, the departure lounge is a wonderful amenity to help make the most of your last day. Hoping to fit in one last hike? There are showers available to ensure everyone is nice and clean for take off.
Room With a View
Salvador’s had his Hyatt card for years and was rather pleased when he made it to the Explorist tier of membership last year. Explorists receive an upgrade to the best room available (excluding suites), which is how we found ourselves on the six floor, with a fantastic view of both the resort and the ocean.
In summary, the room was a nice size for us to spread out in during our time there. The bed was fantastically comfy, the bathroom was more than spacious, and the toilet was equipped with a bidets. Between the resort and the adventures that await outside the property, we did not spend much time in our room, but the time we were there, it was lovely and fit our needs perfectly.
As would be expected the resort offers daily housekeeping services; however, in the spirit of conservation, guests that elect to omit their housekeeping for the day may receive either a $10 dining credit or 500 points credited to their World of Hyatt account.
Any Cons?
We truly had a lovely time, and I have recommended this resort to friends and family, that too, have only had lovely things to say. Any negatives are pretty mild in nature. The resort is pretty spread out, so if you struggle with mobility impairments this could be a potential frustration; however, as fit, active young adults, we didn’t feel the walking required was excessive.
If you are looking for children-free resort, this is not it. One of the pools has signs up stating it’s adult only, and this was largely respected, but there were kids that would unknowingly come play in there before eventually moving on. Couples and honeymooners, don’t take this to mean it’s an environment catered to entertaining children. We enjoyed the Grand Hyatt Kauai as a couple and found it to be perfectly relaxing; however, if you’re looking for an environment completely devoid of children, it will not be here. Inversely, for families, this would certainly be a resort the whole crew would enjoy. We saw ‘kids’ of all ages going down the slide and floating along the lazy river.
The Best For Last
The best part about our stay here? It was completely free. We booked our room with points through Salvador’s World of Hyatt account, for a very reasonable 25k points per night. The Chase points we transferred are usually valued around 1.8 cents/point. At this conversion, the 25k point room cost us about $450 in “points”. That may seem like a hefty nightly cost, but a night at this resort usually goes for $600-$1000 per night. If you have Hyatt points to spend, this an excellent category 6 hotel to cash your points in on. New to the points game and curious how to score this room ASAP? Check out our blog post on making the most of your Hyatt points.
The 30-Second Skinny
Overall, we felt the Grand Hyatt Kauai was a lovely place to stay. The very nature of Kauai resort accommodations can be spendy, but the resort maintains beautiful facilities, excellent customer service, and endless opportunities for relaxation— providing a good value for money (or points) spent. Outside of the larger amenities detailed above, the resort also offered complimentary use of washers and dryers, samples of sunscreen, and a bottle of champagne upon arrival as a nod to our celebration. The small, thoughtful amenities go a long way to make a place stand out. There were no drawbacks to our time here, and we confidently recommend staying here throughout your Kauai vacation adventure.
While the Grand Hyatt is hard to leave, Kauai has too many gorgeous views and enticing adventures to spend your whole trip pool-side. While it’s not a large island, nature shows off in a big way here. If you’re looking to make the most of your time on Kauai, check out our action packed four-day itinerary.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Kauai is known for being home to one of the most beautiful and recognizable coastlines in the world: the Nāpali Coast. It’s a breathtaking combination of rugged cliffs and steep valleys that abruptly drop off into the ocean. The grandeur of the topography is memorable in and of itself, but what really makes the Nāpali Coast dazzling is the palette of glittering greens and blues, in stark contrast to the neutrals of the underlying foundation. From a day hike to a multi-night backpacking trip, this choose-your-own-adventure trail should be at the top of your to-do list when visiting Kauai.
While going on a hike seems simple enough, you would find some unforeseen obstacles if you’d hoped to just show up the day-of. Below we’ve detailed everything you need to know to ensure you actually make it on the Kalalau Trail. Cheers to enjoying this beautiful gem of Kauai!
Two of us have made our way to Kauai and hiked the Kalalau trail— one visit in October and one in January. Hard to say which time of year is better, because this hike is as memorable as it is breathtaking, practically any time of year!
Walk It Out
Kauai does not have a road that circles the perimeter of the island as they were unable to carve out a path through this beautiful but tenuous coastline. As a matter of fact, one of the only way through the Nāpali Coastline by land is via the Kalalau Trail. This trail is a 22-mile round trip hiking adventure, not designed for the faint of heart. The trail crosses through five valleys before ending in the Kalalau Valley. Experienced backpackers will tackle the trail in its entirety, but visitors looking to explore a more palatable 4-mile hike to Hanakapi’ai Beach make the trek in spades every day.
Reservations
The Kalalau Trail extends predominantly through the Nāpali Coast State Wilderness Park; however, the trail starts in Hāʻena State Park. Both Hāʻena State Park (HSP) and the Nāpali Coast State Wilderness Park (NCSWP) were closed for over a year from 2018- 2019 due to severe flooding throughout the north shore of Kauaʻi. Upon reopening the parks, the quantity of visitors permitted each day was limited.
In order to gain admission to the parks, advanced reservation is required. For most, that means making a HSP Entry Reservation. Hikers with this reservation are granted access as far as the Hanakapi’ai Valley. If you plan to hike farther or do any camping, you must acquire a NCSWP camping permit. This will grant you admission into the park as well as the right to camp in authorized areas, for up to five days.
Reservations for both HSP entry and NCSWP camping become available at midnight 30 days prior. These reservations go extremely quickly. With a 4-hour time difference between Hawaii and Wisconsin, we assumed we could wake up at 6am and book our reservation without issue. By 2am (HAST) all the ‘parking + entry’ passes had been sold out. We had flexibility in our trip, and were able to wake up and secure the passes the following morning; however, we were shocked at just how fast the passes went.
What’s a Gal to Do
Your HSP entry reservation will provide access to Ke’e Beach, which requires no hiking to reach. There’s a short (< ½ mile) walk from the parking lot to the beach, but this is easily reached by anyone without profound mobility impairments. Along the Kalalau trail, you will be permitted as far as the Hanakāpīʻai valley, but even with this boundary, there’s still a couple spots to adventure to. Most popular, the hike to Hanakāpīʻai Beach is 4-miles round trip. You can also make the longer trek to Hanakāpīʻai Falls, which is a longer 8-mile round trip adventure. Due to time constraints we just hiked to the beach and felt we saw a gorgeous slice of the coast.
Tips & Recommendations
Tip #1
When you’re making your reservation, the ‘parking + entry’ is going to be the preferential option for most people; however, the shuttle + entry is a good back-up option. It will require a bit more planning and flexibility, but at the end of the day still affords the same adventure experience.
Tip #2
If you already own hiking poles and you have room whilst packing, you won’t regret bringing them with you. If you don’t, there’s a collection of 30-40 walking sticks that people borrow and return to the trailhead. The nature of the trail is quite muddy, so even if you consider yourself to be above-averagely fit, I would recommend grabbing a walking stick.
Tip #3
Right before you reach Hanakāpīʻai Beach, there’s a small stream that must be crossed. When we were there, it was possible for bold hikers to hop across a handful of rocks to cross without soaked shoes (actually hopping was involved, it wasn’t the easiest of crossings). The level of the stream could change the feasibility of this. A more popular option was changing into a pair of water shoes and fording the river.
While it’s a little cumbersome to carry the extra weight of shoes throughout the hike, we actually recommend crossing in a pair of water shoes as the cool water feels extremely refreshing after the warm hike. Ensure to pack a small towel as well to dry your feet off before putting your boots back on.
Tip #5
For hikers that stop to admire the surf at Hanakapi’ai Beach, it can be tempting to think about going for a swim. This is HIGHLY discouraged as drownings have happened here in the past. Instead take a dip in the stream previously aforementioned as its an equally cool but much safer alternative. The ankle to mid-thigh depth water may not be ideal for swimming but it’s quite refreshing with a much lower risk of drowning.
Tip #6
Cell phone service is pretty terrible even as you approach Hāʻena, so you’ll want to ensure you screenshot your reservation in advance. In that same vein, if you are visiting the park with a group that plans to split up, agree on a specific time and place to meet back up to mitigate any future concerns.
Tip #7
The full 22-mile hike was a bit more adventure than we were looking to get into for this vacation adventure, but there’s loads of awesome resources to help backpackers prepare and pack for the journey.
Final Notes
The Nāpali Coast is the crown jewel of Kauai, and we so hope you are able to enjoy exploring the coastline and views. This is such an unforgettable day hike and a must-do adventure on your next Kauai trip. Make sure you set a reminder to ensure you can snag reservations! We wish you all the best in your hiking endeavors.
Looking for what’s next on the itinerary? Curious about what else there is to do in Kauai? Check out our perfect, action packed four-day itinerary to maximize your time on Kauai. Hiking the Nāpali Coast is one thing, but seeing it by boat or plane is a whole other exhilarating experience.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Excited to spend 4 days exploring Kauai? Between the five of us sisters, we’ve visited a handful of times, and throughout our explorations, we’ve curated the perfect itinerary. From can’t miss sights to splurge-worthy treats to niched local stops, our four-day itinerary is the perfect way to maximize your time on Kauai.
Each of the Hawaiian islands has its own charm, and Kauai invokes a rather ethereal natural beauty. Kauai has been nicknamed the Garden Island, and one look at the lush landscape will tell you why. Nature’s bounty abounds in this tropical haven of outdoor adventure. From hiking through the dazzling Nā Pali Coast coast to wandering through the immense Waimea Canyon, the magnitude of Kauai is impressive– especially for being such a relatively small island!
While Kauai is not immune to the heavy tourism the Hawaiian islands experience, you will find it less populated and a bit more rural than its neighboring islands, such as Oahu or Maui. This generally lends itself to less shopping and late night dining options and more steal-your-breath hikes and outdoor adventures, allowing for more natural, unmarred Hawaiian beauty.
Despite Kauai being relatively small, there is no circumferential road around the island. This is due to the immense topography of the northwest region. Efforts have been made in the past to try and connect the loop, but they have all been in vain. Some areas are just meant to remain untouched! While this might mean a little extra driving time, the views in Kauai are nothing short of spectacular, so get excited for a little extra time in the car taking in the scenery.
You wouldn’t have amazing canyons, emerald cliff coastlines, and astounding waterfalls without the terrain Kauai is known for. The island is our favorite because of its rugged charm, not in spite of! At the end of four days, you’ll already be trying to plan your next trip back!
DAY ONE
Due to the spread out nature of Kauai, a rental car is a must if you really want to see what the island has to offer. Last time we visited we rented from Budget, and loved our ride. When we were picking our car up, we were offered an inexpensive upgrade to a convertible mustang, and jumped on it. While a convertible isn’t always the most practical choice, we found it afforded us panoramic views of the scenery whenever we were driving. Additionally, when we drove at night, whichever one of us was the passenger was able to recline and have a truly fantastic view of the stars.
We’ve also rented a through Turo a couple times in the past, and had great success with that as well. Regardless who you rent from, don’t forget to sunscreen-up if you’re driving with the top down!
Big Love for Hyatt
Time to ditch the bags and start exploring! While there’s thousands of options to choose from, we recommend staying on the south side of the island— at Grand Hyatt Kauai Resort and Spa, if you’re looking to splurge. If you arrive in the morning, they’ll store your bags for you, so you don’t miss out on any adventuring time. It’s by no means guaranteed, but they actually comped us each an appetizer and drink, while we waited for our room to be ready. Can you say amazing customer service?!
The sprawling property and ample restaurants to chose from are a great way to stretch your legs and grab a bite after your flight. The Captain’s Bar is pool-side, making it an easy stop. The drinks are amazing, and the nachos disappear quickly!
Birds Eye View
Heading back to the airport so soon? Get excited for an airplane tour with AirVentures. This tour is an INCREDIBLE way to start the trip, and it can actually help shape your plan for the subsequent days, if you catch a glimpse of anything particularly enticing. From your perch in the sky, you’ll see whales breaching, gorgeous Waimea Canyon, the lush Hanalei Valley, and Manawaiopuna Falls (from Jurassic Park). Not to mention the crown jewel: a dazzlingly Nā Pali Coastline. You’ll be able to enjoy the coastline from a few different vantage-points while in Kauai, but this one is almost guaranteed to be the most amazing.
Pro trip #1: Try to snag the co-pilot seat if you can. This will have the best view as it’s the least obstructed and best for taking photographs.
Pro tip #2: While they have a handful of different time slots throughout the day, in the winter-time, the mid-afternoon is the most ideal for the perfect Nā Pali Coast views. The coastline is on the west side of the island, so if you go too early in the day, the breath-taking views are still illustrious but a little shadowed.
Back at the Ranch
Returning to the resort, hop into your bathing suit and enjoy some relaxing pool time. There are so many pools to choose from… or perhaps floating through them all on the lazy river is more your style. Just before the sun sets, make your way towards the ocean, and watch the daylight slip away, from your cozy vantage point on a swing or bench. Shipwreck Beach, the beach behind the Hyatt Grand, doesn’t get a view of the sunset, BUT depending on the time of year, you might get lucky enough to spot whales playing out in the ocean. (As a note, Shipwreck Beach is a public beach, so even if you aren’t staying there, it’s an option for exploration.)
Finish your evening at the Seaview Terrace for some dinner and drinks. As you might imagine, the tables are set up on a terrace overlooking the property and ocean, and with nightly live music, it makes for a groovy ambiance. The fresh air and delicious skewers are a delightful end to your first day.
DAY TWO
The Kalalau Trail
Today’s big adventure? Hiking the gorgeous Nā Pali Coast. From the south part of the island, it takes a little under two hours to make it up to Haena State Park, where the trail starts. You’ll want to head out early to make it to the Haena by mid-morning, making this a perfect morning to catch the sunrise before heading out.
The Kalalau Trail is a 22 mile round trip stretch of hiking through the Nā Pali Coast. Determined hikers and backpackers may conquer this in its entirety; however, due to limited time on the island, we only recommend tackling a 4-mile loop of the trail. Many avid hikers may consider a 4 mile hike easy peasy, but the elevation in conjunction with the muddy nature of the trail makes a 4 mile trek moderately difficult, even for experienced hikers.
Pro tip #1: A limited number of people are allowed into Haena State Park each day, so you must make reservations in advance to be admitted into the park. The tickets for daily admission go VERY quickly. They become available 30 days prior, so if you are hoping to visit Haena State Park, you should be ready to purchase your ticket early in the morning 30 days out. Spots go quickly! For more information, check out our blog post on The Kalalau Trail.
Pro tip #2: Don’t forget to screenshot your reservation before going. There is no cell service at the guard shack.
Beach Bum
Depending on how much daylight you have left to burn after you’re done hiking, there’s a couple options for exploration in the north part of the island. If you’re tuckered out from the morning, head to Hanalei Beach for some well-earned relaxation. There’s a long pier that stretches into the bay, providing a top-notch view of a memorable landscape, as the sandy beach stretches out to a mountainous backdrop.
Either on your way to or from the beach, swing by the Ching Young Village. There’s shops and loads of casual restaurants that make grabbing a snack or meal super easy. We snagged a dole whip from Aloha Juice Bar and found it quite refreshing.
Bottoms Up
If you have any interest in craft distillery tours, stopping by Hanalei Spirits is an absolute MUST. You will be blown away by the heart and the history behind their spirits. You will not find a better Kauai souvenir than a bottle of their traditional Hawaiian Okolehao. Tours are done by appointment only with Vindi, who is as warm and kind as she is knowledgable about using the land to create their spirits. Be sure to schedule in advance if you’re hoping to hear their story and sample all their local spirits!
Pit Stops
On the way back south, you’ll pass through the quaint town of Kappa. As you drive through, there’s a stretch of shops and restaurants, each more intriguing than the next. If you haven’t tried ‘lau lau’ yet, the Kahula pork lau lau at Pono Market is worth. pulling. over. for.
If you’re in the mood for a little pick-me-up, Kauai Juice Company sells a wide array of curated juices and kombuchas. While they are a little spendy, we tried four juices and a few different kombuchas while we were there, and wished we’d bought more! So refreshing after a day outside.
While you’re in Hawaii, you have to try a shaved ice at some point. A local recommended Wailua Shave Ice Kauai to us, and we were so delighted with our frozen treats. Two people could easily share one; however, with such diverse flavors on the menu, it’s hard not to pick your own.
DAY THREE
Ahoy Mates
Prepare yourself for a day jam-packed with nature’s beauty. Setting sail with Captain Andy’s Na Pali Coast Tour means an early start and a lovely day out on the boat. Happiness is the feeling of the sun on your face and the wind in your hair as you lounge on a 65-foot sailboat. While the main objective is views of the Nā Pali Coast, visiting in winter almost guarantees a whale sighting or two. We’ve been lucky enough to encounter a pod of dolphins and some sea turtles as well.
As with any tour, the crew and captain are nothing short of amazing. From keeping everyone safe, well-fed, and happy to providing local recommendations, everyone goes above and beyond to make it a lovely trip out on the water. The tour includes breakfast, fresh juice, lunch, and drinks. Chef Dion is a rockstar, and so everything will be delicious!
Pro tip: throughout the winter months, the ocean tends to become more choppy later in the day, so if you’re visiting December through February, your best bet will be getting out in the morning. If you are visiting in late spring, summer, or early fall, you might be better off going on an afternoon tour. By mid-afternoon, the sun has swung to the west side of the island, pulling the Nā Pali Coast from the shadows and putting it on prominent display.
It’s amazing how much time of day affects the color palette of the coastline.
Canyon ‘O Canyon
Waimea Canyon State Park has been dubbed the Grand Canyon of the Pacific, and once you catch a glimpse, you’ll understand why. This immense canyon is shaded in hues of green and orange, making it quite the sight to behold. While you’re driving through the park, there are a myriad of viewpoints and overlooks, so if you miss one, there will be another! The sheer quantity of lookout points means you do not have to go hiking to “earn” a fantastic view; however, there are ample hiking trails to discover throughout the park.
Note: It can get a little chilly and windy up here, so be sure you have a jacket or wind-breaker to keep you warm.
Sunset
Maximizing your views during daylight hours means catching the sunset at MacArthur Beach (also called Kekaka Beach Park). A less touristy beach spot, this is the perfect place to come dig your toes into the sand as you watch the sun slip away. Plus, depending on when you depart, this may be your last chance to catch a Hawaii sunset.
Big Brewski
After a long day, rest your weary bones at Kauai Island Brewing Company to enjoy some good food and drinks. So close to the ocean, it’s hard not to enjoy the seafood. We both ordered fish (delish), but heard good things about their pizza from multiple sources. Their beers more than hit the spot.
DAY FOUR
Power Start to the Day
The Maha’ulepu Heritage Trail is about a four-mile loop round trip, but this trail is far less of a hike and more of a scenic walk. Starting at Shipwreck Beach, this makes for an easy departure as The Grand Hyatt Kauai Resort and Spa is right on Shipwreck Beach. There’s nothing like knowing you have an imminent flight to make you want to stretch your legs a little extra!
Big Chillin‘
Perhaps you’re less keen on long walks and more preferential towards passively soaking up the sun. Take in the relaxing sunny warmth and lull of the ocean poolside or with your toes in the sand. Grand Hyatt Kauai has no shortage of pools to enjoy— plus a fun saltwater lagoon. Hammocks, swings, and jacuzzis really provide endless opportunities to bask in the sun.
The Anara Spa is on the grounds, and it’s a perfect way to unwind luxuriously. From massages to facials, and everything in between, the Anara Spa delivers calming, tropical healing in spades. A spent unwinding at the Grand Hyatt Kauai flies by… check out our blog post reviewing the property for everything there is to do!
Sushi Please
Stevenson’s Library is one of the restaurants on property at the Hyatt. Whether you’re seated at the gorgeous koa wood bar or outside in the open-air lanai, the ambiance exudes an air of cultivated relaxation, with sweeping ocean views. Even if you aren’t staying at the resort, the sushi is worth going out of your way for. If you’re in the mood for a drink, dive into their chapter book of inventive martinis, tropical cocktails, and both classic and creative whiskey drinks. They also have sake, beer, and wine… something for everyone!
Just a heads up, if you know you want to check this spot out, make a reservation. If you make a last minute decision to head there for dinner, make sure you arrive early as it’s not uncommon for there to be a line 5-10 parties deep waiting for the doors to open.
Beer Me
Kauai Beer Company has a perfect pre-departure location as it’s less than 5 minutes from the airport. With excellent food and beer options, it’s a perfect way to indulge in one last local fix before you head home.
Kauai in Review
If you’re looking for staggering feats of nature and abounding luscious landscapes, Kauai should be at the top of your travel bucket list. That being said, you will not find extensive night life or high-end shopping here. Kauai is not immune to the reflections of tourism; however, Kauai is inviting to visitors so enthralled by her natural beauty, the tawdry of mainstream tourism isn’t found here .
When visiting the Hawaiian Islands, it’s not uncommon to try and fit in visits to more than one island. As such, this can mean figuring out how to allot your days. In our opinion, four days/three nights is the minimum you should set aside for Kauai. While it’s not a large island, nature shows off in a big way here. Our four-day agenda is rather action packed, so you could spread this out over six days if you have more time and desire a bit slower pace.
Considering heading to Big Island? Check out our six-day itinerary to maximize your time adventuring around this large, diverse isle.
All photographs contained in this blog post were taken by the sisters of Five Wandering Soles, unless otherwise noted.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
The largest in the Hawaiian archipelago, the Island of Hawai’i is fondly referred to as Big Island. The moniker is certainly well suited as the breadth of landscape here is unmatched. From snow-covered mountains to black sand beaches to active volcanos to luscious green valleys, there is truly no end to the adventures that await on Big Island. With this action-packed one week itinerary, you will get to experience it ALL!
Each Hawaiian island has its own ambiance or draw. Big Island is unmatched in its sprawling landscape and diverse microbiome. It’s also one of the best places in the world to snorkel with manta rays, which is a truly surreal experience. Big Island is a perfect destination for anyone looking for both the beautiful coastal scenery Hawaii is known for, as well as endless breathtaking hikes, catching a peek at some molten lava, and watching the sunset from an almost 14,000-foot snowy mountain top.
With the Island of Hawai’i being as large as it is, one week affords you enough time to hit the highlights and capture the essence of Big Island.
While you may think of Hawaii as a beachy keen relaxation destination, you will assuredly miss out if you spend your entire trip at the beach… or even worse, the pool. Below we have detailed the perfect itinerary for anyone looking to make the most of their days adventuring around on Big Island.
The Nitty Gitty Before Paradise City
Remember, Big Island is just that…. rather big, which means in order to see everything, you will want a rental car. In order to hit all the highlights, you will be putting in some time in the car driving around, but all your drives come with breath-taking views, so it won’t feel like a hardship.
Big Island has the most climate diversity and is more spread out than her sister islands. Vibe check: pretty laid back. There’s not going to be as much retail shopping or late night dining options. That being said, there will be gorgeous hikes, snorkeling, and sandy beaches available in spades!
DAY ONE
Depending on where you flew in from and when you departed is largely going to dictate how much you’ll be looking to do upon arrival.
Keeping the day-one itinerary light, an easy first post-flight activity is a nice walk along the beach. Wawaloli Beach Park is close to the airport and makes for a lovely first stop, with lots of little tide pools to explore. As a bonus, there’s restrooms and showers here, so even if you get a bit spirited in your walking about, you can rinse off before you get back in the car.
Catching your first Hawai’i sunset will be a priority. Along Ali’i Drive, behind the Kona Inn Shopping Village, there’s a large grassy area that stretches up to a seawall. This creates a perfect, relaxing perch to watch the sun go down. As a bonus, there’s a plethora of restaurants and shops in this area if you want to wander around and grab dinner. A scoop of gelato from Gypsea Gelato will be just the perfect cool dessert to accompany your dreamy sunset views.
Hilo-Bound
Logistically it makes the most sense to arrive and depart from the same airport, so even though you’ll likely arrive in Kona, we suggest hopping in the car and scooting on over to Hilo on day-one, so you can start day-two already there. The drive across the island is pretty easy. If you end up driving at night, there aren’t any street lights on Saddle Road, which is less of a safety concern and far more of a delight for the star-gazing passengers.
A note for late arrivals: Most dining establishments are not open past typical dinner hours, so if you have an evening flight, your post-8pm options will be limited. Open until 9:30pm, Hawaiian BBQ Deli is a fantastic fast-casual option in the Kailua-Kona area. The plates are delicious as well as large, so it’s easily shared between two people.
DAY TWO
There’s a certain beauty to exploring a new place by just wandering around and getting a little lost. Having an Airbnb or hotel walking distance from the downtown area makes this an easy way to start the day.
If you’re looking to cover a little extra ground, consider using the Hawai’i Island Bikeshare system to cruise around. There’s a post near Russell Carroll Mo’oheau Country Park, which is super accessible. Either walk or ride down to the Liliuokalani Gardens… a serene garden that provides gorgeous views of Hilo Bay and the cityscape. Fun to both walk and bike through!
Back downtown, Kula Shave Ice has some fantastic shaved ice and açaí bowls… we can personally attest that the Hilo Bowl makes for a great post-bike ride treat. The Hilo Farmer’s Market is open every day of the week, but Wednesday and Saturday are their bigger market days, with more vendors.
Mauna Kea
The afternoon is all about Mauna Kea. Who goes to Hawai’i and expects to find a snowy mountain? Despite being a little out of place in a tropical paradise, watching the sunset from the top of this mountain is a must for any Big Island traveler.
It takes a little over an hour to get from Hilo to the Mauna Kea Visitor Center (VIS), but before you leave, pack yourself a tasty lunch— or at the very least some hearty snacks. You won’t find a food court on Mauna Kea. You’ll also want to pack an extra bottle of water or two as well… you’d always rather have too much as opposed to not enough! The suggested amount is 500 ml (about two cups) per person per hour.
Once you arrive at the VIS, take a minute to stretch your legs and walk through the center. It’s interesting to learn a bit about the mountain and talk to the rangers. This stop is not only a nice break, but it’s even more important than that. It’s highly recommended to spend 30 minutes at the VIS acclimating to the altitude. Mauna Kea is unique in its environment– there’s not many places in the world that allow you to go from beachside (elevation = 0 ft) to almost 14,000 ft. elevation in 2 hours. As such, it’s important to take some time to ensure your body can handle it. Altitude sickness is no joke!
If you’re feeling good, there’s a less than 1 mile unnamed hike that begins across the road from the VIS. Not only did it provide a beautiful vantage point to take in neighboring Mauna Loa, but it makes for a nice litmus test to assess how you’d do hiking at elevation.
The Summit
From the VIS, the summit is only 8 miles, but due to the grade and unpaved road, it will take another 30 minutes to reach the summit. We recommend leaving the VIS to head up at least an hour before sunset, so you can walk around a bit and snag yourself a good spot to watch the sunset.
If you’re an avid hiker and the elevation doesn’t scare you, leave 2 hours before sunset to make time for a detour. On your way up, stop at the third gravel parking lot, just past mile marker 7, to find Lake Waiau. This isn’t what you’d call a popular or frequently traveled trail, but there should be a visible path to follow.
The hike is about 1.5 miles round trip, but if you’re not used to hiking at elevation, you may find this short hike a bit more challenging than expected. Lake Waiau is considered a sacred space, so taking the effort to see this unique natural phenomenon is special. For more information on Lake Waiau or hiking around, check out our Mauna Kea blog post)
Once you’re at the summit, break out your jacket (don’t forget to pack one!) and find a good spot to watch the sun go down. Watching the sun set above the clouds at 13,796 feet is a breath-taking way to end the day. Once the sun is gone, make your way back down to the VIS. Believe it or not, the star-gazing is actually better at the lower elevation. Keep your eyes peeled… you might see a shooting star or two!
Important notes:
You NEED a car with four wheel drive (4WD) or all wheel drive with low range, with 4WD being the preferred option. Between the unpaved road and the steep grade, this is important not only on the way up, but to safely get down from the mountain as well. You do NOT want any brake overheating or failure.
Another car tip, be sure to leave Kona with a full tank. You must have at least half a tank of gas before you begin your ascent to the summit from the VIS.
Do not plan to summit Mauna Kea if you have been scuba diving in the past 24 hours. The extent of pressure changes in that amount of time and the excess nitrogen accumulated can cause decompression sickness.
Pro-trip: if you plan on stargazing at the visitor’s center, park in the spots facing AWAY from the visitor’s center. Car headlights are rather disruptive to people trying to stargaze and star-gazing enthusiasts will get feisty with you.
Between the five of us, we’ve driven up a handful of times, so it’s nothing to be scared of, you just definitely want to make sure you are prepared when you’re planning your trip! If navigating the car situation sounds too intimidating for you, there’s various commercial tour services available to choose from. Most will provide you with a ride as well as a nice warm jacket, so you don’t have to worry about packing that!
Cheers To You
Rolling back into Hilo, make a beeline straight forOla Brew to enjoy ice-cold beer and some hard-earned dinner. Going to a craft brewery, you expect delicious beers (and they deliver), but we were SO impressed with all the food there as well. Guaranteed to leave you wanting more, the Kalbi Meatballs shared plate is *chefs kiss* fantastic, and the A’A was Salvador’s favorite beer. If you only visit one brewery during your trip, it should be Ola!
DAY THREE
The name of the game today is exploring as much of the Hawai’i Volcano National Park (HVNP) as you can… because how often in life does one have the opportunity to see a volcano? Heading south from Hilo, HVNP is an easy 45 minutes south.
When you arrive, the visitor center should be your first stop. It functions as an excellent starting point to make a game plan, empty your bladder, and lather on the sunscreen. There are interactive maps and park rangers available to help direct you wherever you need to head.
Crater Rim Drive
Next up? Continue along Crater Rim Drive and park near the Kīlauea Iki trail or the Thurston lava tube. These areas are close to one another and easily walkable, so snag a parking spot wherever you can. The lava tube isn’t anything too crazy, but it’s worth checking out just to experience how dark it gets down there— plus it’s wild to think lava once rushed through the underground tube you’re standing in.
Across the road from the lava tube is the beginning of the Kīlauea Iki trail, which will lead you down to the floor of the Kīlauea Iki Crater. It doesn’t take long to wind your way down to the crater floor, and from there, the trail is marked with cairns, or small stone piles, to keep visitors on track.
Just putting your walking shoes to work, your next stop will be driving to the Crater Rim Drive trailhead and wandering out to the Keanakākoʻi Overlook. Not only does this perch provide a glimpse at the Keanakākoʻi Crater, but it affords a spectacular view of Kīlauea. Kīlauea is an active volcano that intermittently erupts, most recently in September 2024. While this view would be interesting any time, walking out to this viewpoint is a MUST when Kīlauea is erupting. How many erupting volcanoes are you going to see in one lifetime?!
Chain of Craters Road
In what seems like a world away, the 20 mile drive out to the southern sea cliffs is beyond scenic as the landscape changes drastically before your very eyes. From the jungle-esque tropics near the visitor’s center, to the endless span of volcanic rock, to the stunning blue of the ocean crashing into a wide swath southern coastline, the drive out to the Hōlei Sea Arch is its own delight.
Once you’re there, a short walk will take you to the Hōlei Sea Arch, serving as an example of both the ocean’s power and nature’s sculpting. The dynamic surf makes for a hypnotic view as the crashing waves slowly erode the southern coastline. Being rather set apart from the more popular areas of the park, it’s easy to consider skipping a visit to the Hōlei Sea Arch, but you have to remember the drive itself is as amazing as the coastline views themselves.
The Southern Loop
When you’ve had your fill of HVNP, it’s time to begin the drive back to Kona, but the return visit will be filled with a couple pit-stops.
First up, cruise to Punalu’u Black Sand Beach. The sand is an inky black, a plentiful byproduct of the lava rock’s erosion. Keep your eyes peeled for sea turtles as they’re popular here!
If you’re a thrill seeker, looking for an adrenaline rush, be sure to stop by South Point. Not only is this the southernmost point in the United States, but it’s a known spot for cliff diving— with an approximately 40 to 60-foot drop down into the ocean below. The water there is usually 20-30 ft deep, and there’s a ladder hanging down to aid adrenaline junkies in their climb back up. Definitely not for everyone, but certainly a unique opportunity. Begs the age old question…. if your friends decided to jump off a cliff, would you jump too?
It goes without saying, but cliff jumping is always performed at your own risk, and should only be considered when conditions are safe. Not only is there the jump itself to consider but one also must be able to climb back up out of the water. Never do anything you’re not comfortable with, and always trust your gut!
If you’re still kickin’ and feeling a bit groovy after all that adventure, Gertrude’s Jazz Bar, back in Kona, makes for a sensational end to the day. With amazing craft cocktails and effervescent live music, this is the Hawaiian night cap (or two!) you’ll miss once you’re back home
DAY FOUR
Snorkel Exploration
About 30 minutes south of Kona, you’ll find Two Step Beach– right next to Pu’uhonua O Honaunau National Historic Park (also worth checking out if you have time!). You don’t have to pay to get into the park to access Two Step, but if you’re interested in the park, it could function as an easy multi-purpose parking spot. If you just want to snorkel, there’s a $5 parking lot available, directly across the street from the beach.
Two Step is called a beach, but it lacks a sandy shoreline. Instead the lava rock meets the ocean, with a natural two-level shelf that allows snorkelers to enter and exit the bay area with ease. The water is crystal clear, with a colorful assortment of fish. The sea urchins are also plentiful, but as long as you’re aware of your surroundings, it’s more than safe.
Kealakekua Bay is another notoriously good snorkeling spot nearby. Kealakekua Bay is reachable via neighborhood parking and a short walk OR, if you’re looking to take the road less traveled, a 4-mile round trip hike. That being said, this hike lacks shade and is rather gravelly, so we recommend saving your morning energy for snorkeling and diving around.
Cheap Thrills
Next up on the agenda? Cliff diving! Heading back up north toward Kona, End of The World makes for your next potential thrilling adventure, or perhaps just a gorgeous view. It’s a short yet gravelly walk from the parking area to the lava rock lookouts.
While it’s a common theme on Big Island, the contrast of the sparkling blue water against the black lava rock is nothing short of enchanting. It’s so relaxing to sit back and listen to the rhythm of the water… not many people can do that at home!
Context clues are huge. If it’s good day for jumping, there will be loads of people— of all ages— jumping in. If there’s no one around but powerful waves, it’s your sign to just post up in the shade and take in nature from above. It’s worth saying twice, never do anything you’re not comfortable with, and always trust your gut!
hike it out
Heading north past Kona, your next destination is Kiholo Bay. There’s an easy-to-zip-past-if-you-don’t-know-its-there parking lot a little north of mile marker 81 on Queen Ka’ahumanu Highway. It’s about a mile hike down to the bay, and shade coverage is intermittent, so ensure you bring some water with you. Full disclosure, the hike itself is pretty nondescript, but the trail leads you right to a lagoon area, which is incredibly serene. Keep an eye out for sea turtles swimming around.
The easy to miss parking lot and one mile hike out to the coast make this a less touristy locale. If you’re looking to have a few moments to yourself with nature, this is a lovely spot. You can walk along the beach to your heart’s content, but the trail goes all the way down to Wainanalii Lagoon making it about 5.5 miles round trip.
DAY FIVE
There’s nothing like a good breakfast to start the day off right. With a morning full of hiking on the agenda, 808 Grindz Cafe is the perfect spot to ensure we were all fueled up for some hiking. As you head north on the island, you won’t need your phone to occupy you, as the ever-changing topography is rapturing.
Pololu Valley
The drive from Kona should take less than an hour and a half, but it will be your first sampling of just how amazing it is to get a little lost in the countryside of Hawaii. As you drive, keep an eye out into the ocean (or perhaps just have your passengers stay on the lookout), because it’s possible to see whales breaching from the road as they migrate to Hawaii’s warm waters from December to March.
The farthest north of the seven valleys etched into the northern coastline, Pololu Valley is immediately gorgeous. Upon arrival, you are greeted with magnificent views of the valley from the lookout point. From there, the trail leads down to a gorgeous black sand beach.
The black sand beach and peaceful creek make this a nice area to relax. The Awini trail previously continued to a lookout over the Honokane Nui Valley, but in the years since our last visit, this trail has closed down. This serves as an important reminder to be a respectful visitor… if the land isn’t preserved and respected, opportunities (and unique hikes) will disappear!
Pro tip: if you’re adverse to a nature-pee, make sure you stop at a gas station or grocery store before you reach Pololu because there are no facilities there. No bathrooms, no place to fill your water bottle… nothing. On a busier day, a business savvy local may be found perched near the lookout with a chest full of ice cold waters, juices, and hard seltzers for sale. That being said, he’s not guaranteed to be there, so I recommend arriving prepared.
Post-Hike Delights
All that hiking works up an appetite, so we suggest making your way to Big Island Brewhaus. Lunch is delicious… we can personally attest to the fish bites, burrito, and BLT being perfect post-hike sustenance. Even if you’re not hungry, their craft beers alone were worth stopping by for!
Tickets to the Alien Ballet
You can’t have a full day of adventures without including some evening exploration! Kona is one of a handful of places in the world where you have the opportunity to observe manta rays as they feed. The experience itself is rather wild. Manta rays feed on plankton, which are attracted to sunlight, or at night, the LED light boards put in the water.
As a front row observer, you hold onto the board and merely watch as the mantas astound. They will perform endless barrel rolls and skim along the board— they might even accidentally bump into you once or twice. It’s truly so unlike anything either you may have seen or experienced before. We highly recommend Hawaiian Adventures– we rather enjoyed being part of a small-group tour. Be sure to pack your GoPro or underwater camera!
Sometimes weather can affect tour safety, so booking an activity in the beginning/middle of your trip, may help ensure you actually get to go. If something happens, you can always re-organize your days to make another evening work!
As a note, manta rays are not social creatures, so observing them in their natural habitat is not inherently harmful to them. If you’re interested in manta ray conservation, you can check this out.
DAY SIX
Rise and shine! Spearfishing means an early start to the day, but what a cool way to spend your morning? For any newbie fishermen (or women!) the sequencing Top Shot Spearfishing offers will have you feeling comfortable and confident in do time. The day starts in an open-air classroom where everyone undergoes their spearfishing training to ensure safety and comfortability with the tools and environment. Only once everyone is comfortable does the group head out to the ocean.
Once in the water, the skills on land are integrated in the security of shallow water before the dives are attempted. After spending about two and a half hours out in the ocean, the group heads back to shore with their catches. Top Shot specifically targets invasive species, which is a unique way to use tourism for the island’s betterment. All harvested fish are gut, cleaned, and bagged for successful spearfishers to go make themselves a hard-earned lunch.
Beach Bum Lyfe
After waking up early and working hard all morning, the afternoon vibes are inherently more relaxed. Magic Sands Beach is close-by and it’s the perfect spot to take an afternoon cat nap… if it’s there. The name ‘magic sands’ belies the dynamic presence of the sand. Sometimes it’s there, but other times the tide pulls all the sand out and away.
If you’re looking to try and hit all the breweries on the Island, Kona Brewing make for a nice spot to get out of the sun and enjoy a beer. While Kona Brewing does have a food menu, the street it’s on has a bunch of different options for food, so you can snag whatever strikes your fancy.
From there, either get to walking or hop in the car and head to the Old Kona Airport for sunset. Less than a mile away, this hidden gem is a nice spot to enjoy the sunset away from your fellow tourists. If you thought the current Kona airport is small, the old airport will make it look huge! This area has been turned into a state recreation area… the old runway now serves as a parking lot for the adjacent beach. Definitely low-key but that’s what makes this a perfect peaceful sunset spot!
DAY SEVEN
After spending the last week zooming around the island, your last day should be spent relaxing by the beach. Kauna’oa Beach is arguably the best beach on the island, making it the obvious choice for your sandy leisure-time.
Kauna’oa Beach, like all beaches in Hawaii, is a public beach, but it’s located within The Mauna Kea Beach Hotel. While this may seem a bit confusing, you do not have to be a guest of the hotel to enjoy access to the beach. As a matter of fact, it’s a great way to relax on a gorgeous beach, with access to restrooms, showers, amazing food (and drink) options, and beach equipment rentals. Kids and adults alike can enjoy snorkeling here, but there’s no lifeguard on duty.
The Mauna Kea Beach Hotel averages around $800/night, which is definitely a splurge. As a visitor for the day, parking will cost $21, which may seem a little spendy, but it’s ultimately worth it for the nearby amenities. The public parking lot only holds about 30 cars, so if this sounds like your ideal beach hang, you’ll want to make sure you arrive early to lock down a parking spot. The only downside? This sweet getaway is about 45 minutes north of Kona, but compared to some of you other days of driving, that’s nothing!
peace out girl scout
Once you’re back in Kona, swing by Poi Dog Deli for some fantastic sandwiches to-go and enjoy your dinner with a sunset view. Nothing like ending your trip just how you started it— at your day-one perch along the seawall.
Safe travels back home!
What do ya know?
Big Island holds a special place in our hearts because McKenna (2021) and Dana (2022) each spent 4 months living here while working with the Christian ministry group: Youth With A Mission (YWAM). They spent all their free time exploring and adventuring around, which made them perfect hosts for visiting sisters and friends— hence the perfectly crafted itinerary. We hope you have the most amazing time visiting Hawaii and all she has to share!
If island hopping is the name of your Hawaii-adventure-game, Kauai is the perfect pairing for Big Island. The garden island offers completely different and astonishingly beautiful coastlines, hikes, and waterfalls. Be sure to check out our Kauai blog post if you’re planning to visit.
written by Hannah
Hannah traded the warm beaches of southwest FL for the outdoor adventure locale that is Bend, OR. Despite the distance, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist but loves making time to explore newfound hikes. These days she has some extra pack weight; however, Xavier is notorious for being unimpressed by sweeping vistas.
The common moniker, The Last Frontier, is about as accurate a description as any state could have. Born and raised in Oregon, I thought I knew what the “Wild West” had to offer. I have been lucky enough, since our move to Wisconsin, to befriend a colleagues that grew up in Fairbanks, Alaska. As such, this friendship has afforded me the opportunity to visit this massive state in a couple different occasions. Such as life, it always seems to come down to who you know! This round, I was lucky enough to accompany a group of rowdy, and diverse group of individuals to take a weeklong road trip gallivanting around from Fairbanks to Valdez.
Although this was my second time in this amazing state, the views, topography, and overall essence of nature was just as awe-inspiring. We visited during the summer, which has the infamous 24-hours of sunlight. This is no cheeky saying either, so be prepared— don’t forget your sunscreen… or a sleeping mask!
Download a good podcast, make a groovy playlist, and prepare all your best road trip games, because the round trip drive time from Fairbanks down to Valdez and back is right around 13 hours. While this sounds lengthy (and it is), it’s really not so bad when you take into account a couple things. First and foremost, that’s 13 hours driven over the course of a week, so you’re really not putting in toooo much milage any given day. Secondly, you’re driving around in Alaska! Sweeping vistas and wild animal spottings are all but guaranteed! A beautiful long drive just means a little extra time to appreciate nature.
DAY ONE
Flying into Fairbanks, this will function as both the beginning and end of your road tripping journey. Most of your arrival day will be navigating logistics… picking up the van, grocery shopping, etc. If you happen to arrive early in the day and have already picked up your rental, Denali National Park is a little over a two hour drive away— a bit of a drive for a day trip, but certainly an immense feat of natural beauty. At the end of the day, enjoy a good night’s sleep in a real bed, because it’s about to be a week of van life and sleeping bags!
DAY TWO
As you head out of town, with the wind in your hair, you ride Highway 2 all the way to Clearwater State Recreation Site (CSRS). This stop in the journey comes about 2 hours after departure, so it’s a perfect opportunity to stretch your legs and take in your first Alaskan State Park.
It adds a bit of time, but the town of North Pole is along the way (only 15 minutes south of Fairbanks) if you want to see where all those letters addressed to Sant end up being sent!
The campsite at CSRS operates on first come, first serve availability, so arriving early is in your best interest if you’re keen to camp out there. Eleven miles off the highway, this is a bit of a hidden gem. A bit too early in the day for us to set up camp, we fished for a while and then kept heading south.
Another hour or two down the road, our second and final stop of the day was at the Fielding Lake Recreation Site. We arrived with plenty of time to catch some arctic graylings— they made for an unexpectedly tasty breakfast the next morning!
Road trip blues: it’s worth nothing that a few times along the way, we encountered traffic snags due to construction. They lasted anywhere from 5 minutes to an hour, so have a rockin’ road trip playlist ready for jamming out help time fly.
DAY THREE
After a warm breakfast over the campfire, it’s time to pack up and roll out. Next stop? Valdez!
Taking the drive at a leisurely pace, stopping at any streams that look like they might have a fish or two swimming through, Eagles Rest RV Park will be the final destination on your road trip adventure. With ample space to set up camp, this will be home base for the next few days.
If you’re in the mood for pizza, follow your nose to The Fat Mermaid. It might sound a little crazy, but the smoked salmon pizza is actually delicious… besides, where else would you find smoked salmon as a pizza topping???
DAY FOUR
For the first full day in Valdez, you head out on the water. We rented a boat through Valdez Outfitters, and could not recommend them more. If you feel comfortable captaining your own vessel, your fishing excursion will be considerably cheaper. Alaska-native Ward Dobbs was part of our motley crew, so we felt comfortable going out without additional chartering; however, if you are completely new to Valdez or boating, you may be better off letting someone else do the driving. Plus a captain just might know all the secret spots where the fish like to bite.
The boat ride out to the Prince William Sound takes about an hour or two either way, so this really does become an all day adventure. While catching fish is never guaranteed, if you spend all day out on the water this time of year, you will be hard pressed to not end up with at least a couple fish in your cooler. Plus– you can hardly find a more majestic background to accompany your fishing pursuits.
DAYS FIVE & SIX
Back to back days of fishing to your heart’s content! With loads of fishing in the Valdez area, you can pretty much drop a line in anywhere. One day we took Richardson Highway to Dayville Road and followed it around the Lowe River to an area near the Allison Point Campground.
Another day we just stopped at various pull-outs along the Lowe River and spent an entire day fishing for pinkies. Not quite an action packed agenda, but there’s nothing quite like spending the day along the water with your buddies…. plus fresh fish for dinner!
DAY SEVEN
Rolling out of Valdez, it’s time to make the long trek back up to Fairbanks. If you’re looking to break the journey up a bit, King For A Day Campground and Charters is a nice spot to drop a line in the water and fish for some reds or sockeyes.
Once you’re back in the car, follow the road all the way back up to Big Delta. While we didn’t stay at a campground specifically, there’s plentiful open space to pull off the road and set up your final campsite. Theres nothing quite like watching the sunlight fade as you cook some salmon over a fire pit… what a perfect final camping meal.
All About the Journey
In a perfect world, this road trip clocks in at just over 13 hours round trip, but it’s likely to be a little longer with self-selected scenic detours along the way. While it’s certainly possible to drive all the way down to Valdez in one day, there’s so much more adventure in reveling in the stops along the way. When planning a road trip and camping trip, it’s less about the destination and far more about the journey there. The little stops to fish, wander down a stray road, or rock out in construction traffic while you take in the view are a huge part of what gives a trip like this its charm.
If you have never seen Denali, it’s always an option to take a slightly longer route back up through the Denali National Park on your way to Fairbanks. This adds a cool 4 hours to the drive, but it might just be worth it to see this monster of a mountain.
The most rugged state of them all, Alaska truly is the final frontier for breathtaking views of nature. While there’s a myriad of ways to enjoy the boundless, lush topography, there’s nothing quite like a camping road trip to make you feel connected to the Earth.
written by Salvador
While he isn’t an original member of the squad, he recently married Hannah, and is now fondly considered the-brother-we’ve-never-had by the rest of the sisters. Whenever Salvador travels, assessing the local craft beer scene is a top priority. His favorite foreign beer to date is an unattainable Belgium Brugse Zot he has been unable to find in the States the last few years. Salvador currently speaks two languages, English and Spanish, but every time he goes to Italy, his Italian gets a little better! To pass the time between thrilling excursions, Salvador is a professor of exercise physiology at UWL.
One of the great joys of life is traveling. Money spent exploring the world is money well spent, but money saved while traveling is even better. One of the easiest ways to cut costs while traveling is to use your points… more importantly, your World of Hyatt points. This is literally free money you accrue just by using (and paying off) your credit card each month!
One of our favorite hotel companies to book through when traveling is Hyatt. Not only have our stays here always been more than satisfactory, we have found we love spending the points we accrue through our more mundane stays to enjoy visiting some of their luxurious properties. Compared to other hotel partners, the redemption rate for even the most posh of the Hyatt brands is beyond reasonable for what you receive in return. Hyatt’s portfolio now includes more than 1,000 properties in 69 countries. These range from boutique hotels to all-inclusive resorts and everything in between.
Rack ‘Em & Stack ‘Em
Are you dying to travel but just can’t justify spending the money? It is time for you to up your credit card game. There’s two ways to accrue points for redemption at Hyatt properties.
World of Hyatt Credit Card
There’s two ways to accrue points for redemption at Hyatt properties. The more obvious of the two is signing up for a World of Hyatt credit card. This card offers a 30,000 point sign on bonus for spending $3,000 in the first three months of opening the card. Eager spenders and travelers can accrue up to an additional 30,000 points by earning 2 bonus points per $1 spent (up to $15,000) in the first 6 months of opening your account. You also receive a free night at any Category 1–4 Hyatt hotel or resort every year on your cardmember anniversary…. ca-ching!
The more you spend with your Hyatt card, the faster you accrue points and the elite levels of World of Hyatt membership exponentially increase your benefits. You can learn more about the levels of elite membership and milestone rewards here.
Chase
Chase is the only credit card company that maintains a partnership with Hyatt for transferring point balances. In order to do so, you must have one of Chase’s premium cards: Chase Sapphire Preferred, Chase Sapphire Reserve, or Chase Ink Business Preferred. These cards offer some pretty eye catching sign-up bonuses, easily transferred they equate to a couple nights in a lux hotel. If you travel often, one of these cards may generally be a good choice for you as they also have 2 other hotel partners and 13 airline partners as well.
It Takes Money to Make Money
While there’s both nuance and simplicity to earning Hyatt points, we’re here to help you make the most of them. Here’s a handful of tips we have learned over the years. Points are free money, so you have to make the most of them!
TIP #1
For the Chase Sapphire Preferred card, a 60,000 point sign up bonus is nice, but if you’re on the fence about it, you can always wait for Chase to sweeten the pot. In 2021, with travel beginning to resume, the sign-up bonus rose up to 100,000 points for a couple months over the summer. With almost double the usual benefit, the $95 annual fee is even more worthwhile, when considering the value of that quantity of points.
TIP #2
Ready for a trip? Points burning a hole in your pocket? Being able to transfer your points opens up some exciting point-saving opportunities. Before you book anything, check both the Chase Ultimate Rewards portal as well as what it would cost you in points to book directly through Hyatt.
When booking our stay at the Grand Hyatt Kauai we noticed that booking through the Chase Ultimate Rewards account was going to cost us over 52,000 points per night, while booking through our Hyatt account would only cost 33,000 points per night (and included Grand Club Lounge access). Your Chase points transfer in a 1:1 ratio, so by transferring your points, you could be saving yourself big time!
Below we have detailed an example with the comparison for travel to the Andaz in Costa Rica. Through World of Hyatt, the room runs at 17,000 points/night, for a total of 34,000 points. By comparison, the Chase Ultimate Rewards cost is 59,132 points PLUS another $346 dollars, just for the room and an additional $96 resort fee. It’s a no-brainer that you would be so much better off transferring your points over in a case like this!
redemption through Ultimate Rewards account
redemption through World of Hyatt account
[Just an FYI, you do not need a Hyatt credit card to transfer your points to Hyatt– signing up for a World of Hyatt account is free.]
TIP #3
When you are awarded a free night’s stay, it can be tempting to use that night for any random travel you might be doing, but give it a second thought before you book. Instead, save it for booking a category three or four property to get the most “bang” for your free-night-buck.
If you click on “Hotels & Resorts” and filter by hotel category, you can check out your best options.
TIP #4
Piggy-backing off that save-the-free-night-for-a- fancier-resort mentality, with Hyatt, when you book a resort entirely with points or redeem a free night, you do not have to pay a resort fee. While these fees vary from one property to another, they can add up to hundreds of dollars, depending on your length of stay.
TIP #5
If you have a World of Hyatt account, you receive a complimentary night at a category 1-4 property after you have stayed at five different brands under their Hyatt umbrella. What makes this especially enticing is that stays booked with points or other award nights are included in this count.
For example, if you used your points to book a couple nights at Andaz Maui, that would count as one of your five brands visited. This is essentially a fun game of Hyatt bingo. It certainly is not a primary factor in informing your hotel selection, butttt if you’re staying in a city with two different Hyatt brand hotels, this could be an easy deciding factor in which one to book.
TIP #6
Do you have an American Airlines AAdvantage Miles account? If you are an elite World of Hyatt member– this means you are a Discoversit, Globalist, or Explorist– you can earn 1 World of Hyatt Bonus Point for every $1 USD spent on qualifying American Airlines flights. This is *almost* like double dipping as you still received the AAdvantage miles you would already earn as an AAdvantage member. Who doesn’t want extra free points?
How Does It Stack Up?
If you are accustomed to using your points at a Hilton or Marriott hotel group, 30,000… or even 100,000 points might sound like it won’t get you very far. It’s important to recognize the difference here, because Hyatt point thresholds for redemption are much lower— for similar quality stays— as some of their competitor brands.
It’s also worth noting, if you sign up for the Chase Sapphire Preferred card and receive the 60,000 point bonus, you can transfer it to any of their three hotel partners: Hyatt, IGH, or Marriott. The points transfer in a 1:1 ratio to all companies, so unless you are highly preferential towards one of the other two brands, the 60,000 points are going to afford you more travel and luxury through Hyatt than either of the other options.
Have you ever visited a World of Hyatt resort? When we vacation, we find we enjoy adventuring around a bit more independently to truly get a feel for the culture of a given area, but we LOVE ending the last few days of vacation at a cushy Hyatt resort. Most recently, we visited the Andaz Costa Rica Resort on the Papagayo Peninsula and had a truly amazing time.
What’s your favorite World of Hyatt property? Do you have any other tips or tricks for making the most of you Hyatt points? Let us know!
Disclaimer: All photos used in this post were taken directly from the World of Hyatt or Chase website. None of these images are our own.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Born and raised in Florida, there was nothing like experiencing my first real winter to truly understand the meaning of the word COLD. Sure, it’s one thing to go on a rowdy ski trip or go visit your family up north for a week, but it’s a whole other to endure the months-long marathon of cold. It doesn’t happen overnight, but you will start to build a whole new wardrobe of warm layers. I’ve lived in Wisconsin for a couple years now, so here’s a few things I’ve acquired over the years that have made winter survivable! From coats to mittens and everything in between, cheers to finding your best warm layers.
COATS
A good winter coat is THE staple of mandatory winter attire. This is what is going to get you through winter, and you WILL wear it every day of your life for at least three months. For this reason, it’s important to just accept the fact that a good winter jacket is going to be spendy. The purchase may feel frivolous, but when you encounter sub-zero temperatures for the first time, you will feel nothing but grateful that you splurged on a nice jacket.
BIG PAPA
The bread and butter of winter warmth is your long coat. There’s no two ways about it, you want your fanny covered. In my personal opinion, the longer the jacket the better. From November to April, I have this out and at the ready to keep me warm from the top of my head to mid-calf. I personally love having the longest jacket possible, as I am all about covering maximal surface area.
Winter gets cold— like I’m-trying-to-stay-warm-but-it’s-BELOW-ZERO-out-here cold. You want to make sure you’re looking out for your late January and early February self when you purchase this jacket. I am in love with my jacket from Helly Hansen jacket; however, it’s currently out of stock, so I have included a few similar jackets from go-to winter survival brands.
A Shorty on the Side
Potentially the strangest concept of winter jackets is that there’s different “levels” of cold, if you will. In late fall and early spring, you may not need your big, bad jacket. For me, this waist-length coat is perfect for when the weather is in the 40s and 50s….. a born and raised midwestern may find this laughable, so it’s important to note, this is a sliding scale. This is your “a hoodie isn’t warm enough but I don’t really need my big coat yet” jacket.
Run Forest Run
One of the first times Salvador tried to take me running with him in 40 degree weather I had what can only be described as an adult temper-tantrum a quarter mile in, protesting that it’s “just too cold outside to be going on a run!” I am proud to say I have grown since this very Floridian outburst, and will willingly go on runs in the 30s, 40s, and even upper 20s.
If you enjoy running outside and are slightly more hardy to the cold weather than I was (it’s a low bar), a running jacket is something you’ll be glad to have. It’s warm enough to keep the cold at bay but not so insulated that you’ll feel the need to shed layers five minutes into your run.
PANTS
Snow Pants
If you’re considering participation in any sort of winter sport or outdoor adventure, you’re going to want some snow pants. I have both pair of snow pants below, and recommend either pair! The North Face pants come in short and long, in addition to the usual regular, so that if a helpful option for anyone of above and below average height. Pro-tip (from a novice winterer): you definitely want them to have an internal leg gaiter to keep the snow from making its way up your pants or into your boots.
Most snow pants come is small, medium, large, etc. sizing, so in the event that you too have the #slimthicc body type, a snow pants belt is nice to have.
Base Layers
Perhaps you’re familiar with base layers or thermals, but prior to spending much time in Wisconsin, I had never heard of such a thing…. I actually thought Salvador had bought me pajamas for Christmas when he gifted me a pair. The function is right in the name, these layers are the first to go on. They help wick away sweaty moisture and regulate your body heat once you get moving.
Fleece-Lined Leggings
If you exist in leggings 95% of your day, fleece-lined are a MUST PURCHASE. Winter isn’t just about fighting the cold, it’s about escaping the wind as well. The wind will cut through most regular leggings, but that layer of fleece will have your legs and bum staying nice and warm.
BOOTS
A gal’s gotta protect her feet!! In the description of any given pair of boots, it should tell you how insulated they are. Most winter boots shouldn’t have less than 100 grams of insulation, which is sufficient for a fashionable yet functional boot. If you’re hoping to take your boots on some rowdy outdoor adventures, you’ll want a cool 200g or more of insulation.
GLOVES
Walking Gloves
This will be your “lighter” pair of gloves. You want something that will certainly keep your hands warm as you go on a walk, but doesn’t necessarily have the bulkiness of some of the more waterproof gloves. Most of this style of glove will have a finger tip or two that is touchscreen compatible, which makes it a bit easier to use your phone if necessary while out and about.
Snow-Ball Fight Ready
Whether you’re building a snowman, dominating a snowball fight, or shredding the gnar, you’ll want some gloves with a bit more gusto. These gloves are going to be a bit thicker and have more of a waterproof shell. Gloves vs mittens? Gloves allow you a bit more dexterity in your hands; while, gloves allow your fingers to share their warmth and maybe sneak a little hot hands in for added extra heat.
To Beanie or Not to Beanie
As a gal with her hair in a perpetual ponytail or bun, I find that beanies aren’t always my favorite way to keep my noggin warm. In my opinion, knit head bands are the way to go when you’re on the go. Whenever I go on a run in the cold, I bring this guy with me as it keeps my ears protected while still allowing me to dissipate heat. I usually only don a beanie if my hair’s down or in a braid… accepting any and all tips on how one styles a beanie without looking like a little egg-head.
FANNY PACK IT OUT
Perhaps I just lack coordination, but I find that when I’m wearing a coat, I either don’t feel my purse as well or it slips off my shoulder more easily since I’m just bulkier than usual with my 27 layers. Thank the lord fanny packs are back in style, because I have found it super convenient to either wear it around my waist or as a crossbody, so I can have all the essentials right where I need them. Kate Spade no longer sells my go-to fanny pack, but this one is similar!
SCARVES
My go to scarf is the Vinyasa scarf from Lululemon because it’s a perfect weight and can be styled soooo many different ways. It will definitely keep you warm, without feeling too bulky— all the colors and patterns are fun but neutral enough that they’ll match almost everything.
This is by no means an all inclusive list of everything you’ll need to make the most of winter, but it should be more than enough to get you started. Let us know if there’s any winter essentials we missed!
My best tip for surviving winter? Plan a trip! There’s no time like January or February to head somewhere tropical. You won’t regret saving all your PTO days to go be warm for a couple weeks in Hawaii. The seasonal depression gets real when it’s both cold and dark, so having a fun, warm trip planned is something exciting to look forward to, while also providing a much needed reprieve from the cold and snow!
Disclaimer: All photos used in this post were taken directly from the site to which the item is linked. None of the product photographs are our own.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Everyone’s favorite athleisure wear brand, Lululemon is known for the fantastic quality and fit of their clothing. While I certainly love all my Lulu pieces, sometimes it’s nice to have some clothes that fit similarly that I don’t mind roughing up. You know, your I’ll-wear-these-when-I-try-rock-climbing-for-the-first-time leggings. For this reason, we have scoured the internet and found all the best Lululemon dupes.
All of the almost-Lululemon pieces can be found on Amazon, so you still get that fast, free shipping. Even better, most of these items have thousands upon thousand of reviews, with an overall average rating of 4.5/5 stars. The quality might not be identical to Lululemon, but all of these dupes boast rave reviews.
On the Fly Jogger
A perfect casual work pant, the On The Fly 7/8 Pant costs $98, while this dupe from CRZ Yoga is only $32. I own multiple versions of this pant, and LOVE them! The dupe version is perfectly comfy and does the job. You can still move around with easy, but they look a little nicer than a pair of leggings or sweatpants.
Ebb to Street Tank Top
The sport tank is a favorite in our family— comfy enough that you could wear it all day but also supportive enough to work out in! The Ebb to Street tank costs $68, whereas the Attraco dupe will only cost you $26.99. There’s a dupe of the cropped version as well that’s honestly just as excellent… I may own more of the dupe in this lulu tank than I do of the original.
Stretch Luxtreme High-Rise Jogger
A go-to for running errands on the weekend, this jogger is both comfy and cute… in both versions! The Stretch Luxtreme High-Rise Jogger costs a cool $118, while the AJISAI dupe will only cost you $31.98.
Dance Studio Mid-Rise Jogger
I can’t pretend that I’m a dancer, but I do work as a PT, which means I need to be able to squat, lift, and jump around in my work pants and these totally do the job. The Dance Studio Mid-Rise Jogger will cost you $98, whereas this dupe from the Willit Store is less than a third of the price at $32.99.
Align Tank Top
Perhaps my favorite tank top from Lululemon, the Align Tank Top will cost you $58, while this The Gym People dupe is less than half at $22.99. We’re not the only ones to have discovered this lulu dupe… it’s a #1 Bestseller for Women’s Sports Bras on Amazon! If you don’t trust us, there’s over 30,000 reviews that just might convince you to give it a try.
Speed Up Short
I’m not a runner, and I don’t know that I ever will be, but I do stay dreaming of summer shorts weather (moving from Florida to Wisconsin has made me team #SummerIsTheBestSeason). Perfect for running, walking, or sitting outside on a warm day, the Speed Up Short costs $58. They may not be identical, but CRZ Yoga has a similar short for only $28.
Define Jacket
As classic piece from Lululemon, the Define Jacket has a perfect cut and sporty design, a perfect layer for in-between weather. The original costs $118, but QUEENIEKE sells a pretty dang similar jacket for $40.99.
Align High-Rise Pant 25″
The famously butter-soft align leggings are a favorite of nearly anyone that’s worn them. For the 25″ length, CRZ Yoga has a $26 legging that feels like it comes close to the Align magic… for less than a third of the OG price tag of $98.
Align High-Rise Pant 28″
If you’re looking for the slightly longer Align dupe, the 28″ legging from COLORFULKOALA is about as close as it gets.
Align High-Rise Short 6″
Biker shorts are hot right now, because they are perfect short for everything. From running errands to getting zen in yoga, the Align High-Rise Short is everyone’s favorite. If you’re looking to bring that $58 price tag down to $17.99, Lavento sell an eerily similar pair. The big difference here? The lulu aligns are sold in 4″ and 6″ inseams, while the dupe offers 3″ and 5″ inseams.
Tracker Low-Rise Lined Short 4″
The Tracker Low-Rise Lined Short costs $58, while Blooming Jelly’s similar short is $24.99. The most discernible difference is the dupe has a high rise cut, whereas the original is a low rise. I almost prefer the Blooming Jelly version as I am all about high waisted everything these days!
What did you think? Similar enough it might be hard to spot from across the room? Or are you a ride-or-die Lululemon gal? A little bit of everything, these Lululemon dupes may not be the real thing, but they’re still comfy and super functional! Great options if you love the fit but you’re ballin’ on a budget.
Stubborn for the real thing?
Lululemon is not known to largely markdown their items, but there are a few ways to get your favorites for a bargain.
Group fitness/studio instructors/private instructors of adult participants, personal trainers, professional run club leaders, studio owners/managers, athletes (eligible athletes include professional, Olympic, university/college (non-NCAA only), and elite amateur athletes), & coaches and team trainers/staff can receive 25% off both in store & online orders by becoming part of their Sweat Collective.
Health care workers can receive 15% off! This discount is available both in stores and online.
If you like Lululemon, and don’t mind lightly used items, Lululemon now has a Lulu Like New website that sells gently used apparel. Worth checking out!
Disclaimer: All photos used in this post were taken directly from the site to which the item is linked. None of these photographs are our own.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
In the rugged farmlands of northern Big Island, the Waipi’o Valley is nestled into the breathtaking coastline. A sacred personification of Hawaiian history and culture, this lush cliffside is known as the “Valley of the Kings”. The gorgeous lookout delivers some of the most stunning views on the island, and for those looking for a little extra adventure, the steep hike down into the valley will literally take your breath away. This valley quintessentially showcases the wonders of natural topographical Hawaiian beauty.
Big Island has a diverse array of climates and landscapes. The Waipi’o Valley is a must-visit gem as it celebrates both the beauty the Hawaiian islands are know for, as well as a the cultural significance of the land.
Life’s About the Climb
If you decide you want to get a closer view of the valley, there are three ways down the steep, 25% grade road. If you rented a four wheel drive vehicle (AWD, FWD, & RWD not permitted), you can tackle the descent and subsequent ascent by car. For those looking for a more unique experience, tours are available via horseback. It’s not uncommon to see horses in this area, so you will feel right at home with nature! For fit, able-bodied tourists, the climb down into the valley is possible by foot.
Oh the Places You’ll Go
If you’re driving or walking down yourself, you will come upon a fork in the road. Going to the left will lead you to a view of the staggering Hiilawe Falls. It’s important to note, you will be able to see the falls from afar, but it will not take you to the base of the falls. Be mindful wandering away from the paths. Private property does run adjacent to the areas you are walking or driving through.
If you take a right at the fork in the road, a muddy, dirt path will lead you to the Waipi’o Black Sand Beach. There are bathrooms at this beach but no lifeguard. This beach area is known to have a hefty undertow as well as some serious rip currents, so anyone less than a very experienced local surfer is highly encouraged to enjoy the water from the safety of the beach. From your perch on the beach, you can keep an eager eye out for dolphins and whales, as it’s not uncommon to see them in this area.
A bit more dependent on the recent weather, you may be able to see the Kaluahine Falls, if you’re up for a rocky walk over the boulders. These falls are in the cliffside under the lookout, so you have about a half mile or so to conquer to get there. The upside is that you’re accompanied by the jaw-dropping Hawaiian coastline the entire time.
Taking the Scenic Route
Looking for a scenic drive? The Hamakua Heritage Corridor begins in Hilo and winds its way up to the northern part of the island, ending at the Waipio Valley Lookout. Along the way and only a little out of the way, you’ll find the ‘Akaka Falls State Park. If it looks familiar, it’s because these falls were a backdrop in the widely acclaimed Jurassic Park movies!
Not far from the lookout is the Hamakua Harvest Farmers Market. If you are passing through on a Sunday from 9am to 2pm, this is a must-stop! A fantastic way to truly support the local economy while sampling locally sourced coconut milk gelato, spring rolls, smoked fish, and so much more!
Will Stop for Snacks
Nothing gets you hungry like taking in some spectacular views. On your way either to or from Hilo, you will drive past the best smoothie spot on the island: What’s Shakin’. I could not get enough of my Mango Tango, but truly all of their smoothies looked delicious.
The Tex Drive In is infamous for their malasadas— a Portuguese donut… think eclair meets beignet. Located in Honakaa, halfway between Waipi’o Valley Lookout and Hilo, this delicious little dessert is a perfect pre or post adventure snack.
If you’re planning on heading over to Kona via Waimea, the Big Island Brewhaus has beer, margaritas, and food. With a wide array of craft beers to choose from, this is the perfect stop to cool your jets after a strenuous hike.
Cliffside, Waterfalls, Volcanos… Oh My!
Big Island is home to a myriad of awe-inspiring wonders of nature. If you loved the lush cliffside of the Waipi’o Valley, you must head south to keep exploring. In a world above the clouds, Mauna Kea offers an unparalleled view of the stars. Even further south, the Hawaii Volcano National Park boasts endless stretches of rocky terrain. The natural beauty of this island is guaranteed to leave you wanting more.
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FSU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
Hawaii is home to some of the most amazing sunsets in the world, but Mauna Kea takes the cake for the best vantage point to gaze off into the horizon as the sun slowly sinks away. From a perch above the clouds, it’s truly a one-of-a-kind experience to feel like you’re standing in the on top of the world, above the clouds.
Differing from the classic beachfront Hawaii experience, a trip up to Mauna Kea will wow in a completely different fashion. Being at the summit of any mountain is a humbling feeling, but the cultural significance of Mauna Kea makes this adventure even more special.
Big Island is known for its biodiversity, and nothing showcases that like going from a sandy beach to a snowy mountain top in right around two hours. Throw a jacket in with your bathing suit and add Mauna Kea to your Big Island bucket list!
Visitor’s Information Center (VIS)
Cool your jets and acclimate to the altitude at a refreshing 9,200 feet. Mauna Kea is unique in that you can start your morning with your toes in the water and be almost 14,000 feet up in the air about two hours later. This is some serious elevation change for a body to accustom itself to, so if you’re planning on going all the way to the summit, a stop at the VIS is highly recommended to mitigate any potential altitude sickness.
Even if you do plan to go to the summit to watch the sunrise or sunset, the telescope viewing is done at the VIS. While you can see the stars well at the top, you may actually see them a bit better at the lower elevation as the decreased oxygen present at the summit can make your vision slightly less acute.
Jacket? Pack It!
Even in the summer months, it is cold at the top of Mauna Kea. While you don’t usually think of throwing a jacket in your luggage when you’re headed to Hawaii, if you’re planning on visiting Mauna Kea, bringing a jacket is a must! Keeping with the theme of warmth, you will want some closed-toe shoes and pants on as well. If you’re planning on being up there for a while or doing any amount of hiking around, a hat, sunglasses, sunscreen, a chapstick with SPF, extra water, and a snack are all highly recommended.
Getting to the Summit
Drive
For the bold, a 4WD or AWD vehicle is required to make the climb up the access road to the summit of the mountain. Before you embark up the steep leg from the VIS to the top, a ranger will check your car to ensure your car has the capacity to make it both up and down as well as the gas (at least ½ a tank). If you’re renting a car and are considering taking it to Mauna Kea, check with the rental car agency to ensure you are permitted to do so, as some specifically state they do not want their vehicles taken up to the summit.
Tour
If you prefer someone else do the driving, there are daily tours, which transport guests from their hotel in Hilo or Kona out to Mauna Kea. These tours usually include dinner, a parka and gloves to ensure warmth is a priority at the top of the mountain, and some guided star-gazing at the visitor’s center.
Hike
If you opt for the hiking option, know this is NOT recommended for casual, spur-of-the-moment hikers. The 12-13 mile round trip loop requires packing enough water (1-2 gallons) and sustenance for the 8 hour hike as well as appropriate layers. It is not uncommon to encounter winds or rain while making the trek.
The packing list for a hiker is a bit more comprehensive than the casual viewer. Consider also bringing a flashlight, compass, hiking poles, and aspirin (mild altitude sickness can result in a headache). Additionally, depending on the time of year, a dust mask may be helpful in the early morning hours to help pre-warm the air as you breathe. This can help reduce some of the burning-in-your-lungs sensation that can happen when hiking in cold, dry climates. Check the weather before you go!
Not For Everyone
The trek to the summit is not for everyone, even if you’re considering driving. Children under the age of 13 are affected more significantly by the changes in altitude and as such are discouraged from going. Additionally, pregnant women as well as individuals with any cardiac or respiratory health concerns should refrain from pursuing the higher altitude vantage point.
Most importantly, you should NOT plan on visiting Mauna Kea within 24 hours of scuba diving. The adaptations your body makes to tolerate the pressure changes whilst diving require time to acclimate before they can adjust again to tolerate the altitude of the mountain. You don’t want to end up with “the bends”!
Tacky Tourist
Mauna Kea, in particular the summit, is considered a very holy place. At the top of the mountain there is a “true summit” area, and it is extremely disrespectful to go wandering over to this region of the summit. This summit area is set apart from the general area that tourists gather, but there is not much signage warning wandering tourists away. To avoid making this mistake, know this “true summit” area is the first hilltop you see to your right as you reach the top of the mountain. It has a small altar-like structure, you can see from afar.
In this same vein, trail etiquette is above averagely important if you elect to do any hiking. Do not go wandering off the trail and largely try to leave your footprint on this volcanic mountain as small as possible.
Bye Bye Baby
After the sun has set, rangers usher everyone back down the mountain as the cars’ headlights can negatively affect the telescopes’ performance. On the way down, there are three parking lots you can pull into. These are useful for a few reasons. First and foremost, the descent is steep, so you will be giving your breaks a workout. Allowing them to cool down in a parking lot for a few minutes is highly encouraged. This brake cool-down break is the perfect opportunity to lay down on the ground and look up at the stars. There is no light pollution, and it is a breathtaking view on a clear night.
Did You Know
Mauna Kea towers 13,796 feet above sea level; however, it is actually, the tallest mountain on the planet. While it’s height is certainly impressive, at just under 14,000 feet, one might mistakenly assume it’s not even the tallest mountain in North America. This isn’t wrong per se, but it does discount where Mauna Kea sets her roots. The 13,796 feet above sea level is truly just the tip of the iceberg as she stretches another 18,900 to reach the ocean floor. When you consider the height in total, Mauna Kea is a staggering 32,696 feet tall!
Onto Your Next Great Adventure
If you loved the volcanic mountain that is Mauna Kea, Hawaii Volcano National Park is the next must visit stop on your Big Island road trip. Big Island is comprised of six volcanoes, but Kīlauea is the only one that is intermittently active. Definitely worth checking out, but especially if she is currently erupting!
written by McKenna
If you look up diva in the dictionary, you will find a picture of McKenna Lee. Loud-mouthed and overly opinionated she may have the biggest personality (read: attitude) of us all. McKenna is in college at FSU, but her passion lies in her small business Mack Swimwear and running her small group through church. She lives for days spent in a bathing suit, and tries to go surfing in every new beach town she visits.
At the very tip of Florida a small archipelago called the Florida Keys stretches out into the abyss where the Gulf of Mexico meets the Atlantic Ocean. At the end of this stretch lies Key West… a small island where the sun is always hot, the drinks are always cold, and the beach is always beautiful. In Key West, you’re always on island time!
Whether you’re visiting Key West with your honey, your favorite bachelorette, or your rowdy family, you’re going to love the laid back beach town vibe Key West emotes, with its unique conch-style houses, beautiful coral reefs, and sandy beaches. You might just have to indulge in a classic Key West Rum Runner if you’re feeling a little extra frisky!
Below we have detailed out favorite places to grab a bite, the best happy hour sports in town, and all the most adventurous ways to spend your day exploring Key West.
GOOD EATS
Blue Heaven
If you’re looking for an oasis in the middle of a bustling paradise, Blue Heaven is the groovy restaurant and bar you’re looking for. Not only will you LOVE the food, but live music makes your dining experience dinner and a show. Vibe check? Cool vibes only!
Sloppy Joe’s
Looking for some long lasting fun while you enjoy a good meal? Sloppy Joe’s features live music and a dance floor to boot— this restaurant is a little slice of Nashville down in the tip of Florida.
Seaside Cafe at the Mansion
Whether you’re planning on eating or drinking, you cannot go wrong at the Seaside Cafe. The food is delicious and the mojitos are refreshing… what more could you want?! An amazing view? The ocean is just a stone’s throw away. Such a lovely cafe with a delightfully fun atmosphere!
Mattheessen’s
There’s no such thing as a cookie that’s too big, and Mattheessen’s proves this with their amazing half-pound cookies. Your self-control will not be able to resist stopping in one of their two locations… both are on Duval street, so you can’t miss it! If cookies don’t tempt you, they also sell fudge, macaroons, key lime pie, and ice cream. It’s Florida, so no matter how cold it is elsewhere, it’s always ice cream weather in Key West.
Margaritaville
Can you go to Key West and not stop into Margaritaville for a drink? Channel your inner Jimmy Buffet and order yourself a margarita— or two piña coladas… one for each hand! We enjoyed all our food there as well!
SO MUCH TO DO, SO LITTLE TIME
Key West Butterfly and Nature Conservatory
There’s something breathtaking about the ethereal beauty of a butterfly. At the Key West Butterfly and Nature Conservatory, you will feel like a Disney princess come to life as you wander through the lush, tropical garden with hundreds of butterflies.
SouthernMost Point
The large landmark buoy is a hallmark visit during any Key West trip. If you are this far south in the country, you must visit the southernmost point in the continental United States!
FYI: Depending on the time of year, you may wait in line for this photo.
Dry Tortuga National Park
Every day the Yankee Freedom departs from Key West at 7:30 am and heads out to Fort Jefferson in the Dry Tortugas National Park. It takes just over two hours to reach the island from Key West.
Once there, you will be able to swim, lounge on the beach, walk around and through the fort, take a guided tour, and snorkel (snorkeling gear included in the cost ticket). The water is crystal clear and truly perfect for snorkeling. If you keep an eye out while walking the perimeter of the fort, you may find some beautiful pieces of sea glass as well— a charming memento of a gorgeous place. Adventurers spend five to six hours on the island, so the trip lasts about ten hours in total.
As a note: While we actually have not taken this cruise, we have sailed down to Fort Jefferson in the Dry Tortugas from our hometown in Fort Myers, FL. We would see the Yankee Freedom arrive and depart every day throughout our stay, and we are well versed in all the beauty waiting to be discovered on this small island. The starkly clear water, beautiful snorkeling, and immense calm of endless blue are incredible and certainly worth taking the day to see!
High Stakes Charters
If you’ve never been deep sea fishing, Key West is the place to do it, and High Stakes Charters is the group to do it with! Whether you’re in Key West for a family vacation or a bachelor party, this is an amazing time for all ages. Any boat day is a good day, but a boat day offshore fishing is one you’ll never forget!
Mallory Square
At the north end of Duval street, the road ends and you will find Mallory Square. This is THE spot to watch the sunset in Key West. A couple hours before sunset, a sunset celebration commences. This daily ritual includes a wide array of performers and vendors that entertain while others wait for the sun to go down. Live music and a stunt show of sorts are almost guaranteed.
Fort Zachary Taylor Historic State Park
The perfect combination of historic fortitude meets beautiful Florida beaches lies at the Fort Zachary Taylor Historic State Park. There’s something to do for everyone in the family! History buffs can wander throughout the fort, while outdoor enthusiasts have a wide array of activities to choose from: biking, fishing, bird-watching, hiking, paddling, scuba diving, snorkeling, and swimming. At the end of the day, this is also a beautiful spot to watch the sunset.
THE HAPPIEST HOURS
If you enjoy a cold, refreshing beverage of choice, you will have endless options to choose from. These are a few that we found with some above average happy hour specials. Enjoy!
Pepe’s Cafe
The only thing better than a fresh-squeezed margarita is a $6 fresh squeezed margarita. Pepe’s Cafe also does half off oysters for their happy hour. Their breakfast spread is also notoriously delicious!
Happy Hour: 4-6 p.m.
First Flight Island Restaurant & Brewery
First Flight Island Restaurant & Brewery has some historical roots as it is housed in the birthplace of Pan American World Airways… Pan-Am’s first tickets were sold out of this very building in 1927! These days, you can enjoy half off their house drafts as well as some finger-lickin’ plates.
Happy Hour: 4-6 p.m.
Hank’s Hair of the Dog Saloon
What’s better than one happy hour? TWO! Hank’s Hair of the Dog Saloon has a brunch happy hour to help get the party started. You can indulge in some two-for-one mimosa’s or perhaps kick your hangover to the curb with a couple bloody mary’s. Afternoon happy hour is pretty standard, but they have live music playing throughout the afternoon and into the evening.
Happy Hour: 11am-2pm & 4pm to 7pm
The Roost
The understated vintage charm of The Roost will leave you feeling glad you wandered a bit from the touristy chaos of duval street. This specialty cocktail bar is guaranteed to deliver something a step above the rest.
Happy Hour: 3-6 pm
Bonus Round
If you are driving down to Key West, stop by Robbie’s to feed the tarpon!! These massive fish will leap out of the water to eat bait fish right out of your hand. The experience is exhilarating and just a little frightening.
Robbie’s is on Islamorada (about halfway down the Florida Keys archipelago), so it makes for a perfect mid-drive pit stop!
We hope you have the best time enjoying your relaxing Key West vacation. From Duval Street to the Dry Tortugas, so many adventures await (don’t forget to pack your sunscreen)! A Rum Runner is the official drink of Key West, so be sure to try at least one while you’re there… cheers!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Despite the state of Oregon being a cornucopia of etherial, natural beauty, it is home to only one national park: Crater Lake. Approximately 7,700 years ago, the 12,000-foot-tall volcano known as Mount Mazama erupted and collapsed, forming the 1,943 foot deep Crater Lake. This is the deepest lake in America! Crater Lake has become renown for its beautiful, illustrious blue color, as the lake’s water comes directly from snow or rain, making it one of the cleanest and clearest lakes in the world. Teeming with wilderness adventures year-round, a visit to Crater Lake is a must!
RIM DRIVE
The Rim Drive stretches in a 33 mile loop, encircling Crater Lake. It boasts 30 overlooks, with each highlighting a different view of the lake, a remarkable geologic formation, or a noteworthy environmental feature.
While some of these stops have exhibits with information about the view, most of the pullouts do not have signage… just hypnotizing views with hundreds of shades of blue. Definitely leave yourself lots of time to drive around, because it’s rather hard not to stop at every pullout along the way!
ADVENTURES AWAIT
Summer/Fall
Lake Tour
This tour is a two-hour cruise. During this time, guests will circle the perimeter of the lake, affording up-close views of Wizard Island, Phantom Ship, and the sparkling depths of the lake itself. As the beautiful views abound, a ranger will share information about the Crater Lake’s history, geology, and culture.
The tour starts at the Cleetwood Cove Boat Dock on the north side of Crater Lake. To access the dock visitors must to hike the Cleetwood Cove Trail, one of the park’s steepest trails. The trail is 1.1 miles long and has a 700-foot elevation change.
There are two species of fish that live in Crater Lake: Kokanee salmon and rainbow trout. These fish are actually not native to the lake, so visitors are encouraged to fish. You don’t need a license and there’s no limit on how much you catch!
Visitors may fish along the shoreline any time, as permitted by the weather. The shoreline is reached via the 1.1-mile Cleetwood Trail.
Important to note: fishermen and women must use artificial bait, so as to not inadvertently introduce an outside species to the lake.
Hiking
While there are no hiking trails that encircle the lake, there are 16 day-hike trails in addition to five longer backcountry hikes. The hikes are stratified in categories of easy, moderate, and strenuous to ensure hikers of all fitness levels are equipped for outdoor adventure.
The Pacific Crest Trail (PCT) stretches 2,650 miles from Mexico up to Canada, and a portion of this trek crosses through Crater Lake National Park. The main trail primarily stays on the outskirts of the park, so you would only really find this trail if you were looking for it.
Winter/Spring
Skiing
The park features a variety of marked and unmarked routes for bold cross-country skiers. Adventure enthusiasts can choose a route through forests, along West Rim Drive, or to Vidae Falls along the East Rim Drive.
Crater Lake provides a park newspaper that provides an annual update on ski trails. Certainly worth checking out as you plan your wintery adventure.
While no ski equipment rental is available in the park, it can be rented along the way as you drive in. Call Waldron’s in Roseburg, OR at 541. 672. 8992 or Blackbird in Medford, OR at 541. 779. 5431 (Blackbird pricing available here) to reserve a pair of skis.
SnowShoeing
Never been snowshoeing before? New to Crater Lake? Trek through the snow with a Park Ranger and enjoy an off-trail exploration through the snowy forests and meadows along the rim of Crater Lake.
No previous snowshoeing experience is necessary. The snowshoes are provided free of charge, and there is no cost for the tour (besides the cost of admission into the park).
These tours are available Saturdays and Sundays, December through April. Advance reservations are required. For more information or to sign up, you can call the park’s visitor center at 541. 594. 3100.
even in the middle of July, there’s snow on the ground!
PLANNING YOUR VISIT
When to Come
Generally speaking, the best months to visit Crater Lake are July, August, and September. Even in these summer months, you will see snow on the ground. If you’re planning to be in Oregon in October or June, you may want to check out the Crater Lake operations or alerts pages to ensure the roads are open. This part of Oregon receives an annual average of 42 feet of snow, so the Rim Drive roads are seasonally closed for the winter season.
Visitor’s Center
Crater Lake maintains not one, but two visitor centers. The Steel Visitor Center is open year-round, whereas the Rim Visitor Center is only open in the summer months (May 22-October 31st). In 2021, the Rim Visitor Center was temporarily closed down due to COVID. Additionally, the Steel Visitor Center will also be closed through the end of 2022, to complete renovations to the building structure.
SLEEPS
Crater Lake Lodge
Open mid-May to mid-October, the Crater Lake Lodge boasts 71 rooms, in a picturesque chalet overlooking Crater Lake. Pets are not permitted. To make a reservation, you can either call (866) 292-6720 or do so online.
The Cabins at Mazama Village
Seven miles south of Rim Village, you’ll find Mazama Village with 40 cabin units available for visitors. They are open late May to late September. Pets are not permitted. To make a reservation, you can call (866) 292-6720 or do so online.
Mazama Campground
The Mazama Campground has 214 sites available for tents and RVs (50’ maximum). There are some electric hookups available for RVs. Campsite amenities include restrooms, potable water, a gas station, food storage lockers, and a dump station. This campground is open early June to late September. To make a reservation, you can either call (541) 594-2255 ext. 3 or do so online.
DOGGOS
Pets on leash are allowed on paved roads and parking lots that are free of significant snow. Leashes must be no more than 6 feet in length, and only one pet per walker is allowed.
Areas to Walk in Summer and Fall
The 1/4-mile paved promenade at Rim Village (excellent views here!)
Through the campground loops at Mazama Village.
The following trails: Godfrey Glen Trail, The Lady of the Woods Trail, The Grayback Drive, and The Pacific Crest Trail (note: these trails do not offer any views of the lake).
Areas to Walk in Winter and Spring
Throughout these seasons, the most popular place to walk a dog is the Rim Village parking lot.
Pets are allowed only on one park trail: the Pacific Crest Trail, which is open to cross-country skiing and snowshoeing. The Pacific Crest Trail is open year-round to pets, whether it is covered by snow or not.
Pets are not allowed on other park trails, off-trail, or on unplowed roads. They are also not allowed inside park buildings, including Crater Lake Lodge and the Mazama Village Cabins. Service animals are exempt from these regulations. Service dogs are allowed on park trails and also on boat tours.
GOOD EATS
Whether you’re looking to grab a snack for your hike or to rest your weary legs while you eat, you have a few different options for chowing down while you’re visiting Crater Lake. With three restaurants and a general store, all your bases will be covered. Hours do vary based on time of year, so check here to ensure you’ll be able to properly fill your belly (or your car!).
Rim Village Café
This spot in the southwest rim of the lake serves grab-and-go salads and sandwiches.
Annie Creek Restaurant
This restaurant can be found in Mazama Village, near the Annie Spring entrance to the park. They sell grab-and-go sandwiches and salads for lunch, but they also serve pizza, burgers, and other entrees for dinner.
Crater Lake Lodge Dining Room
Crater Lake Lodge offers casual dining with a lake-view setting. Due to the restrictions brought on by the COVID-19 pandemic, meals at the Lodge are currently only available for Lodge guests.
Mazama Village Store
This general store sells groceries, camping supplies, firewood, and gasoline.
ENTRANCE FEES & PASSES
Pass Type
Summer Cost*
Winter Cost*
Single Vehicle Fee
(Grants unlimited entry for one vehicle for 7 consecutive days— aka keep your receipt if you plan to come back!)
* Summer is May 22nd-October 31st. Winter is November 1st-May 21st.
We hope you have a lovely time taking in this gorgeous reflection of nature’s beauty. If you are exploring the national parks throughout the Pacific North West, be sure to check out Mount Rainier next!
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
In our family gift giving is almost a competitive sport. We love thinking of the most perfect, personal gifts to get each other, and will often buy them months in advance of Christmas or birthdays. No one is as hard to shop for as our father! We have curated a list of our favorite gifts for dads, brothers, and significant others. From functional to what-to-get-someone-that-has-everything, we have ideas for everyone. Happy gifting!
A perfect gift for whiskey drinkers of any shape and size. This gift works for all kinds of occasions: house-warming, graduation, Christmas, or World Whiskey Day (May 21st, FYI). Pairs perfectly with a bottle of their favorite whiskey.
Price: $57.98+
Bar Cart
Rounding out the alcohol-related gifts, a bar cart is a perfect entertainment piece. Not only are they a fun, stylish accent to any room, but it’s also the perfect way to be ready for a party at any time!
The Rustic Three-Level bar cart suspends up to four bottles of wine, maximizing available space on this beautifully functional cart. The West Elm Mid-Century Walnut bar cart has a retro character that is sure to make this cart the center of attention— even if no drinks are being served.
Sentiment meets functionality with this perfect gift for any music lover. All the words on the center of the LP are customizable to make it completely your own. Plus, it’s also a functioning clock!
We are obsessed with this travel backpack from Cotopaxi! This is the perfect gift for the whimsical explorer in your family. The design is beyond intuitive as the bag is perfectly crafted to maximize space when packing all your essentials. As a bonus, Cotopaxi is a fantastic, environmentally conscious company with fab customer service… did someone say ‘lifetime warranty and repairs’?? We’re actually so keen on this backpack we wrote an entire blog post about it!
Price: $220
Grill
A grill can be a deeply personal decision that takes loads of research and review-scouring, but if you have a general idea what you’re looking for, a grill can be a fantastic gift. The Pit Boss Sportman 500 is an versatile pellet grill, under $500. The Weber Genesis II is an awesome propane grill, for less than $1,000. Regardless what kind you get, he is SURE to be delighted.
If you’re price range is less grill and more grill rubs, this set is sure to excite your favorite grill-master artisan. With rubs inspired from all over the country, everything is guaranteed to be finger-lickin’ good!
Hello coffee lovers looking to elevate their home barista game. A perfect espresso in less than 60 seconds? Yes, yes that is the best gift you can give a coffee addict.
This lumbar support pillow is a perfect gift for anyone that spends an above average amount of time in the car or traveling. Its cushiony support makes even the longest rides far more comfortable. We’ve actually bought this for our dad twice now, because he likes it so much!
The perfect gift for your pizza-aholic friend. This magic hot plate will have your ‘za hot and ready to eat before your kitchen oven has even pre-heated.
Ahhhh underwear. The gift you hated as a kid and now cherish as an adult. These boxers are my husband’s favorite. Just spendy enough that you might not want to buy them for yourself, but you would be delighted if someone bought a pair (or two) for you.
Who owns a dog and isn’t at least a little obsessed with it? If you’ve already sat through the entire camera roll of your friend’s MANY doggo pictures, you can give them one more to treasure as a sentimental wall art piece. Not guaranteed to make them cry but not unlikely!!
Taking pride in your yard is an honorable hobby, but pulling weeds can become a back-breaking endeavor, for even the most dedicated lawn artisan. Grandpa’s Weeder is a simple yet effective tool to make weed-pulling a breeze.
The Hypervolt 2 by Hyperice is the solution your husband’s tight muscles have been waiting for. From low back pain after a long day of yard work to sore legs after the gym, this percussion massager has you covered!
A perfect gift for a dad or grandpa with children that have left the nest and spread out. Nothing makes our dad happier than having all his girls at home, and this fun sign is a sweet way to remember that ever when everyone is spread out, they’re never too far to come home! It’s such a unique way to think of your loved ones!
Price: $155+
Mega Yard Games
Who doesn’t love being the host with the most?! Jumbo yard games are an enticing way to keep everyone entertained. From Cornhole to Dice to Jenga, these super-sized games will be the perfect addition to your next outdoor gathering!
Record players are back and they’re not going anywhere! This Audio-Technica model is a perfect nicer-end entry level record player for anyone interested in a throw-back auditory experience. Not only is it a different way to experience music, but once you have a record player, it opens up a whole new world for record hunting as you begin to curate your record collection.
Price: $149
Disclaimer: All photos used in this post were taken directly from the site to which the item is linked. None of these photographs are our own.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
Every girl LOVES her wedding day, and lives for small ways to hold onto the amazing memories of that day. As a newly wed, here are some things I loved that we did and others I wish we had done, to integrate memories from our wedding decor into our home decor and alternatively repurpose it in subtle ways.
Give That Bouquet a Second Life
Eye-catching coasters and trays are already a fun and function way to decorate a coffee table… what better way to do so than with flowers from your wedding day. A subtle nod to your wedding day and a beautiful decor piece.
Dried and pressed flowers can make for a unique wall decor statement piece. If anyone asks, you can certainly fill them in on the sentimental backstory, but it’s a lovely way to nonchalantly put your wedding bouquet on display. Depending on your style, there are a few different small businesses that create these works of art. A few of my favorites can be found here, here, and here.
Put My Name Up in Lights
Last name signs are becoming a popular accent piece or photo op at weddings, but the advantage to choosing a wooden sign, it that it’s super easy to incorporate into your house decor.
Below I have included the wooden sign featured at our wedding, and it’s current home over the coat rack.
Long Live the Invitation
Not everyone has a sentimental attachment to their invitations, but if you were rather fond of yours, it can live on indestructibly as a handmade, wooden engraved replica. A cute decoration for your office or a sturdy memory for your wedding keepsake box… the choice is yours!
Forever and Always
What better way to remember your wedding vows to one another than to have them hung up in your bedroom? Such a sweet and aesthetically pleasing way to reminisce over the promises you made one another. This wood etched pair is one-of-a-kind… just like your love!
If you’re looking for some combined vows and picture action, this canvas print is an awesome option. The floating wood hangers make for a fun, different frame.
Cuff Links
Just a couple sentimental cuff link options to hold your sweetie close. The tiny envelope cuff links are like a men’s locket… perfect for a little extra love on your special day and any day after. Alternatively, you can opt for some simple, elegant cuff links that display a small swatch of you loved one’s wedding dress.
This one s a bit of a long con, since most newly weds don’t immediately have a tiny human needing a christening outfit, but it’s such a precious idea to keep in the back of your mind. So many wedding dresses sit in a box on a shelf forever, so this is a sweet way to repurpose it.
Who doesn’t love a good puzzle? It’s such a cute way to put one of your wedding photos to use. A fun activity to do on your anniversary! Also, imagine how much fun you potential kids might have doing a puzzle with mom and dad on it?? Just think, this could be the start of Sunday puzzle night.
Your wedding is such an exciting day in your life that goes by so quickly. These sentimental keepsakes are a warm reminder of the day you promised your lives to one another. We hope you found a new idea or two to make that wedding day last. Congratulations!
Disclaimer: Almost all photos used in this post were taken directly from the site to which the item is linked. With the exception of the two noted, none of these photographs are our own.
written by Hannah
Hannah has learned the hard way to be careful what you wish for— sometimes happily ever after lands you with a husband and puppy… in the Midwest. Despite leaving Florida to move to Wisconsin, Hannah maintains her bossy big sister role with regular phone calls to keep up with all the little sister shenanigans. Notoriously chatty with her patients as well, Hannah stays busy as a physical therapist, but loves spending weekends exploring newfound hikes.
